Korg Krome Music Workstasion 61Key Users Manual Operation Guide

73key to the manual 290d0a03-cbf4-4a01-95fa-3bf9e81731ea

: Korg Korg-Krome-Music-Workstasion-61Key-Users-Manual-468815 korg-krome-music-workstasion-61key-users-manual-468815 korg pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 142 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

4E

Operation Guide

ii

About this manual

The manuals and how to use them

TheKROMEcomeswiththefollowingmanuals.

•VideoManual(approximately60minutes)

•QuickStartGuide(printedandPDF)

•OperationGuide(PDF)

• ParameterGuide(PDF)

•VoiceNameList(PDF)

Allofthesemanualsareontheincludedaccessorydisc.

AprintedcopyisincludedonlyfortheQuickStart

Guide.

Video Manual

Thisvideoillustratesthemainfunctionalityofthe

KROME.

Quick Start Guide

ThisprovidesasimpleexplanationoftheKROME’s

functions.Tobegin,pleasewatchtheVideoManualand

readtheQuickStartGuide.

Operation Guide

Putsimply,theOperationGuideisdesignedtoanswer

thequestion,“HowdoIdothis?”

Itexplainsthenamesandfunctionsofeachpartofthe

KROME,basicoperation,anoverviewofeachmode,

howtoeditsounds,recordonthesequencer,andsoon.

Thisguidealsoexplainsthebasicsofeffects,the

Arpeggiator,DrumTrack,andDrumKits.

Finally,italsocontainsatroubleshootingguideaswellas

supplementalinformationsuchasalistofspecifications.

Parameter Guide

TheParameterGuideisdesignedtoanswerthequestion,

“Whatdoesthisdo?”

Organizedbymodeandpage,theParameterGuide

includesinformationoneachandeveryparameterinthe

KROME.

Voice Name List

TheVoiceNameListlistsallofthesoundsandsetups

thatareintheKROMEwhenitisshippedfromthe

factory,includingPrograms,Combinations,

Multisamples,Drumsamples,DrumKits,Arpeggio

Patterns,DrumTrackPatterns,TemplateSongs,and

EffectPresets.

PDF versions

TheKROMEPDFmanualsaredesignedforeasy

navigationandsearching.TheyincludeextensivePDF

contentsinformation,whichgenerallyappearsonthe

sideofthewindowinyourPDFreaderandletsyoujump

quicklytoaspecificsection.Allcross‐referencesare

hyper‐links,sothatclickingonthemautomaticallytakes

youtothesourceofthereference.

Conventions in this manual

References to the KROME

TheKROMEisavailablein88‐key,73‐key,and61‐key

models.Themanualsrefertoallmodelswithout

distinctionas“theKROME.”Thefrontpanelandrear

panelillustrationsinthemanualshowthe61‐keymodel,

buttheyapplyidenticallytotheothermodels.

Abbreviations for the manuals: QS, OG, PG,

VNL

Inthedocumentation,referencestothemanualsare

abbreviatedasfollows.

QS:QuickStartGuide

OG:OperationGuide

PG:ParameterGuide

VNL:TheVoiceNameList

Symbols , , Note, Tips

Thesesymbolsrespectivelyindicateacaution,aMIDI‐

relatedexplanation,asupplementarynote,oratip.

Example screen displays

Theparametervaluesshownintheexamplescreensof

thismanualareonlyforexplanatorypurposes,andmay

notnecessarymatchthevaluesthatappearintheDisplay

ofyourinstrument.

MIDI-related explanations

CC#isanabbreviationforControlChangeNumber.

InexplanationsofMIDImessages,numbersinsquare

brackets[]alwaysindicatehexadecimalnumbers.

What is REMs * ?

(ResonantstructureandElectroniccircuit

ModelingSystem)isKorg’sproprietarytechnologyfor

digitallyrecreatingthenumerousfactorsthatproduce

andinfluenceasound,rangingfromthesound‐

productionmechanismsofacousticinstrumentsand

electric/electronicmusicalinstruments,totheresonances

ofaninstrumentbodyorspeakercabinet,thesoundfield

inwhichtheinstrumentisplayed,thepropagationroute

ofthesound,theelectricalandacousticresponseofmics

andspeakers,andthechangesproducedbyvacuum

tubesandtransistors.

*Allproductnamesandcompanynamesarethe

trademarksorregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespective

owners.

ThankyouforpurchasingtheKorgKROMEMusicWorkstation.Tohelpyougetthemostoutofyournew

instrument,pleasereadthismanualcarefully.

iii

Table of Contents

About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

Introduction to the KROME . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Front and rear panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Objects in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

About the KROME’s modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Basic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Turning the power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Connecting the AC adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Turning the power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Turning the power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Audio connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Connecting a damper pedal, foot switch, or

foot pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Connecting the KROME to a computer. . . . . . . . . . . .20

Connecting MIDI devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Playing and editing Programs . . . . . . . .21

Playing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Selecting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Program information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Using Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Performing with the arpeggiator or drum track . . .26

Easy Program editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Adjusting the EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Adjusting the volume balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Using realtime controls to edit the sound or

effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Using Tone Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Comparing the unedited sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Saving your edits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Detailed Editing with Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Before you start editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

An overview of the edit pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Basic oscillator settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Creating time-varying changes (LFO and EG). . . . . .35

Diverse modulation settings

(AMS and AMS mixer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Controlling Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Using Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Using the Amp section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Making controller assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Arpeggiator settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Drum Track settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Automatically importing a Program

into Sequence mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Playing and editing Combinations . . . .43

Playing combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Selecting Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Using controllers to modify the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Performing with the arpeggiator or drum track . . . 45

Easy Combination editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Changing the program of each timbre. . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Adjusting the mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Simple editing using the knobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Saving a Combination you’ve edited . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Detailed Editing with Combinations . . . . . . . . . . 47

A suggested approach for editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Restoring edited settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

MIDI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Altering Programs to fit within a Combination . . . . 51

Arpeggiator settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Drum Track settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Automatically importing a Combination

into Sequencer mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Creating songs (Sequencer mode) . . . .53

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

About the KROME’s Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Sequencer mode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Transport control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Playing Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Preparations for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Recording MIDI in real time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Step recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Recording multiple tracks from an external

sequencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Recording System Exclusive events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Recording patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Other way to record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Song editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

MIDI tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Track view edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Piano Roll Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Table of Contents

iv

Creating an RPPR pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Creating RPPR data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

RPPR playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Realtime-recording an RPPR performance . . . . . . . .72

Creating and playing a Cue List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Creating a cue list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Converting a cue list to a song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Saving your song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Using Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

An overview of the KROME’s effects . . . . . . . . . . 77

Effect I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Effects in each mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Routing effect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Program Effects settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Using effects in Combinations and Songs . . . . . . . . .81

Dynamic modulation, Common FX LFO . . . . . . . 82

Dynamic modulation (Dmod). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Common FX LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Arpeggiator function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Using the arpeggiator while you play . . . . . . . . 85

Using the arpeggiator in Program mode . . . . . . . . . .85

Using the arpeggiator in Combination mode. . . . . .88

Arpeggiator settings in Combination and

Sequencer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Linking the arpeggiator to programs or

combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Creating a user arpeggio pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Regarding arpeggiator synchronization. . . . . . . . . . .96

Drum Track function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Performing with the Drum Track function . . . . 97

Using the Drum Track function in Program

mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Using the Drum Track function in Combination

mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Drum Track function settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Drum Track function settings in Program

mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Drum Track function settings in Combination

mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Drum Track function settings in Sequencer

mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Synchronizing the Drum Track function. . . . . . . . . 102

Creating a Drum Track pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Using Drum Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Drum Kit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Before you start editing… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Editing a Drum Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Adjusting Global KROME setings . . . . 109

How Global mode is structured. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Global settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Basic setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Pedal and other controller settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Creating user scales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Setting Category Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Loading & saving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Saving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Saving data on the KROME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Writing to internal memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Editing names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Saving to SD card (Media–Save) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Using the KROME as a data filer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Loading data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Data that can be loaded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Loading data from SD card (Media–Load). . . . . . . .120

Media utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Formatting media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Setting the current time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Restoring the factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Loading the preloaded data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Programs and Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Arpeggiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Drum Track function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Drum Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Damper pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Connections with a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Error and confirmation messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Operating requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

1

Introduction to the KROME

Front and rear panels

Front panel

1. Volume

VOLUME knob

ThisknobadjuststhevolumeoftheAUDIOOUTPUT

L/MONO,Routputs,aswellasthevolumeofthe

headphonejack.(Seepage 15)

2. SW1, 2 and Joystick

SW1 and SW2

Thesebuttonsareusedtocontroltheprogramsor

effectparameters,ortoturnthejoysticklockfunction

on/off.(Seepage 24)

Joystick

Youcancontrolsynthesisparametersoreffect

parametersbymovingthejoystickup/down/left/right.

(Seepage 24)

3. REALTIME CONTROLS

Theserealtimecontrollersconsistoffourknobsand

onebutton.Youcanusethemtodothefollowing

things.

• Controlthesoundandeffectsofprogramsand

combinations

• Controlthearpeggiator

SELECT button, knobs 1–4

UsetheSELECTbuttontoselectthefunctions

controlledbyknobs1–4.Byusingknobs1–4youcan

controlthesound,effects,andarpeggiator.

(Fordetails,pleasesee“Realtimecontrolknobs”on

page 25.)

(Fordetails,pleasesee“Usingrealtimecontrolstoedit

thesoundoreffects”onpage 28.)

4. Arpeggiator

ARP button

Thisbuttonturnsthearpeggiatoron/off.Thebutton

willbelitifthearpeggiatorison.(Seepage 85)

5. DRUM TRACK

DRUM TRACK button

ThisbuttonturnstheDrumTrackfunctiononoroff.

Thisbuttonalsoindicatestheoperatingstateofthe

drumtrack.(Unlit:off,Blinking:waitingfortrigger,

Lit:on.Seepage 97.)

6. Effect buttons

MASTER FX button

TOTAL FX button

Thesebuttonsturnthemastereffectandtotaleffecton/

off.Whenthebuttonison(LEDlit),theeffectsettings

oftheprogram,combination,orsongwillbeenabled.

Whenthebuttonisoff(LEDunlit),thecorresponding

effectwillbeoff.

Theon/offstatusofthesebuttonsisrememberedeven

whenyouswitchprograms,combinations,orsongs.

(Seepage 110)

2

3

7

8 9

4

15 511 10 13 14

6

1

12

* The diagram shown is for KROME-61

Introduction to the KROME

2

7. Display

Display

TheTouchViewdisplayfeaturessimpletouchcontrol

andselectionofnumerousfeaturesandparameters.

(Seepage 4)

8. Mode

COMBI, PROG, SEQ, GLOBAL, MEDIA buttons

KROMEhasfivedifferentmodes,eachoneis

optimizedforaspecificsetoffunctions.

Pressoneofthesebuttonstoenterthecorresponding

mode.

Formoredetails,pleasesee“Selectingmodes”on

page 9.

9. PROG/COMBI BANK

A, B, C, D, E, F buttons

ThesebuttonsselectprogrambanksA–Fand

combinationbanksA–D(seepage 21,andpage 44).

Youcanalsousethesebuttonstoselectthebankof

timbreprogramsinacombination,orthebankoftrack

programsinasong(seepage 46,andpage 57).

IfyouwanttoselectaGMbank,usethenumerickeys

(seepage 22)ortheBank/ProgramSelectmenu(see

page 22).

10. VALUE controllers

Usethesecontrollerstoedittheparameterthat’s

selectedinthedisplay.

INC and DEC buttons

VALUE dial

0–9, –, ., and ENTER buttons

Together,thesecontrolsspecifyandconfirmthevalue

oftheselectedparameter.(Seepage 10)

COMPARE button

Comparesyourcurrenteditedsoundtothesound

beforeitwasedited.

Formoredetails,pleasesee“Comparefunction”on

page 11.

11. PAGE SELECT, EXIT

PAGE button

Whenyoupressthisbutton,alistofthepageswithin

theselectedmodewillappearinthedisplay.Pressthe

buttonofthedesiredpage.(Seepage 9)

EXIT button

Pressthisbuttontoreturntothemainpageofthe

currentmode.(Seepage 9)

12. Save (Write)

WRITE button

Usethisbuttontosaveprograms,combinations,global

settings,drumkits,orarpeggiopatternstointernal

memory(seepage 9).

You’llalsousethisbuttontosavesongstomedia(see

page 75).

Whenyoupressthisbuttonintheappropriatemodeor

page,aWritedialogboxwillappear.Pressthebutton

onceagaintosavethedata.

13. Sequencer

Thebuttonsinthissectionareusedforoperationsin

Sequencermode,suchasrecordingandplayback(see

page 54).TheREC(●)buttonisalsousedtosavea

programorcombination,orwhenusingtheAutoSong

Setupfunction(seepage 59).

PAUSE ( ) button

REW ( ) button

FF ( ) button

LOCATE ( ) button

REC ( ) button

START/STOP ( ) button

14. TEMPO controls

TEMPO knob

Thisknobadjuststhetempoofthearpeggiator,drum

track,orinternalsequencer.

TEMPO LED

ThisLEDwillblinkatquarter‐noteintervalsofthe

currenttempo.

TAP button

Bypressing(ortapping)thisbuttononthebeat,you

canenterthetempousedbythearpeggiator,drum

track,orinternalsequencer(seepage 25).

15. Headphone

Headphone jack

Connectyourheadphoneshere.

ThisjackwilloutputthesamesignalastheAUDIO

OUTPUTL/MONOandRjacks.

TheheadphonevolumeiscontrolledbytheVOLUME

knob.

Front and rear panels Rear panel

3

Rear panel

1. Power supply

Besuretosee“Turningthepoweron”onpage 15and

followthecorrectproceduredescribedthere.

Note: TheKROMEhasanautopower‐offfunctionthat

automaticallyturnsoffthepowerwhenthekeyboard

orfrontpanelbuttonshavenotbeenusedforacertain

lengthoftime.Withthefactorysettings,thisissetto4

hours(see“A u t o power‐offfunction”onpage 16).

Power switch

Thisswitchturnsthepoweron/off.(Seepage 15)

AC adapter connector

TheincludedACadapterisconnectedhere.

(See page 15)

Connectionsmustbemadewiththepowerturned

off.Pleasebeawarethatcarelessoperationmay

damageyourspeakersystemorcause

malfunctions.

Cable hook

UsethistosecurethecableoftheincludedACadapter.

AfterconnectingtheACadapter,loopthecable

aroundthehooklocatedontheKROME’srearpanelso

thatthecablewon’tgetpulledoutinadvertently.Leave

enoughslackontheplugendsothatyoucan

disconnectitifyouwantto.(Seepage 15)

Becarefulnottobendthebaseoftheplugany

morethannecessary.

2. AUDIO OUTPUTS

AUDIO OUTPUT L/MONO & R jack

Thesearethestereoaudiooutputs.UsetheVOLUME

knobtoadjustthevolume.(Seepage 17)

3. PEDALS

Youcanconnectadamperpedal,footswitch,andfoot

pedaltothesejacks.Thisgivesyouabroaderrangeof

functionsandeffectstocontrol.(Seepage 18)

ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack

ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack

DAMPER jack

4. MIDI

MIDIletsyouconnecttheKROMEtoacomputeror

otherMIDIdevices,forsendingandreceivingnotes,

controllergestures,soundsettings,andsoon.(See

page 20)

MIDI IN connector

MIDI OUT connector

5. SD

SD card slot

YoucaninsertanSDcardhere,anduseittosave/load

KROMEprograms,combinations,orsongdata.(See

page 118)

6. USB

USB connector

(for connecting to computer)

Youcanconnectyourcomputertothisconnector.

UsingasingleUSBcable,yourKROMEcansendand

receiveMIDIinformationdirectlytoandfroma

computer,withoutrequiringaMIDIinterface.(See

page 20)

Note: TheUSBconnectoroftheKROMEisonlyableto

transmitandreceiveMIDIdata.

1

2

456 3

Introduction to the KROME

4

Objects in the display

TheKROMEusesKorg’sTouchViewgraphicaluser

interface.

Bypressingordraggingobjectsshowninthedisplay,

youcanselectprogramsorcombinations,oredit

parametervalues.Herewe’llexplainthenamesand

functionsoftheseobjects.

a: Mode button

Thisindicatesthemodethat’scurrentlyselected.

Whenyoupressthisbutton,theModemenuwill

appear.Inthemodemenu,pressthenameofthemode

thatyouwanttomove.Ifyouselectthecurrently

selectedmode,thePageSelectmenuforthatmodewill

appear.Eveninanothermode,pressingtherightside

ofthenamewilldisplaythePageSelectmenuforeach

mode.

Toclosethemenu,presstheClosebuttonortheEXIT

button.

IfyouaccessthismenufromGlobalorMediamode,it

willincludeanitemnamedReturn.Ifyoupress

Return,youwillreturntothemodewhereyouwere

beforeselectingGlobalorMediamode.

Mode menu

b: Current page

Thisindicatesthecurrentpagewithintheselected

mode.

Beginningontheleft,thisareashowsthemodebutton,

pagenumber:name,andtabname.

c: Tab

Mostpagesaredividedintotwoormoretabs.

d: Parameters

Theparametersforvarioussettingsareshowninthe

display.

e: Edit cell

Whenyoutouchaparameterinthedisplay,the

parameterorparametervaluewillusuallybe

highlighted(displayedinreversehighlighting).Thisis

calledtheeditcell,andthehighlighteditemwillbe

availableforediting.

UseavaluecontrollersuchastheVALUEdial(see

page 2)toeditthevalue.

Alternatively,youcaneditthevaluebypressingthe

editcellandusingyourfingertodraginthedirection

ofthetrianglesthatappear.(Theshadingofthe

triangleswillchangeinthreelevels;thisfunctionwill

becomeavailablewhenthedarkestshadingis

reached.)

Inaddition,youcandisplaytheeditpadbypressing

twiceinsuccessionontheeditcell,orbyholdingit

downforatimeandthenreleasingit(seepage 6).

f: Sliders and knobs

Toeditthevalueofanobjectshapedlikeaslideror

knob,pressittomovetheeditcell.Fordetailsonhow

toeditthevalue,pleasesee“e:Editcell,”above.

Theparameterwillbeactiveifitischecked,and

inactiveifitisunchecked.

g: Check boxes

Thepresenceorabsenceofacheckmarkintheseboxes

willenable/disableparametersorfunctions.Puttinga

checkmarkintheboxwillenabletheitem,and

clearingthecheckmarkwilldisableit.

h: Toggle buttons

Thistypeofbuttonwillchangeitsfunctionorswitch

on/offeachtimeitispressed.

Play/Rec/Mutebutton(Sequencermode)

SoloOn/Offbutton(Sequencermode)

On/OffbuttonforEffect

h: Toggle buttons

b: Current page

e: Edit cell

g: Check boxes

i: Popup

button (1)

j: Popup

button (2)

k: Menu command button

a: Mode button l: Stopwatch button

f: Sliders and knobs c: Tabd: Parameters

When selected in Program,

Combination, or

Sequencer mode

When selected in Global or

Media mode

Mode button Page number and name Tab name

Front and rear panels Objects in the display

5

i: Popup button (1)

Whenthisbuttonispressed,apopupmenuwill

appear,showingtheparametervaluesthatare

availableforselection.

Toentertheparametervalue,pressthedesiredvaluein

thepopupmenu.

* Popup menu

Pin

Thisswitchesthepopupmenu

displaybetweenlockedand

unlocked.

Whenlocked,thepinwillbeshown

closed,andthepopupmenuwill

remaindisplayedevenafteryou

pressaparametervalue.When

unlocked,thepinwillbeshown

opened,andthepopupmenuwill

closeimmediatelywhenyoupressa

parametervalue.

j: Popup button (2)

Whenyoupressthisbutton,atabbedmenuwill

appear.

Tocloseatabbedmenu,presstheOKbuttonorCancel

button.

Scroll bar

Usethiswhenyouneedtoseeparametervaluesthat

extendbeyondwhatcanbeshowninthedisplayat

onetime.

k: Menu command button

* Menu

Whenthisbuttonispressed,alistofmenucommands

willappear.

Themenucommandsthatappearwilldiffer

dependingontheselectedpage.

Youcanalsoselectuptotenmenucommandsby

holdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressinga

numerickey0–9.Themenuwillclosewhenyoupress

thedisplayinalocationotherthanthemenu,orwhen

youpresstheEXITbutton.

* Dialog box

Whenyouselectamenucommand,you’llseeascreen

containingthesettingsneededtoexecutethe

command.Thisiscalledadialogbox.Thedialogbox

thatappearswilldependonthemenucommandthat

youselect.Somecommands,suchasExclusiveSolo,

donotdisplayadialogbox.

* Text edit button

Whenyoupressthisbutton,thetexteditdialogbox

appearsforchangingthenamesofPrograms,

Combinations,Songs,etc.Fordetails,pleasesee

“Editingnames”onpage 117.

* OK and Cancel buttons

Afterperformingotheroperationsinthedialogbox,

youcanexecutethecommandbypressingtheOK

button.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,presstheCancel

button.(Theoperationwilloccurwhenyoupressand

releasethebutton.)Thedialogboxwillclose.

TheEXITbuttoncorrespondstotheCancelbutton,

Donebutton,andExitbutton.

* Done, Copy, and Insert buttons

Therearebuttonswhichperformfunctionwhenthey

arepressedandreleased,suchasDone,Copy,and

Insert(similartotheOKandCancelbuttonsexplained

under“*Dialogbox,”above).

l: Stopwatch button

Whenyoupressthebuttonontheupperrightofthe

display,thetimeelapsedsincepower‐onwillbe

displayed.YoucanusetheSTART/STOPbuttonand

RESETbuttontomeasureelapsedtime.Thisis

Pin

Press here to scroll to left or right.

Press here and slide to left or

right to scroll to the desired

location.

Press here to scroll to the

corresponding location.

Menu command button

Menu button

Text edit button

Cancel button OK button

Character

buttons

Shift button

Switches

between

uppercase and

lowercase

characters.

Delete button

Deletes the

character to the

left of the cursor.

Cursor buttons

Move the cursor

to left or right.

Space button

Insert a space at

the cursor location.

Clear button

Delete all characters

of the text.

Cancel button, OK button

If you are satised with the text

that you input, press the OK

button. If you wish to discard

your input and exit the text edit

box, press the Cancel button.

Cursor

Character Set Selects

the type of character.

Text

Introduction to the KROME

6

convenientwhenyouwanttocheckthetimeduringa

liveperformanceorrehearsal,ortodeterminethe

approximateplaybacktimeofasong.

•START/STOP:Startsorstopsthestopwatch

• RESET:Returnsthetimeto000:00:00

m: Radio buttons

Pressaradiobuttontoselectonevaluefromtwoor

morechoices.

* Edit pad

Numericalinputpad/calculator

Ifyoupressaneditcell,slider,orknobtwiceinquick

succession,apadforinputtingnumbersorusinga

calculatorwillappear.Thevariousbuttonshavethe

followingfunctions.

• OPERATIONDIRECT/CALCULATE:Switches

betweennumericalinputpadandcalculator.

•CE(clearentry):Clearsthecurrently‐inputnumber.

•Ent:Entersthenumberfromthepadintothe

parameter,andclosesthepad.

• RECALL:Copiestheparametervalueintothepad.

•Close:Closesthepad.

Note: Someparameterscannotusethecalculator

function.

Bankandnumberselectpad

IfyoupresstwiceinsuccessiononProgramSelect,

CombinationSelect,orTimbreSelect,thebankand

numberselectpadwillappear.

Bankandnumberselectpad

•BANK:Selectstheprogramorcombinationbank.

•Forotherfunctions,see“Numericalinputpad.”

Val ue slider/Wheelpad

Whenyouholddownaneditcell,slider,orknobfora

whileandthenreleaseit,thewheel/valuesliderwill

appear.

Tochangethevalue,dragthewheel/sliderpad.

SLIDER

WHEEL

Note: Ifyoudon’twanttheeditpadtoappear,clearthe

“EnableEditPad”checkboxinthemenufoundin

GlobalP0:BasicSetup–SystemPreferences(see

page 111).

* EG, Velocity Split

YoucanchangethevaluesofaEGorvelocitysplit

objectbydragginginthedisplay.

* Realtime control popup

WhenyouuseaREALTIMECONTROLSknob,a

popupwillindicatethefunctionthat’sbeingcontrolled

anditsvalue.Acertainlengthoftimeafteryoustop

usingtheknob,thispopupwillcloseautomatically.If

youpressthepopupwhileit’sdisplayed,itwillstay

visible,allowingyoutoenterthevalueusingavalue

controllersuchasthenumerickeys.

Note: Ifyoudon’twanttherealtimecontrolpopupto

appear,clearthe“REALTIMECONTROLPop‐Up”

checkboxinthemenulocatedinGlobalP0:Basic

Setup–SystemPreferences.

m: Radio buttons

Numericalinputpad Calculator

Basic Information About the KROME’s modes

7

Basic Information

About the KROME’s modes

TheKROMEhasnumerousfunctionsthatletyouplay

andeditprogramsorcombinations,recordandplay

backsequencedata,andmanagemedia.These

functionsaregroupedinto“modes.”TheKROMEhas

fivemodes.

Program mode

ProgramsarethebasicsoundsofKROME.

InProgrammode,youcan:

•SelectandplayPrograms.

•Useonearpeggiatorinyourperformance.

•PlaybackDrumTrackpatternswhileyouperform

usingaProgram.

•EditPrograms

YoucanusetherealtimecontrolsandtheTone

Adjustfunctiontoeasilyedittheprogram.

Youcanadjusttheparametersandsettingsofthe

oscillators,filters,amps,EGs,LFOs,effects,arpeggi‐

ator,drumtrack,etc.

Youcanuseuptofiveinserteffects,twomaster

effects,andonetotaleffect.

Plus,youcancreatedrumprogramsusingdrum

kits(ascreatedinGlobalmode).

Combination mode

Combinationsaresetsofupto16programsthatcanbe

playedsimultaneously,lettingyoucreatesoundsthat

aremorecomplexthanasingleProgram.In

Combinationmode,youcan:

•SelectandplayCombinations.

•Usemultipletimbrestoplayarpeggiopatterns

generatedbytwoarpeggiators.

•Useoneormoretimbrestoplaybackthepatterns

inthedrumtrack.

•UsetheKROMEasa16‐trackmultitimbraltone

generator.

•Edi

tCombinations

Youcanusethetoneadjustfunctiontoeasilyedit

theprogramofeachtimbre.

YoucanassignProgramstoeachofthe16Timbres,

eachwithseparatevolume,pan,EQ,andkeyboard

andvelocityzones;makesettingsforeffects,arpeg‐

giator,drumtrack.

Plus,youcanuseuptofiveinserteffects,twomas‐

tereffects,andonetotaleffect.

Sequencer mode

Sequencermodeletsyourecord,playback,andedit

MIDItracks.Youcan:

•Usethesixteen‐trackMIDIsequencertorecordand

playbacksongs.

RecordasingleMIDItrackatatime,orrecordas

manyasallsixteentrackssimultaneously.Youcan

alsorecordexclusivemessages.

•Usemultipletrackstorecordandplayback

performancesgeneratedbytwoarpeggiators.

•Useoneormoretrackstoplaybackthepatternsin

thedrumtrack.

•Editsongs.

•UsetheKROMEasa16‐partmulti‐timbralsound

module.

•GM/GM2playbackisalsosupported.

•UsetheToneAdjustfunctiontoeasilyeditthe

programofeachtrack.

•Useuptofiveinserteffects,twomastereffects,and

onetotaleffect.

•Reco

rdpatternsandassignthemtoindividual

keys,usingRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/

Recording).

• CreateaCueListthatwillplaybackmultiplesongs

intheorderthatyouspecify.

• CreateuserDrumTrackpatterns.

Global mode

Globalmodeletsyouadjustoverallsettingsforthe

entireKROME,andeditdrumkits,arpeggiopatterns.

InGlobalmode,youcan:

•AdjustsettingsthataffecttheentireKROME,such

asmastertuneandglobalMIDIchannel.

• Createuserscales.

• Createdrumkitsusingdrumsamples.

• Createuserarpeggiopatterns.

• Renameprogram,andcombinationcategories.

•S

etthefunctionoftheassignablepedalsand

assignablebuttons.

•Transm

itMIDISystemExclusivedatadumps.

Media mode

YoucansaveorloaddatausinganSDcard.InMedia

mode,youcan:

• SaveandloadPrograms,Combinations,Songs,and

Globalsetupdata.

•FormatSDcard,copyandrenamefiles,etc.

•Performfileoperationssuchascopyingdatatoor

frommedia.

•ExportandimportsequencestoandfromSMF

(StandardMIDIFiles).

•UsetheDataFilerfunctiontosaveorloadMIDI

SystemExclusivedata.

Introduction to the KROME

8

RelationaldiagramoftheKROME’smodes

IFX 1

IFX 5

MFX 1

MFX 2

TFX

Insert / Master / Total Eect

TRACK 1

TRACK 8

TRACK 2

TRACK 3

TRACK 4

TRACK 5

TRACK 6

TRACK 7

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

TRACK 9

TRACK 16

TRACK 10

TRACK 11

TRACK 12

TRACK 13

TRACK 14

TRACK 15

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

Arpeggiator B

Arpeggiator A

Drum Track

Drum Track

IFX 1

IFX 5

MFX 1

MFX 2

TFX

Insert / Master / Total Eect

TIMBRE 1

TIMBRE 8

TIMBRE 2

TIMBRE 3

TIMBRE 4

TIMBRE 5

TIMBRE 6

TIMBRE 7

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

TIMBRE 9

TIMBRE 16

TIMBRE 10

TIMBRE 11

TIMBRE 12

TIMBRE 13

TIMBRE 14

TIMBRE 15

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

Arpeggiator

Arpeggiator B

Arpeggiator A

IFX 1

IFX 5

MFX 1

MFX 2

TFX

Insert / Master / Total Eect

MIDI TRACK 1...16

PCG / SNG

PCG

PCG

DrumTrack

DRUMS PROGRAM

ARPEGGIO PATTERN

Preset Drum Track Pattern

User Drum Track Pattern

Preset Pattern: P0 - 4

User Pattern

OSC 1

PITCH1 FILTER1 AMP1/

DRIVER1

OSC 2

PITCH2 FILTER2 AMP2/

DRIVER2

Multisample 1

Drum Kit Multisample 5

Multisample 2 Multisample 6

Multisample 3 Multisample 7

Multisample 4 Multisample 8

Multisample 1

Drum Kit Multisample 5

Multisample 2 Multisample 6

Multisample 3 Multisample 7

Multisample 4 Multisample 8

Key Assign

DRUM KIT

Drumsample 1 Drumsample 5

Drumsample 2 Drumsample 6

Drumsample 3 Drumsample 7

Drumsample 4 Drumsample 8

GLOBAL MODE

PROGRAM

COMBINATION

SEQUENCER

DRUM KIT

MEDIA MODE

MEDIA MODE

ARPEGGIO PATTERN

Basic Information Basic operations

9

Basic operations

Afteryou’veturnedontheKROME,here’showto

performbasicoperations,suchasselectingmodesand

pages.

Selecting modes

InordertouseaparticularfunctionontheKROME,

youmustfirstselecttheappropriatemode.

•Pressoneofthefrontpanelmodebuttonstoenter

thecorrespondingmode.

•Alternatively,youcanpresstheModebutton

locatedintheupperleftofthedisplay,andselect

thedesiredmodefromamenu(seepage 4).

Forasummaryofeachmode,pleasesee“A b o u t the

KROME’smodes”onpage 7.

Note: Theselectedmodeisshownintheupperleftof

thedisplay,andalsoindicatedbythelitstatusofoneof

theabovemodebuttons.

Note: BypressingtheGLOBALorMEDIAbutton

twice,youcanselectthepreviously‐selectedmode

(Combination,Program,orSequencer).

Selecting page group and tabs

Eachmodehasalargenumberofparameters,which

aregroupedintopages.Thesepagesarefurther

subdividedbytabs;withuptotwelvetabsperpage.

•Makesurethatthedesiredmodeisselected.

Forthisexplanationwe’lluseCombinationmodeas

anexample.

Selecting a page group

Moving by selecting a page group

ThePageSelectscreenshowsalistofthepagegroups

withineachmode.Selectthedesiredpagegroupfrom

thislist.

1. PressthePAGEbutton.

Alternatively,youcanaccessthemodemenuandpress

themodebutton,andthenpresstherightsideofthe

menu(seepage 4).

Thepageselectmenuwillappear.

Thepagewhereyouwereimmediatelybeforepressing

thePAGEbuttonisshowninadarkercolorforyour

reference.

2. Pressthebuttonforthepagethatyouwantto

view.

P0:Playisthepageyou’llnormallyusewhen

performingontheKROME.(Thesameistruein

Programmode.)Editingisdoneinotherpages.

Asanexamplehere,tryselecting“P4Zone/Delay.”The

P4:Zone/Delay–KeyZT01–08pagewillappear.

Note: Thepagethatappearswillbeshowingthetab

thatyoumostrecentlyselected.

Using the PAGE button plus the numeric keys 0–9

to access different pages

•HolddownthePAGEbuttonandusethenumeric

keys0–9tospecifythepagenumberthatyouwant

toview.

Thespecifiedpagenumberwillappear.Thepage

thatappearswillbeshowingthetabthatyoumost

recentlyselected.

Note: InpagesconsistingofmultiplepagessuchasP5–

1,P5–2,P8–1,andP8–2,thefirstpage(P5–1,orP8–1)

willbeselected.

Using the EXIT button to move between pages

Ifyou’reinapageotherthanpage0(e.g.,ProgP0:

Play)ofeachmode,pressingthisbuttonwilltakeyou

topage0.

Thisbuttonmakesiteasytoreturntothemainpageof

thecurrentmode:

•Pressitoncetogotothepreviously‐selectedtabon

themainP0:Playpage(Play/RECpagein

Sequencermode).

•PressitagaintogotothefirsttabonthemainP0:

Playpage(suchasthemainProgramPlaypage).If

youhadpreviouslyselectedaparameteronthis

page,thatparameterwillbeselected.

•Pressitathirdtimetoselectthemainparameteron

theP0:Playpage,suchastheProgramnamein

Programmode.

COMBIbutton: Combinationmode

PROGbutton: Programmode

SEQbutton: Sequencermode

GLOBALbutton: Globalmode

MEDIAbutton: Mediamode

Introduction to the KROME

10

Whenadialogboxisopen,thisbuttoncancelsthe

settingsmadeinthedialogboxandclosesthedialog

box,justlikepressingtheCancelbutton.

Ifapopupmenuormenuisopen,pressingEXITcloses

themenu.

Selecting pages

•Youcanaccesstabbedpagesbypressingthetabs

showninthebottomlineofthedisplay.

ThisexampleshowstheProgramT01–08page

throughMixerT01–08pageofCombiP0:Play.

Selecting a parameter and editing the

value

1. Presstheparameterthatyouwanttoedit.

2. Ifyouselectaneditcell,thedisplaywillbe

highlighted.Editthevalue.

•Thewaythatthevaluewillchangedependsonthe

typeofparameterorobject.(See“Objectsinthe

display”onpage 4.)

Thevalueintheeditcellcanbeeditedbyusingthe

valuecontrollers(VALUEdial,INC/DECbuttons,

numerickeys0–9,–button,(.)button,ENTERbut‐

ton,etc.).

3. Youcanuseknobs1–4toeditparametersthatare

assignedtothecontrolsurface.

Note:

YoucanusetheCOMPAREbuttontocomparethe

soundyou’reeditingwiththeoriginaluneditedsound.

INC/DEC buttons

Usethesewhenyouwishtomakesmallchangesinthe

value.

VALUE dial

Usethisdialtoedittheselectedparameter’svalue.

Thiscontrolisconvenientwhenyouwanttoscroll

throughaverylonglistofselections.

Numeric keys 0–9, ENTER button, – button,

(.) button

Thesebuttonsareconvenientwhenyouknowthe

exactvaluethatyouwanttoenter.Usethe0–9,–,and

decimal(.)buttonstoenterthevalue,andthenpress

theENTERbuttontoconfirmtheentry.

The–buttoninvertsthesign(+/–)oftheparameter

value;thedecimal(.)buttoninsertsadecimal,for

enteringfractionalvalues.

Note: Whenselecting“ProgramSelect”(seepage 21),

youcanselectaGMbankbyholdingdownthe0

buttonandpressingthe(.),1–9,or–buttons.

Functions that use the ENTER button in conjunc-

tion with another button

ENTERhasafewspecialfunctionswhenitispressed

incombinationwithotherbuttons.

ByholdingdowntheENTERbuttonwhileyoupressa

numerickey(0–9),youcanselectuptotenmenu

commandsfromwithinthecurrentpage.

Whileadialogboxisdisplayed,theENTERbutton

correspondstotheOKbutton.(TheEXITbutton

correspondstotheCancelbutton.)

InSequencermode,youcanholddowntheENTER

buttonandpresstheLOCATE()buttontousethe

menucommandSetLocation.

Other

Specifying a program bank or combination bank

PROG BANK A, B, C, D, E, F/

COMBI BANK A, B, C, D buttons

Usethesebuttonstochangebankswhenselecting

ProgramsorCombinations.TheLEDsinthebuttons

lightuptoshowthecurrentbank.

InProgrammode,thesebuttonsselecttheProgram

bank.

InCombinationmode,thesebuttonshavetwo

functions:

•Whenyou’reselectingCombinations,theychoose

theCombinationbank.

•Whenyou’reassigningaProgramtoatimbre

withintheCombination,theyselecttheProgram

bank.

InSequencermode,whenatrack’sProgramnameis

selected,thesebuttonschangetheProgrambank.

Using the keyboard to enter a note number or

velocity value

Byplayingakeywhilepressingaparameterthat

specifiesanotenumber(suchasG4orC#2)ora

velocityvalue,youcandirectlyenterthatnotenumber

orvelocityvalue.(Thisisnotavailableinmenu

commanddialogboxes.)

Tempo input

TEMPO knob, TAP button

YoucansetthetempobyturningtheTEMPOknobor

byrepeatedlypressingtheTAPbutton.

COMPARE button

Youcanusethisbuttontoreturnthesettingsofan

editedprogram,combination,orsongtotheiroriginal

state.Refertothefollowingsection.

Basic Information Basic operations

11

Compare function

Program, Combination mode

Usethiswhenyouwishtocomparetheeditsyouhave

madetoaprogramorcombination’ssoundwiththe

un‐editedoriginal(i.e.,thesoundthatiswritteninto

memory).

Wheneditingaprogramorcombination,pressthis

button.TheLEDwilllightup,andthelast‐written

settingsforthatprogramorcombinationnumberwill

berecalled.WhenyoupresstheCOMPAREbutton

onceagain,theLEDwillgodarkandyouwillreturnto

thesettingsthatyouwereediting.

1. Wheneditingaprogramorcombination,press

thisbutton.

TheLEDwilllightup,andthelast‐writtensettingsfor

thatprogramnumberorcombinationnumberwillbe

recalled.

2. PresstheCOMPAREbuttononceagain.

Note: TheLEDwillgodarkandyouwillreturntothe

settingsthatyouwereediting.

Ifyoueditthesettingsthatarerecalledbypressingthe

COMPAREbutton(i.e.,thesettingsthatarewritten

intomemory),theLEDwillgodark,anditwillnotbe

possibletoreturntothepreviouseditsbypressingthe

COMPAREbuttonagain.

Sequencer mode

InSequencermode,youcanusetheCOMPAREbutton

tomake“beforeandafter”comparisonsimmediately

afterusingrealtimerecordingorsteprecordingto

recordasong,orafterperforminganeditonatrack.

Forexample,thiscanbeusedeffectivelywhen

realtime‐recordingaMIDItrackforasong.

1. Realtime‐recordaMIDItrack.(Take1)

2. Onceagain,realtime‐recordonthesametrack.

(Take2)

3. PresstheCOMPAREbutton.TheLEDwilllight

up,andtake1willberecalled.

4. PresstheCOMPAREbuttononceagain.TheLED

willgodark,andtake2willberecalled.

5. Ifatstep3youonceagainrealtime‐recordonthe

sametrack(take3),theComparefunctionwill

nowbereferencingtake1.

6. Ifatstep4youonceagainrealtime‐recordonthe

sametrack(take3),theComparefunctionwillbe

referencingtake2.

Inthisway,theComparefunctionletsyourecallthe

previousrecordingorthepreviousstateofevent

editing.

Note: IfyoucontinueeditingwhentheCOMPARE

buttonislit,thebuttonwillgodark.Thisnowbecomes

themusicaldatathatwillbeselectedwhenthe

COMPAREbuttonisdark.

Global mode

TheComparefunctionthatbringsbackthesettings

priortoeditingisnotavailableinGlobalmode.

Selecting and executing menu

commands

Theutilityfunctionsprovidecommandsthatare

specifictoeachpage,suchasWrite(save)orCopy.The

availableutilityfunctionswilldependontheselected

page.

Forexample,theutilityfunctionsinProgrammodelet

youwrite(save)thesettings,orletyouperform

convenienteditingoperationssuchascopyingsettings

betweenoscillatorsoreffects,oraSyncfunctionthat

letsyouedittwoEGstogether.

1. Ontheupperrightsideofthedisplay,pressthe

v



button.

Themenucommandwillappear.

2. Selectamenucommandbytouchingitwithyour

finger.

Adialogboxfortheselectedmenucommandwill

appear.

Check‐typecommandswillnotdisplayadialogbox;

theirstatuswillbeswitched,andthelistwillclose.

ByholdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressinga

numerickey0–9youcanaccessthedialogboxforthe

firsttenutilityfunctionswithoutgoingthroughthe

menu.

•Ifyouwanttoclosethelistwithoutselectinga

command,pressthedisplaysomewhereotherthan

thelist,orpresstheEXITbutton.

3. Foraparameterinadialogbox,selectitby

pressingitwithyourfinger,andusetheVA L U E 

controllers(e.g.,VAL UEdialorINC/DECbuttons)

toenteritsvalue.

Whenselectingaprogramorcombinationnumberina

dialogbox,youcanalsousetheBANKbuttontoenter

thebankasanalternativetousingtheVALUE

controllers.

4. Toexecute,presstheOKbuttonortheENTER

button.

Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancelorthe

EXITbutton.

Thedialogboxwillclose.

Menu command button

Menu button

Introduction to the KROME

12

Writing/saving

Afterediting,youshouldwriteorsaveyourchangesas

necessary.

Forexampleifyou’veeditedaprogram,yourchanges

willbelostifyouselectanotherprogramorturnoff

thepower.Thesameappliestoacombination.

SettingsyoueditinGlobalmodeandsongswillbe

rememberedaslongasthepowerison,butyour

changeswillbelostwhenyouturnoffthepower,

unlessyouwritethesechangesintomemory.

•YoucanwriteorsavebypressingtheWRITE

buttontwice.

FormoredetailsontheWriteoperations,seethe

followingpages.

• Programs→p.30

• Combinations→p.47

•Effectpresets→PG p.67

•Globalsettings(pages0–4)→p.116

•Dru

mkits→p.116

•Userarpeggiopattern→p.116

•UserDrumTrackpatterns→p.103

Preset/userDrumTrackpatternsaresavedin

internalmemoryevenwhenthepoweristurned

off.PatternsthatyoucreateinSequencermodecan

beconvertedintouserDrumTrackpatternsand

savedininternalmemory.

•Usertemplatesongs→PG p.164

Preset/usertemplatesongsaresavedininternal

memoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff.Track

settingsandeffectsettingsofasongyoucreatecan

besavedininternalmemorybyusingthemenu

commandSaveTemplateSong.

•Fordetailsonwritingtointernalmemory→p.115

Refertothefollowingpagesformoreinformation

aboutsaving.

• Savingasong→p.75

• Savingtomedia(Media–Save)→p.118

Note: OntheKROME,theactionofwritingtointernal

memoryiscalled“Write,”andtheactionofsavingto

anSDcarddeviceiscalled“Save.”

Assigning a name (renaming)

Youcaneditthenameofaneditedprogram,

combination,song,drumkit,orarpeggiopattern.

Youcanalsochangethenamesoftheprogramand

combinationcategories.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Editingnames”onpage 117.

Shortcuts

Selecting a GM bank program

• BankGM:Holddownthe0numerickeyandpress

–.

•Banksg(1)–g(9):Holddownthe0numerickeyand

press1–9.

• Bankg(d):Holddownthenumerickey0andpress

(.).

Moving between pages within a mode

•ByholdingdownthePAGEbuttonandpressinga

numerickey0–9youcanjumptothe

correspondingpage.

Access the menu commands in each page (up

to ten items)

•ByholdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressinga

numerickey0–9.

Input note number values or velocity values

•Whileholdingdowntheeditcellinthedisplay,

pressanoteonthekeyboard.

Alternatively,selecttheeditcellinthedisplay,and

thenholddowntheENTERbuttonandpressanote

onthekeyboard.

Note: YoucanalsouseaMIDInote‐onmessageinstead

ofthekeyboard.

Note: Whileadialogboxisdisplayed,theENTER

buttonwillperformthesamefunctionastheOK

button.Thismeansthatyoucan’tusethismethodto

enteranotenumberorvelocityvalueinadialogbox

thatcontainsanOKbutton.

Specifying the location in a song

InSequencermode,setsthecurrentlocationasthe

Location(equivalenttotheSetLocationmenu

command)

•HolddowntheENTERbuttonandpressthe

LOCATE()button.

ENTER button

•Whileadialogboxisdisplayed,thisbutton

performsthesamefunctionastheOKbutton.

EXIT button

Thisbuttonmakesiteasytoreturntothemainpageof

thecurrentmode:

1. Pressitoncetogotothepreviouslyselectedtabon

themainP0page.

2. PresstheEXITbutton.Youwillmovetothe

previouslyselectedparameteroftheP0toppage

(Prog:Main,Combi/Seq:ProgramT01–08).

3. PresstheEXITbutton.Youwillmovetothe

followingparameteroftheP0toppage.

Prog:ProgramSelect

Combi:CombinationSelect

Seq:SongSelect

Basic Information Basic operations

13

InanypageofProgramorCombinationmode,

pressingEXITamaximumoftwotimeswill

immediatelyallowyoutousethenumerickeysor

INC/DECbuttonstoselectprogramsorcombinations.

InSequencermode,pressingEXITamaximumofthree

timeswillallowyoutoselectasong.

EXIT button (in dialog boxes)

Whenadialogboxisdisplayed,thishasthesame

functionastheCancel,Done,orExitbutton.

Initialize the KROME

•Withthepoweroff,pressthepowerswitchwhile

holdingdowntheENTERbuttonandnumerickey

[0].

(Whiledataisbeingloaded,thedisplaywill

indicate“NowwritingintointernalMemory.”)

Theresultwillbethesameaswhenyou’ve

executedLoadPreload/DemoDataAll.

(Seepage 125)

Introduction to the KROME

14

15

Setup

Turning the power on/off

Connecting the AC adapter

1. MakesurethattheKROMEispowered‐off.

2. ConnecttheDCplugoftheincludedACadapter

tothepowersupplyjackontheKROME’srear

panel.

YoumustuseonlytheincludedACadapter.Using

anyotherACadaptermightcausemalfunctions.

3. ConnectthepowercordtotheACadapter.

4. PlugthepowercordintoanACoutlet.

BesuretouseanACoutletofthecorrectvoltage

foryouradapter.

5. UsetheKROME’scablehooktofastenthecableso

thattheDCplugdoesnotbecomeaccidentally

disconnected.

ACadapterconnections

Turning the power on

1. TurntheKROME’sVOLUMEknoballthewayto

theleftsothatthevolumeisdown.

Ifexternalequipmentsuchaspoweredmonitor

speakersareconnected,lowertheirvolumeaswell,

andthenturnofftheirpower.

2. PressthepowerswitchontheKROME’srear

paneltoturnthepoweron.

Thedisplaywillshowthemodelnameandsoftware

version.(Theillustrationshowsthescreenthatwill

appearwiththefactorysettings.Thismaychange

withoutnotice.)

Iftheautopower‐offfunctionisenabled,thetime

untilautopower‐offturnsoffthepowerwillbe

shownwhenthesystemstartsup.Ifthisdialog

boxdoesnotappear,theautopower‐offfunctionis

disabled;thepowerwillnotturnoffautomatically

(see“A u t o power‐offfunction”onpage 16).

3. Turnonthepoweroftheexternalequipmentthat’s

connectedtotheKROME’sAUDIOOUTPUTL/

MONOandRjacks,suchaspoweredmonitor

speakers.

4. UsetheKROME’sVOLUMEknobandthevolume

controlsofyourexternalequipmenttoadjustthe

volumetoasuitablelevel.

Note: Thepagethatappearswhenyouturnonthe

powerwilldependonthePower‐OnModesetting(see

page 110).

Turning the power off

Whenyouturnoffthepower,unsaveddatawillbe

lost.Besuretosaveanyimportantdatasuchas

editedsoundsorglobalsettings(seepage 12).

IftheKROME’sautopower‐offfunctionis

enabled,itspowerwillautomaticallyturnoffif

therehasbeennouserinputforacertainlengthof

time.Unsaveddatawillbelostevenifthepoweris

turnedoffbytheautopower‐offfunction.

1. TurntheKROME’sVOLUMEknoballthewayto

theleftsothatthevolumeislowered.

2. Ifexternalequipmentsuchaspoweredmonitor

speakersareconnected,lowertheirvolumeand

thenturnofftheirpower.

Power switch

4: Cable hook

AC adapter

When fastening the

cable to the cable

hook, take care not

to bend this portion

any more than

necessary.

3: Power cord for AC adapter

1: Power

supply jack

2: Plug into AC outlet.

Setup

16

3. PressthepowerswitchontheKROME’srear

paneltoturnthepoweroff.

TheKROME’sinternaldatamaybedamagedifthe

poweristurnedoffwhiledataisbeingwritteninto

internalmemory,suchasduringaSaveoperation.

Neverturnoffthepowerwhileprocessingisbeing

performed.

Thefollowingmessageisdisplayedwhiledatais

beingwrittenintointernalmemory.

“Nowwritingintointernalmemory”

Ifwritingtointernalmemorycouldnotbe

completedsuccessfully,theKROMEwill

automaticallyrepairtheinternalmemoryby

initializingitthenexttimeyouturnonthepower.

Thisisnotamalfunction.Ifthisoccurs,the

followingmessagewillappearinthedisplay;

presstheOKbutton.

Theinternalmemoryhasbeencorrupted,likely

duetoaninterruptionofpowerwhilethesystem

waswriting/savingdata.Thishasbeenrepaired

andtheaffectedBankhasbeeninitialized.

Asmallamountofelectricalpowerisusedeven

whenthepowerisoff(STANDBY).Ifyouwon’tbe

usingtheKROMEforanextendedperiod,turnoff

thepowerandunplugthepowercordfromthe

ACoutlet.

Auto power-off function

TheKROMEsupportsanautopower‐offfunctionthat

automaticallyturnsoffthepowerwhenthekeyboard

orfrontpanelbuttons(*)havenotbeenusedfora

certainlengthoftime.

*UsageoftheVOLUMEknobisnotincluded.

Note: Withthefactorysettings,thetimeuntil

automaticpower‐offwillbeapproximatelyfourhours.

Whenthepowerturnsoff,thesettingsyouhad

beeneditingwillbelost.Makesurethatyousave

importantsettingsbeforethisoccurs.

Changing the auto power-off setting

Ifyouwanttochangethesettingsothatthepower

doesnotturnoffautomatically,proceedasfollowsto

disabletheautopower‐offfunction.

Making the change in the dialog box immediately

after start-up

Iftheautopower‐offfunctionisenabledsothatthe

powerwillturnoffautomatically,thedialogboxwill

appearimmediatelyafterstart‐up,indicatingthetime

untilautomaticpower‐offwilloccur.

1. Whilethismessageisdisplayed,presstheChange

Settingbuttoninthedialogbox.

Thefollowingdialogboxwillappear.

2. Pressthepopupbuttontoselectthelengthoftime

afterwhichthepowerwillturnoff.Ifyoudon’t

wantthepowertoturnoffautomatically,choose

theDisabledsetting.

Changing the setting during operation

1. PresstheGLOBALbutton.(Alternatively,press

themodebuttonandchooseGLOBAL.)

2. PresstheEXITbuttontoaccessP0:BasicSetup.

3. PresstheSystemPref.tabtoaccesstheSystem

Preferencespage.

4. In“AutoPower‐Off,”specifytheamountoftime

whenyouwantthepowertoturnoff.Ifyoudon’t

wanttheautopower‐offfunctiontoautomatically

turnoffthepower,choosetheDisabledsetting.

Auto power-off warning message

Whenthespecifiedlengthoftimehaselapsedwithout

anyuserinputontheKROME,amessagewillappear,

warningyouthattheautopower‐offfunctionisabout

toturnoffthepower.

Ifyouwanttocontinueusingthesystem,pressthe

keyboard,abutton,orthedisplay.TheAutopower‐off

functionwillbereset.Ifthesamespecifiedlengthof

timeelapseswithnouserinput,thesamemessagewill

appearagain.

Connections Turning the power off

17

Connections

Connectionsmustbemadewiththepowerturned

off.Pleasebeawarethatcarelessusagemay

damageyourspeakersystemorcause

malfunctions.

USB

DAMPER

ASSIGNABLE PEDAL

ASSIGNABLE SWITCH

INPUT

MIDI IN

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT

R L/MONO

AUDIO OUTPUT

Computer

Analog audio output

Powered

monitors, etc.

Connections to MIDI equipment

Pedal connections etc.

MIDI cable

AC adapter power

supply connector

Power cable

(Included)

to an AC outlet

Connecting the AC adapter

Connections to computers

MIDI keyboard

Setup

18

Audio connections

TheKROMEdoesnotcontainbuilt‐inspeakers.In

ordertohearthesoundofyourperformance,you’ll

needtoconnectaudioequipmentsuchaspowered

monitors,amixer,astereosetorheadphones.

Connecting audio equipment

TheKROME’saudiooutputisdesignedto

produceasignallevelthatishigherthanconsumer

audioequipmentsuchasCDplayers.Forthis

reason,performingathighavolumemaydamage

yourspeakersorequipment.Pleaseusecaution

whenadjustingthevolume.

1. Minimizethevolumeofallconnectedequipment,

andturnoffthepower.

2. ConnecttheKROME’sOUTPUTL/MONOandR

jackstotheinputjacksofyourpoweredmonitor

speakersormixer.

Note: IfyouconnectonlytheL/MONOjack,theLand

Rsoundwillbemixedformonauraloutput.Inorderto

takefulladvantageoftheKROME’scapabilities,we

recommendthatyoulisteninstereo.

Ifyou’replayingbackthroughyourstereoaudio

systemoracassette‐radiothathasexternalinput

connectors,connecttheKROMEtothejacksthatare

markedLINEIN,AUXIN,orexternalinput.(You

mightneedtoobtaintheappropriateadapterplugor

conversioncable.)

Connecting headphones

Usingheadphonesathighvolumeforanextended

timemaycausehearingdamage.Pleaseavoid

excessivelyhighvolumelevels.

1. Connectthestereomini‐plugofyourheadphones

totheKROME’sHeadphonejack.

2. UsetheVOLUMEknobtoadjusttheheadphone

volume.

TheKROME’sHeadphonejackwilloutputthesame

signalastheOUTPUTL/MONOandRjacks.

TheoutputfromtheOUTPUTjackisnotturnedoff

evenifheadphonesareconnectedtotheHeadphone

jack.

Connecting a damper pedal,

foot switch, or foot pedal

Ifyouconnectanoptionaldamperpedal,footswitch,

orfootpedaltotheKROME,you’llbeabletocontrol

theKROMEusingyourfeet.

Connecting a damper pedal

Whenyoupressthedamperpedal,thenotesyou’ve

pressedwillbesustainedsothattheywillcontinue

evenafteryoutakeyourhandsoffthekeyboard.This

isalsocalledasustainpedal;ithasthesamefunction

asthedamperpedalofanacousticpiano.

IftheoptionalKorgDS‐1Hdamperisconnected,you’ll

beabletotakeadvantageofthe“half‐damper”effect,

wherethedepththatyoupressthepedalwillvarythe

damperamount.Ifanyothertypeofpedalis

connected,itwillfunctionasadamperswitch.

InCombinationorSequencermode,youcanalsoselect

settingssothatthedamperwillapplytosomesounds

butnottoothersounds.

1. ConnectaKorgDS‐1Hdamperpedaltothe

ASSIGNABLEPEDAL/SW1/DAMPERjack.

2. Dependingonwhichassignablejackyouhave

connectedthepedalto,setthecontrollertype

(Type)toDamper,andsetthePolarityas

appropriate(seepage 202oftheParameterGuide).

Note: Thehalf‐dampersensitivityisadjustedtoa

standardvaluewhentheKROMEisshippedfromthe

factory.Ifthehalf‐damperpedalyou’reusingdoesnot

respondappropriately,pleaseadjustthesensitivity

(seepage 217oftheParameterGuide).

Connecting a foot switch

Thisletsyouuseasimplefootswitch,suchastheKorg

PS‐1orPS‐3,asanassignablecontroller.Thefoot

switchcanperformawidevarietyoffunctions,such

as:

•Anassignablesourceformodulatingsoundsand

effects

•Portamentoon/off

•Programselectupordown

• Sequencerstart/stoporpunchin/out

•TapTempo

R

L/MONO

INPUT

PHONES

Powered monitor speakers

Headphones

Connections Connecting a damper pedal, foot switch, or foot pedal

19

•Arpeggiatoron/off

•SwitchtheDrumTrackon/off

•UsevariousKROMEcontrols(realtimecontrol

knobs,joystick,SW1/SW2,etc.)

Thisbuttonwillalwaysfunctioninthesameway

regardlessoftheProgram,Combination,orSong

you’veselected.Youcanassignthefunctioninthe

Globalmode.

Using a foot switch to select Programs

Youcanselectprogramsbyusingafootswitch

connectedtotheASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.By

assigningtheappropriatefunction,youcanincrement

ordecrementtheprogramnumberinstepsofone.

ThisletsyouchangeProgramswithoutusingyour

hands–greatforquickProgramchangesinlive

performancesituations.

Therearetwowaysofdoingthis:byassigningthefoot

switchtoProgramUp/Down,ortoValueInc/Dec.Each

oftheseissuitedtoaparticularapplication,as

describedbelow.

•ProgUp/Down:WhenperforminginthenormalP0

screen

• VALUEInc/Dec:Whenperformingwhilealistsuch

astheCategory/ProgramSelectmenuisopen

Assigning the foot switch to Program Up/Down

AssigningthefootswitchtoProgramUporProgram

DownletsyoudirectlycontrolProgramchangesfrom

thefootswitch.Formostsituations,thisisthemore

straightforwardmethod.

Tosetthisup:

1. Connectafootswitchtotherear‐panel

ASSIGNABLESWITCHinput.

UseanoptionalPS‐1pedalswitch.

2. AccesstheGlobalP2:Controllers–Foot

Controllerspage.

Proceedasfollows.

PresstheGLOBALbuttontoenterGlobalmode.

PressthePAGEbuttontoaccesstheGLOBALPage

Select.PressP2Controllers,thenpresstheFoot

Controltabinthedisplay.

3. Set“FootSwitchAssign”toeitherProgramUpor

ProgramDown.

IfyouchooseProgramUp,thenextprogramnumber

upwillbeselectedeachtimeyoupressthefootswitch.

IfyouchooseProgramDown,thenextprogram

numberdownwillbeselectedeachtimeyoupressthe

footswitch.

4. Setthe“FootSwitchPolarity”tomatchthe

polarityofthepedalyou’veconnected.

Ifyou’veconnectedtheoptionalPS‐1orPS‐3pedal,

choose(–)KORGStandard.

Now,thefootswitchwillstepthroughthePrograms,

onebyone.

5. Ifyouwanttopreservethissettingevenwhenthe

poweristurnedoff,besuretoWritethedata.(See

page 116)

6. PressthePROGbuttontoenterProgP0:Play,and

pressthefootswitchtochangetheProgram.

Note:

ThissettingappliestoselectingCombinations,aswell.

Note: WiththeProgramUp/Downmethod,youwon’t

beabletoselectprogramswhiletheBank/Program

SelectorCategory/ProgramSelectmenusareopen.

Usethe“AssigningthefootswitchtoValueInc/Dec”

methoddescribedbelow.

Assigning the foot switch to Value Inc/Dec

ThisletsyouusetheAssignableFootSwitchtoduplicate

thefunctionsofthefront‐panelINCorDECbuttons.

Thismethodisconvenientifyouwanttoopenthe

Bank/ProgramSelectmenuortheCategory/Program

Selectmenuandswitchprogramswhileviewingthe

programorcombinationmenu.

1. Followsteps1–2under“Assigningthefootswitch

toProgramUp/Down,”above.

2. Atthetopofthepage,settheFootSwitchAssign

parametertoValu eInc(orVal ue Dec).

3. Now,thefootswitchwillactjustlikeyou’re

pressingthefront‐panelINCorDECbuttons.

Note: Thefootswitchwillworklikethisfortheentire

KROME–notjustwhentheBank/Programselectmenu

orCategory/ProgramSelectmenuisopen.

Connecting a foot pedal

IfyouconnectanoptionalEXP‐2footcontrolleror

XVP‐10expression/volumepedaltotheASSIGNABLE

PEDALjack,youcanuseittoapplymodulationto

soundsoreffects,ortoadjusttheoverallvolume.

Thispedalwillalwaysfunctioninthesameway

regardlessoftheProgram,Combination,orSong

you’veselected.Youcanassignthefunctioninthe

Globalmode.

LiketheAssignableFootSwitch,describedabove,the

FootPedalcanbeusedformanydifferentfunctions,

including:

• MasterVolume

•ChannelVolume,Pan,orExpression

•Assignablesoundmodulation,asseveraldifferent

AMSorDmodsources

•EffectsSendlevelcontrol

•UsevariousKROMEcontrols(realtimecontrol

knobs,Joystick,SW1/SW2,etc.)

1. ConnectanoptionalXVP‐10orEXP‐2tothe

ASSIGNABLEPEDALjacks.

2. Afterturningthepoweron,useGlobalP2:

Controllers–FootControllerspage“FootPedal

Assign”toassignthefunctioncontrolledbythe

footpedal.(Seepage 111,andpages202,350ofthe

ParameterGuide)

Setup

20

Connecting the KROME to

acomputer

USB connection

TheKROMEprovidesbothMIDIandUSBconnectors

asstandardequipment.ByconnectingtheKROMEto

yourcomputerviaUSB,youcanuseitasacontroller

andMIDIsoundmoduleforyourDAWsoftwarewith

singlecableconvenience;andwithouttheneedfora

MIDIinterface.

Byusingthededicatededitor,youcaneditsomeofthe

parametersoftheKROMEfromyourcomputeras

thoughitwereasoftwareplug‐in.

Note: TheUSBconnectoroftheKROMEisonlyableto

transmitandreceiveMIDIdata.

BeforeyouconnecttheKROMEtoyourcomputer

viaUSB,youmustinstalltheKORGUSB‐MIDI

driveronyourcomputer.

Connecting via the MIDI connectors

YoucanconnecttheKROMEtoyourcomputervia

MIDIbyusingacommerciallyavailableMIDI

interface.

Note: FormoreaboutMIDIinterfaces,refertothe

owner’smanualoftheMIDIinterfaceyou’reusing.

SomeUSB‐MIDIinterfacesmaybeunableto

transmitorreceivetheKROME’sMIDIexclusive

messages.

Connecting MIDI devices

ByconnectingtheKROME’sMIDIconnectorstoan

externalMIDIdeviceyoucantransfersoundsettings

andperformancedatasuchasnotemessagesbetween

yourexternalMIDIdeviceandtheKROME.

About MIDI

MIDIstandsforMusicalInstrumentDigitalInterface,

andisaworld‐widestandardforexchangingvarious

typesofmusicaldatabetweenelectronicmusical

instrumentsandcomputers.WhenMIDIcablesare

usedtoconnecttwoormoreMIDIdevices,

performancedatacanbeexchangedbetweenthe

devices,eveniftheyweremadebydifferent

manufacturers.

Controlling an external MIDI tone

generator from KROME

IfyouwanttousetheKROME’skeyboard,chord

triggerswitchesandothercontrollers,sequencer,and

arpeggiatortoplayorcontrolanexternalMIDIsound

module,useaMIDIcabletoconnecttheKROME’s

MIDIOUTconnectortotheMIDIINconnectorofyour

externalMIDIsoundmodule.

Controlling KROME’s tone generator

from an external MIDI device

WhenyouwishtoplayorcontroltheKROME’stone

generatorfromanexternalMIDIkeyboardor

sequenceretc.,useaMIDIcabletoconnecttheMIDI

OUTconnectoroftheexternalMIDIdevicetothe

MIDIINconnectorofKROME.

Controlling two or more external MIDI

tone generators from KROME

YoucanalsouseaMIDIpatchbaytocontrolmultiple

MIDIdevices.

KROME

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI keyboard

KROME

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI keyboard

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

KROME

MIDI keyboard

MIDI

patch bay

MIDI tone generator

21

Playing and editing Programs

About the KROME’s Programs

ProgramsarethebasicsoundsoftheKROME.

Youcanplaythembythemselves,layerthemtogether

inCombinations,orplayadifferentProgramoneach

ofthe16MIDItracks,eitherfromtheinternal

sequencerorfromexternalcomputer‐based

sequencers.

Thissectionofthemanualtakesaquicklookatplaying

Programs,includingtoursofthefront‐panel

controllersandbasiceditingtechniques.

Playing Programs

Selecting Programs

ThereareseveraldifferentwaystoselectPrograms.

Eachoneisconvenientinadifferentway:

•Using“ProgramSelect”andtheVALUE

controllers:

•UsingtheBank/ProgramSelectmenu:

•UsingtheCategory/ProgramSelectmenu:

•Find

•Usingafootswitch:page 19

•MIDIprogramchangemessagesletyouselect

Programsremotely,fromeitheraMIDIsequencer

oranexternalMIDIcontroller

Fordetails,pleaseseebelow.

Selecting a program using “Program

Select” and the VALUE controllers

1. PressthePROGbutton.(TheLEDwilllightup.)

(Refertotheillustrationbelowforthebuttons.)

Alternatively,youcanusethemodebutton(see

“Selectingmodes”onpage 9).

TheKROMEwillenterProgrammode.

2. AccesstheProgP0:Play–Mainpage.

Thisisshowninthetoplineofthedisplay.

Ifadifferentpageisshown,presstheEXITbuttona

fewtimestoreturntotheProgP0:Play–Mainpage.

3. Makesurethat“ProgramSelect”isselected.

Ifit’snotselected,press“ProgramSelect”inthe

displayorpresstheEXITbuttontohighlightthe

indication.

4. Selecttheprogramyouwanttoplay.

Youcanusethefollowingmethodstoselectaprogram.

•UsetheINCorDECbuttons.

•T

urntheVALUEdial.

•Usenumerickeys0–9toentertheprogramnumber,

andpresstheENTERbutton.

5. PressoneofthePROGBANKA–Fbuttonsto

selectabank.

WhenyouselectadifferentBank,thebutton’sLEDwill

lightup,andtheselectedbankwillappearontheleft

sideofthedisplay.

4: INC/DEC buttons

3: Program Select

2: PROG P0: Play

4: VALUE dial

1: ROG buttons4: Numeric keypads

ENTER button 5: BANK A–F buttons

Velocity meter

1: Mode name

(button)

Mode button Page number and name Tab name

Program Select

(Program number and name) Category Select popup button

(Category number and name)

Bank

number

Program Select popup button

Playing and editing Programs

22

Forexample,toselectbankB,pressthePROGBANKB

button.TheBbuttonwilllightup,andthenameBank

Bwillappearontheleftsideofthedisplay.

•ToselectaGMbank,you’llusethenumerickeys.

GM:Holddown0andpress–.

g(1)–g(9):Holddown0andpressthedesirednum‐

ber1–9.Forbanksthatdonothavevariation

sounds,thebasicGMsoundswillberecalled.(An

“*”willbeappendedtothebeginningofthepro‐

gramname.)

g(d):Holddown0andpress(.).

Auditioning the sound

Playthekeyboardtoauditiontheprogramyou’ve

selected.

Thevelocitymetershowsthenote‐onvelocity.

•Thisshowsthevelocityvalueofnote‐oneventsfor

theglobalMIDIchannel,suchasthekeyboard,

MIDIIN,andarpeggiator.(Ifmultiplenote‐on

eventsarereceivedsimultaneously,thehighest

velocityvalueisshown.)

•Sincethisshowsthenote‐onvelocityvalues,itwill

notbeaffectedbythesettingsofthevolumeknob

orbychangesintheaudiosignallevel.

Overview: Program Banks

Asprogrambanks,theKROMEprovidesthesixbanks

A–FandtheGMbanks(GM–g(d)).Withthefactory

settings,theKROMEhas640preloadprogramsin

banksA–E.BankFcontainsonlyinitializedprograms.

Programsyou’vecreatedshouldbestoredinthisbank.

WiththeexceptionoftheGM–g(d)banks,youarefree

tosavebyoverwritingtheseprogrammemoryareas.

YoucanalsosavetheseprogramsonanSDcard.

Programsareorganizedintosixbanksasshowninthe

followingtable.

Programbankcontents

Selecting by Bank/Program Select

menu

YoucanselectProgramsfromamenuorganizedby

Programbank.

1. PresstheProgramSelectpopupbutton.

TheBank/ProgramSelectmenuappears.

Bank/ProgramSelectmenu

Inthisillustration,BankAisselected.Themenu

displaystheProgramscontainedinthatbank.

2. Pressthetabsontheleftsideofthedisplayto

selectbanks.

3. Pressoneoftheprogramnamesinthecenterarea

toselectaprogram.

Theselectedprogramwillbehighlighted,andthe

programwillchange.

Alternatively,youcanusetheINC/DECbuttonsto

switchprograms.

Playthekeyboardorpressthechordtriggerbuttonsto

heartheprogramyouselected.

4. IfyouselectedBankGM,theVariationbuttonis

shown.

ByrepeatedlypressingthisVariationbutton,youcan

successivelystepthroughthebanks,allowingyouto

recallaGM2soundset(see“ToselectaGMbank”on

page 22).

5. WhenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedProgram,

presstheOKbuttontoclosethemenu.

IfinsteadyoupresstheCancelbutton,theselection

youmadeherewillbediscarded,andyouwillreturn

totheprogramthathadbeenselectedbeforeyou

openedthemenu.

Bank Prog. No. Explanation

A…E 000…127 Factory

Programs.

With the factory settings,

these banks contain a wide

variety of preloaded

programs that use the

internal multisamples,

effects, and arpeggiator.

F 000…127 Initialized

Programs.

Use these to create a

program from scratch.

GM 001…128 GM2 main

programs.

These banks contain 256

GM programs and nine GM

drum programs that are

compatible with the GM2

sound map. The programs

of these banks are read-

only.

Bank GM contains the GM

programs. GM lets you

select 128 programs

numbered from 001–128,

and g(1)–g(d) lets you

select nine drum

programs.

You can’t write (save) data

to these banks.

g(1)…

g(9) 001…128 GM2 variation

programs.

g(d) 001…128 GM2 drum

programs.

Playing Programs Selecting Programs

23

Find

Here’showtosearchforaprogrambyaportionofits

name.

1. AccesstheBank/ProgramSelectmenuorthe

Category/ProgramSelectmenu,etc.

2. Pressatabtoselectthebankorcategorythatyou

wanttosearch.

Note: Theprogramsincludedintheselectedtabwillbe

thesubjectofthesearch.

3. Onthelowerleftside,presstheFindbuttonto

accessthedialogbox.

4. Pressthe“T”buttontoaccessthetextdialogbox.

Enterthealphanumericcharactersthatyouwantto

find,andpresstheOKbutton.Forexampleifyouwant

tofindprogramsthattakeeffectiveadvantageofSW1

orSW2,enter“sw”.

5. Ifyouselectthe“IgnoreCase”checkbox,

uppercaseandlowercasecharacterswillnotbe

distinguishedinthesearch.

6. PresstheFindbuttontobeginsearching.

Searchresultsareshownin“Found.”

Ifoneormoreitemsarefound,thenumberofitems

andthefirstfoundprogramwillbedisplayed.

PressthePrev.buttonorNextbuttontofindthe

previousornextprogram.Thiswillcyclethroughthe

founditemswithinthetab.

Youcanplaythekeyboardtoauditiontheprogram

thatwasfound.

Ifnoitemsarefound,thedisplaywillindicate

“nothing.”

7. Ifyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedprogram,

presstheOKbuttontoclosethemenu.

Theselectedprogramwillbeselectedinthemenuyou

selectedinstep1.Ifyouaresatisfiedwiththeselected

program,presstheOKbuttontoclosethemenu.

Ifyouwanttosearchforadifferentprogram,orifno

itemswerefound,presstheCancelbutton.

8. Pressthetabthatyouwanttoselectnext,and

searchasdescribedinsteps3–7.

IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,thisselectionwillbe

discarded,andyouwillreturntotheprogramthathad

beenselectedpriortoopeningthemenu.

Selecting by Category/Program Select

menu

YoucanselectProgramsfromwithinacategory,such

askeyboard,organ,bass,anddrums.

Whenshippedfromthefactory,thepreloaded

Programsareorganizedinto16categories,eachwith

severalsub‐categories.

1. PresstheCategorySelectpopupbutton.

TheCategory/ProgramSelectmenuappears.

Category/ProgramSelectmenu

Intheillustrationabove,theKeyboardcategoryis

selected.Themenuinthecentercolumnareashows

theProgramswhichbelongtothatcategory.

2. Pressthetabstotheleftandrightofthedisplayto

selectadifferentcategory.

Thenameoftheselectedcategorywillbedisplayedin

fullinthetopright‐handcorner.

3. Pressoneoftheprogramnamesinthecenterarea

toselectaprogram.

Theselectedprogramwillbehighlighted,andthe

programwillchange.

Alternatively,youcanusetheINC/DECbuttonsto

switchprograms.Touchthescrollribbonatthebottom

ofthescreentoseealloftheProgramsinthatcategory.

Playthekeyboardorpressachordtriggerbuttonto

heartheprogramyouselected.

4. Ifyouwanttoselectfromasub‐category,pressthe

JumptoSubbuttontoaccesstheSubCategory/

ProgSelectmenu.

Pressthelefttabstoselectasub‐category.

Note: Youcan’tselecttabsforasub‐categorythathas

noassociatedprograms.

Selectaprogramasdescribedinstep3above.

PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection,orpress

theCancelbuttontodiscardit.Youwillreturntothe

maincategory.

5. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedprogram,

presstheOKbuttontoclosethemenu.

IfinsteadyoupresstheCancelbutton,yourselection

willbediscarded,andyouwillreturntotheprogram

thathadbeenselectedwhenyouopenedthepopup

menu.

Playing and editing Programs

24

Program information

IntheProgP0:Play–Mainpageyoucanviewthe

followinginformationabouttheselectedprogram.

OSCPicture:Thisisagraphicthatrepresentsthe

program’soscillator.

OSCOct:Foradoubleoscillatorordoubledrums,this

indicates“Oct”(thebasicpitchoftheoscillator).

SW1,SW2:Thisindicatesthefunctionthat’sassigned

totheSW1/SW2buttons,andtheon/offstateofthe

buttons.

RealtimeControls–TONECONTROLS/USER

CONTROLS/ARPCONTROLS:

Thisshowsinformationaboutthefunctionsofthe

REALTIMECONTROLSknobthat’scurrentlyselected.

UsetheSELECTbuttontochoosethefunctionsthat

willbecontrolledbytheknobs.Formoreinformation

aboutthesefunctions,pleaseseepage 28.

EQ(Low,Mid[Hz],Mid,High):Thisshowsthe3‐band

EQsettings.Youcanusethevaluecontrollerstoedit

thevalues.

EffectControls–IFX,MFX,TFX:

Thisshowstheeffectsthatareassigned.TheKROME

providesinserteffects1–5,mastereffects1and2,anda

totaleffect.Forthemastereffects,youcaneditthe

returnlevels.

Vel oc ityMeter:

Thismetershowsthenote‐onvelocityvalue.

Themetershowsthenote‐onvelocityofthekeyboard,

MIDIIN,andarpeggiatoretc.(Ifmultiplenote‐on

messagesarereceivedsimultaneously,thehighest

velocityvalueisshown.)

Using Controllers

Inadditiontousingthekeyboard,theKROMEletsyou

controlthesoundbyusingthejoystick,SW1andSW2

buttons,knobs1–4,damperpedal,andfootswitchor

footpedal.

Thesecontrolsletyoumodifythetone,pitch,volume,

effects,etc.inrealtimeasyouplay.

Joystick

Thejoystickmovesinfourdirections:left,right,up

(awayfromyourself),anddown(towardsyourself).

Eachofthefourdirectionscanbeusedtocontrola

differentfunction,suchasmodulatingProgramor

effectsparameters.Theseassignmentscanbedifferent

foreveryProgram,butgenerally,theydothefollowing:

StandardJoystickfunctions

Fordetails,pleaseseepage 82.

Joystick Lock

Thisfunctionletsyoumaintaintheeffectthathadbeen

appliedpriortoreleasingyourhandfromthejoystick.

YoucanusetheSW1/SW2buttonsorafootswitch

connectedtotheKROMEtolockthecurrentposition

sothattheeffectwillcontinueevenafterthejoystick

returnstothecenterposition.Fordetails,pleasesee

“LockingtheJoystick”onpage 25.

SW1, SW2

Youcanusethesebuttonstocontrolprogram

parametersviaAMS(AlternateModulation),oreffect

parametersviaDmod(DynamicModulation).

Theycanalsotransposethekeyboardbyoctaves,turn

portamentoon/off,ortolockthepositionjoystick.

EachbuttoncanworkaseitheraToggleorMomentary

button.InTogglemode,theassignedfunctionis

switchedbetweenonandoffeachtimethebuttonis

pressed.InMomentarymode,theassignedfunctionis

activeononlyaslongasyouholddownthebutton.

InProgrammode,youcanchecktheassignmentsof

SW1andSW2ontheProgP0:Play–Mainpage.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Programinformation”on

page 24.

SW1,

SW2

OSC

Picture

OSC Oct

EQ

Realtime Controls

- Tone Controls

- User Controls

- Arp Controls

Eect Infomation

IFX 1-5

MFX 1, 2,

Send level

(On/O)

TFX (On/O )

Velocity Meter

Move the joystick… Controller

Name Normally controls…

Left JS–X Pitch bend down

Right JS+X Pitch bend up

Up (away from yourself) JS+Y Vibrato

Down (towards yourself) JS–Y Filter LFO (wah)

[SW1], [SW2]

(Lock

function)

Joystick

Playing Programs Using Controllers

25

WhenyouwriteaProgramorCombination,theon/off

statusoftheSW1andSW2buttonsissaved.

Fordetails,pleaseseepage 82.

Locking the Joystick

1. Usingthestandardfactorysounds,selectProgram

C027:SemiDistortionGuitar.

Toselectaprogram,makesurethatyouareinProgram

mode,andpressthePROGBANKCbutton,numeric

key2,7,andthentheENTERbutton.

2. Whileholdingdownakey,movethejoystickin

the–Ydirection(towardyourself).

Thetremoloeffectwilldeepen.

3. Whilekeepingthejoystickinthe–Ydirection

(towardyourself),presstheSW2button.(TheSW2

buttonLEDwilllightup.)

Whenyoupressthebutton,itsLEDwilllightup,and

themodulationeffectatthispointwillbemaintained.

4. Releasethejoystick,andplaythekeyboard.

ThemodulationwillstaythesameasitwaswhenSW2

waspressed.Evenifyoumovethejoysticktoward

yourself,thesoundwillnotchange.

5. PresstheSW2buttononceagaintoreleasethe

Lockfunction.

Keyboard

TheKROME’skeyboardprovidesthefollowingtwo

typesofcontrol.

Velocity

Velocityisameasureofhowhardyouplayanoteon

thekeyboard.Thiscanbeusedtomodulatemany

differentaspectsofthesound,suchasvolume,

brightness,orthecharacteroftheattack.

Note Number

Soundscanbeprogrammedtochangeincharacter

basedonthenotebeingplayed.

Asyouplayhigherorloweronthekeyboard,thenote

numbercanmodulatethetimbre‐suchasbecoming

brighterasyouplayhighernotes.Envelopesmayalso

becomefasterorslower;thevolumemaychange;and

soon.

Realtime control knobs

Therealtimecontrolsconsistoffourknobsandthe

SELECTbutton.Thesecontrolsfunctionasfollows.

•Youcanapplymodulationtosoundsoreditthem.

•Youcancontrolthearpeggiator.

1. PresstheSELECTbuttontoselecttherealtime

controlfunctionbetweenTONE,USER,orARP.

TONE,USER:Usetheknobstomodifythesoundor

effects(seepage 28).

ARP:Usetheknobstocontrolthearpeggiator(see

page 86).

Youcanfreelyswitchbetweenthesefunctionswithout

losingyourcurrentedits.

2. Useknobs1–4tocontroltheselectedfunctions.

Whenyouturnoneoftheseknobs,thatknob’sfunction

andvaluewillappearinapopup.

(Youcanpreventthispopupfromappearing.See

page 111.)

Therewillbeaslightamountofplaywhenturning

theknobnearitsminimumormaximumpositions.

TEMPO knob and TAP button

ThisadjuststhetempofortheKROMEasawhole,

including:

• Arpeggiator

•DrumTrack

•SongsinSequencermode

•Tempo‐syncedLFOs

•Tempo‐synced(“BPM”)delayeffects

TEMPO LED

TheLEDwillblinkatquarter‐noteintervalsofthe

currenttempo.

TEMPO knob

Thisknobadjuststhetempo.It’saconvenientwayto

makecontinuousadjustments.

Note: IftheGlobalP1:MIDI–MIDIBasicpageMIDI

ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,ExternalUSB,

orifitissettoAutoandaclockiscurrentlybeing

receivedviaMIDI,thenneithertheTEMPOknobnor

theTAPbuttonwillhaveanyeffect.

TAP button

YoucansetthetempooftheArpeggiatororDrum

TrackfunctioninProgram,Combination,and

Sequencermodesbylightlypressingortappingthe

TAPbuttonseveraltimesonthebeat.InSequencer

mode,youcancontrolthesongtempointhisway.

Toenterthetempo,useyourfingertogentlytapthe

TAPbutton.Thetempowillbeenteredwhenyoupress

thebuttontwice,butyoushouldtapseveraltimesin

ordertoincreasetheprecision.Theaverageofthelast

sixteentapswillbespecifiedasthetempo.

Duringplayback,lightlypresstheTAPbuttonseveral

timesatthedesiredtempo.Thetempowillfollowyour

tappinginrealtime.Thisisaconvenientwaytomatch

thetempoinrealtimetothebeatofadifferentsource.

Youcanusetaptempocontrolwheneverthe

TEMPOknobcanbeused.Forexamplein

Sequencermode,taptempocontrolwillnotbe

availableifyouareplayingasongwherethe

TempoModesettingissettoAuto.(Seepage 110

oftheParameterGuide)

Note: Youcanalsouseafootswitchconnectedtothe

ASSIGNABLEFOOTSWITCHjacktocontrolthetap

Playing and editing Programs

26

tempofunction(seepage 18,andpages202,349ofthe

ParameterGuide).

Damper pedal / Foot switch / Foot

pedal

Fordetailsonusingthedamperpedal,footswitch,or

pedaltocontrolthesound,pleasesee“Connectinga

damperpedal,footswitch,orfootpedal”onpage 18.

Performing with the

arpeggiator or drum track

Basedonnotedatathatitreceivesfromthekeyboard

orfromtheMIDIINconnector,thearpeggiatorcan

generateawiderangeofphrasesandpatterns

includingarpeggios,guitarorkeyboardbackingriffs,

bassphrases,ordrumpatterns.BysettingSELECTto

ARPandusingtheknobs,youcanvarytheduration

andstrengthofthearpeggiatednotes.

Formoreaboutthearpeggiator,pleaseseepage 85.

Thedrumtrackusesarichvarietyofdrumpatternsto

playtheKROME’shigh‐qualitydrumprograms.You

canselectanyprogramandplayalongwiththedrum

patterns.

Ofcourseyoucanalsosynchronizethearpeggiator

andthedrumtrackpatternsandusethemtogether.

Formoreaboutthedrumtrack,pleaseseepage 97.

Easy Program editing Adjusting the EQ

27

Easy Program editing

Thefastestwaytocreatethesoundyouneedistostart

fromapreloadprogramthat’sclosetowhatyouhave

inmind,andeditthatprogram.

Simpleeditingcanbedonewithinthevariouspagesof

P0:Playwhereyouperform.YoucanadjusttheEQ

andvolumelevel,andintheToneAdjustpageyoucan

usetheslidersandbuttonstoperformvarioususeful

edits.Youcanalsousethefrontpanelrealtimecontrols

tointuitivelyadjustthecutoff,resonance,andrelease

time.

Ifyouwanttododetailedediting,usetheediting

pagesP1andfollowing.

Adjusting the EQ

Youcanadjustamid‐sweepablethree‐bandEQinthe

ProgP0:Play–Mainpage.

Note: ThisEQwillaffectbothoscillator1andoscillator

2.

1. AccesstheProgP0:Play–Mainpage.

2. Onthedisplay,selecttheEQgainknoborthe

centerfrequencyoftheMidsweepEQthatyou

wanttoedit.

3. UsetheVA L U E controllers(e.g.,VA L U E dial)to

editthevalue.

Youcanalsoeditthevaluebydraggingleftorrighton

aknoboreditcellinthedisplay.

Adjusting the volume balance

Aprogram’ssoundconsistsofuptotwo“oscillators”

whichareplayedmainlyfromthekeyboard,andone

“drumtrack”whichautomaticallyplaystherhythm

section.

Thevolumesoftheoscillatorsandthedrumtrackcan

beadjustedintheProgP0:Play‐Mixer&DrumTrack

page.

Note: There’salsoa“mutefunction”which

individuallysilencesthese,anda“solofunction”

whichmutesallsoundsotherthanthespecifiedone.

1. AccesstheProgP0:Play–Mixer&DrumTrack

page.

2. Selectasliderinthedisplay,andusetheVA L U E 

dialetc.toadjustthevolumeofoscillators1and2

andthedrumtrack.

Foroscillatorsthatusetwodrumkits,youcanusethe

OSC1andOSC2sliderstoadjustthedirectsoundof

theclose‐miceddrumkitandtheambientsoundofthe

drumkitcapturedwithmorespace.

Note: Withsingle‐oscillatorprograms,youwon’tbe

abletocontroloscillator2.

3. YoucanpressthePlay/Mutebuttoninthedisplay

totogglethePlay/Mutestatusofoscillators1and2

andthedrumtrack.

4. YoucanpresstheSolobuttoninthedisplayto

toggletheSoloOn/Offstatusofoscillators1and2

andthedrumtrack.

ThefunctionoftheSolobuttonwillswitcheachtime

youselect“ExclusiveSolo”inthemenu(seepage 64of

theParameterGuide).

EQ

OSC Play/Mute Drum Track Play/Mute

Volume

Menu

Playing and editing Programs

28

Using realtime controls to edit

the sound or effects

Youcanusetherealtimecontrols(theSELECTbutton

andknobs1–4)tomodifythesoundandcontrolthe

arpeggiator.

1. PresstheREALTIMECONTROLSSELECTbutton

toswitchtherealtimecontrolfunctionbetween

TONE,USER,orARP.

Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,you’llcyclethroughA,

B,andCmodes,andthecorrespondingLEDwilllight

up.

Note: IfCC#70–79areassignedtoREALTIME

CONTROLSAmodeandBmode,thesoundthatyou

editusingknobs1–4willbesavedwhenyouwritethe

program.ArpeggiatorsettingsyouadjustinCmode

willalsobesaved.

2. Modifythesoundbyturningtheknobthatyou

wanttocontrol.Seebelowfordetails.

TONE controls

InTONEsectionyoucanturnknobs1–4tocontrolor

editthefollowingitems.

Note: Whenaknobisinthecenterposition

(12 o’clock),theparameterwillhavethevalue

specifiedbytheprogram.

Knob 1: CUTOFF

Thisadjuststhefilter’scutofffrequency.Adjustingthe

cutofffrequencywillmodifythebrightnessofthe

sound.

Knob 2: RESONANCE

Thisadjuststhefilter’sresonancelevel.

Adjustingthefilterresonancelevelwillboostthe

soundintheregionofthefrequency,givinga

distinctivecharactertothesound.

Knob 3: EG INT

ThisadjuststhefilterEGintensity(thedepthofhow

theEGaffectsthefilter).

Usingtheknobwillchangetheamountofhowthe

filterisaffectedbytheEG.Normally,turningtheknob

towardtheleftwillmakethefilterEGshallower,and

turningtheknobtowardtherightwillmakeitdeeper.

SincethefilterEGoperatesrelativetothefiltercutoff

frequency,bothknobs1and3willcontrolthetonal

changeproducedbythefilter.

Knob 4: RELEASE

ThisadjuststhefilterandampEGreleasetime,

changingthetimefromnote‐offuntilthesoundisno

longerheard.

Turningtheknobwillchangethereleasetimeofthe

filterEGandtheampEG.Normally,turningtheknob

towardtheleftwillshortenthereleasetime,and

turningtheknobtowardtherightwilllengthenit.

Example:

1. Selectprogram“Category:KEYBOARDA066:

DarkR&BPiano.

Thisisanelectricpianosound.Let’strymodifyingthe

soundalittle.

2. PresstheREALTIMECONTROLSSELECTbutton

toselectTONE(theLEDwilllight‐up).

3. Whileyouplay,slowlyturnknob1(filter

frequency)about3/4towardtheright.

Thepianosoundwillbecomemorelikeasynthsweep.

4. Next,turnknob2(filterresonance)about3/4

towardtherightaswell.

5. Leaveknob2initsposition,andtryturningknob

1totheleftandright.

Raisingtheresonancewillchangethesoundasthough

youwereplayingthroughawahpedal.

Level

Frequency

HighLow Cut off

frequency

Level

Time

Level

Time

note-on note-off

Sutart Level

Attack Time

Decay Time Slope Time

Attack Level

Break Level

Release Level

Sustain Level

Release

time

Easy Program editing Using Tone Adjust

29

USER controls

IntheUSERsectionyoucanturnknobs1–4tocontrol

variousaspectsofthesoundsuchasvolume,

portamentotime,

pan,filterandampEG,pitchLFO,andmastereffect

sendlevel.

InUSER,themostusefulfunctionsareassigned

individuallyforeachpreloadprogram.

Thetablebelowshowsthestandardassignmentsofthe

RealtimeControlsknobs:

Fordetails,pleaseseepage 16oftheParameterGuide.

ARP controls

IntheARPsectionyoucancontrolthearpeggiatorin

realtime.

Fordetailsonfunctionality,pleaseseepage 86.

Saving the edits you made by moving the

knobs

Therealtimecontrolknobsareanidealwaytomodify

thesoundwhileyouperform.Asneeded,pressthe

frontpanelWRITEbuttontoWritethePrograminto

memoryandsavethesoundyou’veedited.(See

“Savingyouredits”onpage 30.)

HoweverforRealtimeControlsUSERknobs1–4,

theeditedsettingscanbesavedonlyifyou’ve

assignedCC#70–79.

Internally,asingleknobusuallyaffectsseveral

differentparameters.WhenyouwriteaProgram,the

editsaresavedintotheindividualprogram

parameters,andnottotheknobitself.

AfterwritingtheProgram,you’llnoticethattheknobs

havereturnedtotheircenterpositions–sincetheold

“edited”valuesarenowthenew“saved”values.

Assigning Realtime Controls USER functions

to knobs 1–4

Youcanassignthefunctionsthatknobs1–4will

performwhenRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.

(Seepage 41)

Using Tone Adjust

TheToneAdjustfunctionletsyouedittheparameters

oftheprogram.Theprogramparametersthataremost

effectiveforeditingwillbeassignedtothecontrollers

inthedisplay.

1. AccesstheProgP0:Play–ToneAdjustpage.

Thispageshowsandreflectsdatageneratedbythe

toneadjustfunction,lettingyouviewtheparameter

assignmentsandtheirprecisevalues.

2. Toeditthesound,selectaslider(1–8)orbutton(1–

8)inthedisplay,andusetheVA L U E dialetc.to

useit.(Youcaneditthevalueofasliderby

draggingitinthedisplay.)

Note: Youcanassigntheprincipalprogram

parameterstothevariouscontrollersinthedisplay.For

details,pleaseseepage 7oftheParameterGuide.

For example:

1. SelectProgramA069,“DeluxeE.Piano.”

2. AccesstheP0:Play–ToneAdjustpage.

3. Lookattheassignmentsforsliders5,6,and8in

thedisplay.

Slider5isassignedtoF/AEGAttackTime;slider6is

assignedtoF/AEGDecayTime;andslider8is

assignedtoF/AEGReleaseTime.

4. Raiseeachofthethreesliderssothattheyare

about4/5ofthewaytothetop.

Thedisplayshouldshowtheirvaluesasbetween+60

and+70.ThismeansthatyouhaveeditedthefilterEG

andampEGattack,delay,andreleasetolongervalues.

5. Playafewnotes.

Noticethatthesoundhaschangedfromanelectric

pianointoasoftpad.Next,let’saddjustabitoffilter

modulation,tomakethesoundmorerich.

6. Noticetheassignmentofslider2inthedisplay.

Slider2isassignedto“[OSC1]FilterLFO1IntA”

(OSC1filterLFO1intensity).Itwilladjusttheamount

offiltermodulationproducedbyLFO1.

7. Lowerslider2slightlysothatthedisplayindicates

about–6.

8. Playafewmorenotes.

Thefiltermodulationhasaddedsomeshimmertothe

sound.Now,maybeitcoulduseabitmoreedge…

9. Lookattheassignmentsforswitches6and7inthe

display.

TheseareprogrammedtoraisetheFilterCutoffand

FilterResonance,respectively.Switchesarejuston/off,

butyoucansetaspecificvaluefortheOnposition;

noticethe+10and+40intheswitch’svalueboxes.

10. Presseachofthetwoswitchbuttons.

Thesoundnowhasamoreinterestingcharacter,due

tothefilters.Sinceit’sbrighter,we’vealsorestored

someoftheelectricpianocharacter.

Prettyeasy,huh?Note:dependingontheparameter,

youmayoccasionallyhearglitchesinthesoundasyou

movethecontrol.

Knob MIDI CC Normally controls…

TONE1 74 Filter Cutoff Frequency

TONE2 71 Filter Resonance

TONE3 79 Filter EG Intensity

TONE4 72 EG Release Time

USER1, 2 Varies for each Program

USER3 Often Chorus Depth - but can vary per Program

USER4 Often Reverb Depth - but can vary per Program

Playing and editing Programs

30

Changing parameter assignments

ThefactoryProgramsincludedefaultassignmentsof

ToneAdjustparameterstothesliders,andbuttonsin

thedisplay.Ifyoulike,youcanchangeanyofthe

assignments.Todoso:

1. AccesstheProgP0:Play–ToneAdjustpage.

2. Pressthepopupbuttonlocatedtotheleftofthe

assignedparameter.

Apopupwindowwillappear,withalongmenuof

parameters.Youcantellvariousthingsaboutthe

selections,justfromthewaytheyappearinthemenu:

ParameterswhichaffectonlyOSC1orOSC2are

prefixedwith[OSC1]and[OSC2],respectively.

ParameterswhichaffectbothOscillators,butwhichare

specifictoPrograms,areprefixedwith[OSC1&2].

Theothergroupofparametersatthebeginningofthe

list,are“Common.”Thatis,youcanusethemwith

mostPrograms.

ParameterscanonlybeassignedtooneToneAdjust

controlatatime.Ifaparameterisalreadyassigned,it’s

grayedout.

3. Selectaparameterfromthemenu.

Theparameterisnowassignedtothecontrol.Toclose

thelistwithoutmakinganychanges,pressalocation

inthedisplayoutsidethepopupwindow,orpressthe

EXITbutton.

Comparing the unedited

sound

Using COMPARE

Whenyou’reintheprocessofeditingasound,

pressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillrecallthelast

savedversionofthesound,asitwasbeforeyoustarted

editing.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Comparefunction”onpage 11.

Saving your edits

Afteryou’veeditedaprogram,youmustsaveitifyou

wanttokeepthechangesyou’vemade.Ifyoure‐select

theprogramorturnoffthepowerafterediting,your

editswillbelost.

1. PresstheWRITEbutton.

TheWriteProgramdialogboxwillappear.Ifyouwant

tomodifythewriting‐destinationorname,youcando

so(seepage 117).

2. PresstheWRITEbuttononceagaintosave(write)

theprogram.

Fordetails,pleasesee“WritingaProgramor

Combination”onpage 115.

YoucanalsosaveprogramsonanSDcardasPCGfiles.

Fordetails,pleasesee“SavingtoSDcard(Media–

Save)”onpage 118.

Detailed Editing with Programs Before you start editing

31

Detailed Editing with Programs

Youcancreateoriginalsoundsbyeditingapreloaded

programorbyeditinganinitializedprogram.The

programsyoucreatecanbesavedinbanksA–F.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Savingyouredits”onpage 30.

Before you start editing

The three elements of sound: pitch,

tone, and volume

Soundismadeupofthreebasicelements:pitch,tone,

andvolume.

TheKROMEprovides“pitch,”“filter,”and“amp

(amplifier)”sectionsthatallowyoutocontrolthese

elements.

The“pitch”sectionmodifiesthepitch,the“filter”

sectionmodifiesthetone,andthe“amp”section

modifiesthevolume.

You’lledit“pitch”settingsinP2:OSC/Pitch(P2‐3)and

OSC2Pitch,“filter”settingsinP3:Filter(P3‐1–3),and

“amp”settingsinP4:Amp/EQ(P4‐1–2).

EG, LFO, AMS, and controllers

Inadditiontothethreeelementslistedabove,asound

canvaryaccordingtothepassageoftime,thepitch

rangeinwhichit’splayed,orbyperformance

expressions.

Suchaspectscanbecontrolledbymodulatorsand

controllerssuchastheEG(envelopegenerator),LFO

(lowfrequencyoscillator),andjoystick.These

modulatorsandcontrollersapplychangetothebasic

program.

Takealookattheillustration“Programstructure”

NoticethatthesignalflowisintheorderofOscillator/

Pitch,Filter,Amp.YoucanseehowtheEGsandLFOs

affecteachsection.

Asshownintheillustration,eachprogramconsistsof

sectionssuchasOSC1/2,effects,andthearpeggiator.

OSC (oscillator) 1/2

TheOSC(oscillator)generatesthewaveformthatisthe

basisofthesound.OntheKROME,theoscillator

consistsofmultiplesampledsoundssuchasa

multisampleoradrumkit(drumsamples).

TheKROMEprovidestwooscillators;OSC1and

OSC2.Youcancreatemorecomplexprogramsby

combiningthese.

TheOSC,whichisthebasisofthesound,canbe

controlledbymodulatingitspitch,filter,amp,EG,and

LFOtochangethesoundinawiderangeofways.

Note: PitchEGissharedbyOSC1andOSC2.

Effects

Aseffects,youcanusefiveinserteffects,twomaster

effects,andonetotaleffect.

TheoutputofOSC1/2issenttotheseeffectprocessors.

Bychoosingthedesiredeffectforeachprocessorand

editingitsparameters,youcanapplyawiderangeof

effectssuchasmodulation,distortion,and

reverberation.

Arpeggiator

Aprogramcanuseonearpeggiator.Youcanselectan

arpeggiopattern,specifytherangethatthepatternwill

bedevelopedwithin,andspecifytherangeofnotesor

velocitiesthatwilltriggerthearpeggiator.

OSC / Pitch Filter Amplier Eects

EQ

OSC1 Setup: P2–1,

OSC1 Velocity: P2–2

Amp1/Driver1: P4–1

Pitch EG : P2–10

Filter1 EG: P3–10 Amp1 EG: P4–3

OSC1 LFO1: P5–1

OSC 1

OSC 2

Filter1 Mod: P3–3

Filter Key Track: P3–2

Filter1 LFO Mod: P3

–4

OSC1 Pitch: P2–3

OSC1 LFO2: P5–2

Amp1 Mod: P4–2

Program Basic/Controllers: P1

AUDIO OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Master

Eect

1, 2: P9

Total

Eect

: P9

Insert

Eect

1…5: P8

3Band EQ

: P4–10

Filter1(A/B): P3–1

OSC1 AMS Mix: P6–1/2

Common KeyTrack: P6–9/10

OSC1, 2

Insert Eects

Master Eects

FX Control Bus

Routing: P8–1

Common LFO: P5–10

Arpeggio: P7–1, 2

DrumTrk Pattern: P7–4, 5 Tone Adjust: P0–7

Controllers: P1–3

P1–1, P2–2, etc. indicate the on-screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KROME.

Programstructure

Playing and editing Programs

32

An overview of the edit pages

Inordertododetailedediting,you’llneedtoaccessthe

editpagesinthedisplay.

Theprecedingsection“EasyProgramediting”on

page 27explainedhowtousetheProgP0:Playpageto

dosimpleediting.Formoredetailedediting,you’lluse

theP1andfollowingeditpages.

Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage,

pleasesee“Basicoperations”onpage 9.

Basic oscillator settings

Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofprogram,selectthe

basicwaveform(multisampleordrumkit),andspecify

whetheritwillplaypolyphonicallyormonophonically

(poly/mono).

Program type setting (single, double,

drum kit)

Hereyoucanspecifytheprogramtype.

Broadlyspeakingtheprogramtypewillbeeither“a

programthatusesamultisample”or“aprogramthat

usesadrumkit”(see“MultisamplesandDrumKits”

onpage 33).

ThischoiceismadebytheProgP1:Basic/Controllers–

ProgramBasic“OscillatorMode”setting,which

specifieswhichtypetheoscillatorswilluse.Uptotwo

canbeusedsimultaneouslyforeachtype.

•Multisample:Single,Double

•Drumkit:Drums,DoubleDrums

Single(singleprogram)usesoneoscillator,and

Double(doubleprogram)usestwooscillators.

Drums(drumprogram)issimilartoasingleprogram,

butusesadrumkit(createdinGlobalmode)insteadof

amultisample.DoubleDrums(doubledrum

program)usestwodrumkits.Byusinganambience‐

typekitastheseconddrumkit,youcangiveawider

senseofspacetothesound.

Polyphony

Polyphonyisthenumberofnotesthatcanbeplayed

simultaneously,suchasinachord.Thepolyphony

dependsontheprogramtype.

Note:

•DoubleProgramsandDoubleDrumsusetwiceas

manyvoicesasSinglePrograms.

•StereoMultisamplesusetwiceasmanyvoicesas

MonoMultisamples.

•Ifusingvelocitycrossfadeswitching,the

multisamplewillusetwiceasmanyvoicesasusual.

Page Main content

PLAY

P0: Play

Select and play programs. (see

page 21)

Oscillator and Drum track level

settings. (see page 27)

Simple drum track editing. (see

page 98)

Simple arpeggiator editing. (see

page 86)

Tone Adjust settings. (see page 29)

EDIT

P1: Basic/

Controllers

Basic program settings, such as

Oscillator mode. (see page 32)

SW1, 2, and knob settings. (see

page 41)

P2: OSC/Pitch Oscillator selection and pitch settings.

(see page 33)

P3: Filter Filter 1, 2 (tone) settings. (see page 38)

P4: Amp/EQ

Amp 1, 2 (volume) settings. (see

page 40)

Amp 1, 2 driver and pan settings.

3-band parametric EQ settings.

P5: LFO LFO settings. (see page 35)

P6: AMS/Common

KeyTrack

AMS Mixer settings. (see page 36)

Common keyboard tracking settings.

ARP/ DT

P7: Arpeggiator/

Drum Track

Arpeggiator settings. (see page 88)

Drum track settings. (see page 100)

EFFECT

P8: Routing/IFX

Oscillator output bus and master effect

send level settings. (see page 79)

Insert effect routing, selection, and

settings. (see page 79)

P9: MFX/TFX/LFO

Master effect routing, selection, and

settings. (see page 80)

Total effect selection and settings. (see

page 80)

Program type Polyphony

Single 120

Double 60

Drums 120

Double Drums 60

Detailed Editing with Programs Basic oscillator settings

33

Oscillator image setting

Youcanspecifytheprogramoscillatorimagethat’s

shownintheP0:Play–Mainpage.Adjustthissetting

inProgP1:Basic/Controllers–ProgramBasicOscillator

Mode“OSCPicture1”and“2.”

1. Pressthe“OSCPicture1”or“2”popupbutton(>)

ortheimageiconshownatright;thedialogbox

willappear.

2. Toselectanimage,pressanimageinthelistinthe

lowerpartofthescreen,orattheleftorrightinthe

upperpart.

3. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice.

Polyphonic/monophonic playing

TheVoiceAssignModeselectswhethertheProgram

willplaypolyphonically(Poly)ormonophonically

(Mono).

WhenthisissettoPoly,youcanplaybothchordsand

melodylines.WhenthisissettoMono,onlyonenote

willsoundevenifyouplayachord.

Normallyyou’llsetthistoPoly,butMonoisuseful

whenplayingsoundssuchassynthbasses,synth

leads,andothersoloinstruments.

TryswitchingbetweenPolyandMono,andlistento

theresults.

Working with Multisamples

What is a multisample?

Asampleisadigitalrecordingofaparticular

instrumentorwaveform(orothernaturalorartificially

processedsound)recordedataspecificpitch.A

multisampleisacollectionofsimilarlyvoicedsamples,

usedtocreatethesametypeofsound‐piano,bass,

guitar,strings,organ‐acrosstheentirekeyboard,as

thebasisofaprogram.Theoscillatorsofsingleand

doubleprogramsusemultisamples.Thereare583

multisamplesavailableinthisinstrument.

Youcanassignuptofourmultisamplestoeach

oscillatorandswitchbetweenthembyvelocity.

Multisamples and Drum Kits

MultisamplesandDrumKitsallowyoutoplay

samplesindifferentways.

•Multisampleslayoutoneormoresamplesacross

thekeyboard.Ifweusetheexampleofasimple

guitarmultisample,onesamplecouldbeassigned

foreachstring,sothatthemultisamplewould

consistofsixsamples.

•Asthenamesuggests,DrumKitsareoptimizedfor

playingdrumsamples.

Velocity splits, crossfades, and layers

Eachoscillatorprovideseightvelocityzones.Thislets

youswitchbetweenmultisamplesordrumsamples

accordingtothevelocity(speed)atwhichyouplaya

key.

Byspecifyingthethreshold(boundaryvalue)where

eachzonewillrespond,andtheamountofcrossfading

(theoverlapbetweenzones),youcanspecifyhowyour

keyboardplayingdynamicswillswitchorlayerthe

multisamplesordrumsamples.Youcanusethisto

makethefollowingtypesofsetups.

•Velocitysplits,wheremultisamples(or

drumsamples)arecleanlyswitchedatthethreshold

•Velocitycrossfades,wheremultisamples(or

drumsamples)aresmoothlycrossfadedovera

specifiedrangeoutsidethethreshold

•Velocitylayers,wheretwomultisamples(or

drumsamples)arelayeredwhenyouplaya

specifiedrangeoutsidethethreshold

Note: If“OscillatorMode”issettoDrumsorDouble

Drums,thevelocitysettingspre‐specifiedforthedrum

kitwillbeused,andthereforewillnotbeshowninthe

screen.Thevelocityzonesettingsofadrumkitcanbe

editedinGlobalP5:DrumKit(seepage 105).Youcan

jumpautomaticallytoGlobalP5bypressingtheJump

toDrumKitEditbuttonshownonthescreen.

Selecting Multisamples

Let’screateasimplevelocitycrossfadebetweentwo

Multisamples,usingjustOSC1.

1. AccesstheProgP2:OSC/Pitch–OSC1Setuppage.

2. SettheMultisampleOn/Offformultisample1and

multisample2toOn.

SettheMultisampleOn/Offformultisample3and

multisample4toOff.

Bydraggingtheslidertotheleft,youcanselecteach

multisampleandviewitssettings.

3. SelectStereoastheMultisampleBankfor

multisample1andmultisample2.

TherearetwomaintypesofMultisampleBanks:

Mono,andStereo.NotethatstereoMultisampleswill

requiretwiceasmanyvoicesasmonoMultisamples.

Multisamplesareorganizedbycategorysuchaspiano,

guitar,bell,etc.

Bank

Multi-

sample

On/Off

Slider

Playing and editing Programs

34

4. PresstheMultisamplepopupbuttonfor

multisample1.

ThisbringsupalistofMultisamples,organizedby

category.Usethetabsontheleftofthedisplayto

browsethroughthedifferentcategories.

5. SelectaMultisamplebytouchingitsnameinthe

list.YoucanalsouseFindtosearchfora

Multisample.

6. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection.

7. Performthesamestepsformultisample2,

selectingadifferentMultisamplethanfor

multisample1.

Nowthatyou’veassignedMultisamplesto

multisample1andmultisample2,let’ssetupthe

velocityrangesandcrossfades.

Multisampleshavenowbeenassignedtomultisample

1and2.

8. Specifythevelocityrangeandcrossfaderange.

PresstheVelocitytabtoaccesstheOSC1Velocitypage.

Setthemultisample2“ThresholdVelocity”to001,and

turn“Crossfade”Off.

9. Setthemultisample1“ThresholdVelocity”to80.

Youcanalsoset“ThresholdVelocity”bydraggingthe

bottomedgeofthelinegraph.

Withthesesettings,Multisample2willsoundfornotes

playedwithavelocityof79orless,andMultisample1

willsoundfornotesplayedwithavelocityof80or

greater.

TheVelocitySplitmetershowstheoscillator’seight

multisamplesandthevelocityzonesofeachoscillator.

Themeterontheleftshowsthenote‐onvelocity.This

letsyouseewhichmultisampleandoscillatorwill

soundforthatspecificvelocity.

10. Setthemultisample1“Crossfade”to20,andits

“Curve”toLinear.

Thestateofthissplitisshownvisuallyinthescreen.

Thetwomultisampleswillfadeacrosstherangefrom

80to100,withmultisample2fading‐outwhile

multisample1fades‐in.Thisproducesasmooth

changewithoutanysuddenswitch.

11. Asnecessary,usetheProgP2:OSC/Pitch–OSC1

Setuppagetoadjustthe“Level”ofthetwo

multisamples.

Assigning a drum kit

What is a drum kit?

DrumkitsarecreatedoreditedinGlobalmode.For

eachnoteofthekeyboard,youcanassignuptoeight

druminstrumentsamples,anduselayering,

crossfading,orvelocityswitchingtoswitchbetween

them.Then,inProgrammode,youcanadjustfilter

andampsettings,andspecifyeffectsandroutingtothe

audiooutputjacks.(Seepage 105)

TouseadrumkitinaProgram,setOscillatorModeto

DrumsorDoubleDrums,andchooseoneofthe48

userdrumkitsorthenineGM2drumkits.

Selecting a drum kit

1. AccesstheProgP1:Basic/Controllers–Program

Basicpage.

2. Set“OscillatorMode”toDrumsorDouble

Drums.

3. SelectadrumkitintheProgP2:OSC/Pitch–OSC1

Setuppage.

4. Specifythebasicpitchoftheoscillator.Foradrum

kit,set“Octave”to+0[8ʹ].

Multisample popup button

Detailed Editing with Programs Creating time-varying changes (LFO and EG)

35

Creating time-varying

changes (LFO and EG)

Using LFOs

YoucanusethecyclicchangeproducedbytheLFO

(LowFrequencyOscillator)tomodulatenumerous

aspectsofthesound.

EachProgramhastwoLFOs:LFO1andLFO2.Thereis

alsoasingleCommonLFO,sharedbybothOscillators.

WhileLFO1andLFO2areseparateforeachvoice,the

CommonLFOissharedbyallvoicesintheProgram.

Thismakesitusefulwhenyouwantallofthevoicesto

haveanidenticalLFOeffect.

YoucanusetheseLFOstomodulatemanydifferent

Programparameters,including:

•Pitch(forvibrato)

•Filters(forwaheffects)

•Volume(fortremolo)

•Pan(forauto‐panning)

TheLFOscanmodulatemanyotherparameters,in

additiontothoselistedabove.

Using the basic LFO

1. AccesstheProgP5:LFO–OSC1LFO1page.

2. SelecttheWaveformparameter.

UsetheINCandDECbuttonstoscrollthroughthe

differentwaveforms,andlookattheirshapesinthe

graphicdisplay.

Thereareanumberofwaveformstochoosefrom.Each

aresuitedtodifferentapplications:

TriangleandSinearetheclassicLFOshapesfor

vibrato,tremolo,panning,andfilterwaheffects.

Squareisusefulforgatedonandofffilterandamp

effects,andcancreatetrillswhenmodulatingpitch.

TheGuitarwaveformisdesignedespeciallyforguitar

vibrato;itbendsonlyupwardsfromthebasevalue.

SawandExponentialSawDownaregoodfor

rhythmicfilterandampeffects.

Random1(S/H)createstheclassicsample‐and‐hold

effect,whichisgreatformodulatingaresonantfilter.

3. Afterlookingatthedifferentwaveforms,select

Triangle.

4. SelecttheShapeparameter,andusetheVA L U E 

dialtomovethroughitsdifferentsettings,from

–99to+99.

Noticehowtheshapeofthewaveformbecomesmore

curved,andhow–99emphasizesthelowerpartofthe

shape,and+99emphasizestheupperpart.

5. SelectthePhaseparameter,andusetheVALUE 

dialtosweepthroughitsrangeofvalues.

Noticehowthewaveformshiftsfromsidetoside.

Amongotherthings,thisletsyouoffsettheLFOsfrom

oneanotherintime,whichcancreateinteresting

organiceffects.

6. UsetheFreq(Frequency)parametertosetthe

speedoftheLFO.

7. UsetheFadeandDelaysettingstocontroltheway

theLFOsoundsatthebeginningofthenote.

FormoreinformationonLFOs,pleaseseepage 42of

theParameterGuide.

AlloftheseparameterscontrolthewaythattheLFO

works.InorderfortheLFOtoactuallyaffectthe

sound,youcanusethededicatedLFOroutingsonthe

Filter,Pitch,andAmppages,orusetheLFOsasAMS

sourcesforawidevarietyofparameters.

Using EGs (Envelope Generators)

Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymoving

fromoneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,and

thenmovingtoanotherleveloveranotherperiodof

time,andsoon.

TheProgramincludesthreeEGs,forPitch,Filter,and

Amp.Theseproducetime‐varyingchangesinpitch,

tone,andvolumerespectively.Theycanalsobeusedto

modulateanumberofotherprogramparametersvia

AMS.

Note: TheparametersthatcanbemodulatedbyanEG

andtherangeofvalueswilldifferdependingonthe

EGsprovidedforeachsection.

Waveform

Level

Time

note-on note-off

Sutart Level

Attack Time

Decay Time Slope Time

Attack Level

Break Level

Release

Level

Sustain Level

Release Time

Playing and editing Programs

36

Diverse modulation settings

(AMS and AMS mixer)

Using AMS

AMS(AlternateModulationSource)letsyoumodulate

programparametersusingcontrollers,EG,orLFOas

themodulationsource.Extremelycreativetypesof

modulationarepossible;forexample,youcanusea

singlecontrollertosimultaneouslymodulatemultiple

parameters,oryoucanuseanEGtomodulatean

LFO’sfrequencyandthenusethatLFOtomodulatea

filter.

AMS(AlternateModulationSource)referstoanyof

theassignablemodulationsourcesinKROME,

including:

• ControllersoftheKROMEitself,suchasthe

joystick,SW1/2,andtherealtimeknobs

•IncomingMIDIcontrollers

• ModulatorssuchastheFilter,Pitch,andAmpEGs,

theLFOs,ortheAMSMixers

Intensityisaparameterthatsetsthedegree(speed,

depth,amountetc.)ofhowAMSwillcontrolthe

modulation.

Anumberoffrequently‐usedmodulationroutings,

suchasusingthejoysticktovarythepitch,are

providedasadditional,dedicatedroutings,separate

fromAMS.

NotethatnotallAMSsourcesmaybeavailablefor

somemodulationdestinations.

FordetailsonalternatemodulationandAMS,please

seebelow.

• “AlternateModulationSources(AMS)”onpage 339

oftheParameterGuide

•“CreatingVibrato”onpage 37

•“PitchEG”onpage 37

• “FilterEG”onpage 39

•“LFOmodulation”onpage 39

•“AMS(Pan)”onpage 36oftheParameterGuide

•“LFO1/2”onpage 40

Using the AMS Mixers

TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,

orprocessanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomething

new.

Forexample,thisletsyouuseanLFOtomodulatea

filter’sresonancewhilealsomodulatingitbyanEG.

AlthoughresonancehasonlyoneAMSinput,using

theAMSmixermakesthispossible.Youcouldalsodo

thingssuchasusingthefilterEGtocontroltheamount

ofLFO1.Thewidevarietyofotherpossibilitiesinclude

usingthejoysticktocontroltheamountofpitchEG,

allowingthejoysticktoapplybendonlytonotes

playedwhileyouholddownthefootswitch,or

changingtheresponseofarealtimecontroller.

TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMS

sources,justliketheLFOsandEGs.AnAMSmixer’s

outputsignalcanbeusedtomodulateavarietyof

parameters.

Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputsto

theAMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,

ifyouuseLFO1asaninputtoanAMSMixer,youcan

usetheprocessedversionoftheLFOtocontrolone

AMSdestination,andtheoriginalversiontocontrol

another.

Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether,

byusingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2.

Fordetails,pleasesee“6–1:OSC1AMSMix1”on

page 46oftheParameterGuide.

Tips for using AMS

Whenmakingsettingsforalternatemodulation,think

oftheeffectthatyouwishtoproduce,whattypeof

modulationwillbenecessarytoproducethateffect,

andwhatparameteroftheoscillator,filter,oramplifier

needstobecontrolled.

Next,selectasource(AMS)andsettheIntensity.If

youproceedlogicallyinthisway,youwillachievethe

desiredeffect.

Forexampleinaguitarsoundprogramwhereyou

wanttousethejoysticktocontrolthefeedback,you

wouldmakeassignmentssothatthejoystickcontrols

thefilterfrequencyandresonance.

Controller Setup page

Foreachprogram,thefunctionofRealtimeControl

knobs1‐B–4‐BandtheSW1andSW2buttonscanbe

assignedintheProgP1:Basic/Controllers–Controllers

Setuppage.

Fordetails,pleasesee“SettingthefunctionsofSW1

andSW2”onpage 41,and“Settingthefunctionsof

RealtimeControlsUSERknobs1–4”onpage 42.

Detailed Editing with Programs Controlling Pitch

37

Controlling Pitch

Pitch bend

Pitchbendsmoothlychangesthepitchupwardor

downward,similartohowaguitaristcan“bend”

strings.OntheKROME,youwillnormallyusethe

joysticktocontrolpitchbendinrealtime.

TheJS(+X)andJS(–X)settingsspecifytheamountof

pitchchange(insemitones)thatwilloccurwhenMIDI

pitchbendmessagesarereceivedorwhenthejoystick

ismovedtoleftorright.Asettingof+12allowsthe

pitchtobecontrolledamaximumofoneoctave

upward;asettingof–12allowsthepitchtobe

controlledamaximumofoneoctavedownward.

Note: Youcanalsocontrolpitchbendusinga

controllerotherthanthejoystick,orviaMIDI.

Ribbon(#16)specifiestheamountofpitchchange(in

semitoneunits)thatwilloccurwhenMIDIcontrol

changemessage#16isreceived.Withasettingof+12,a

valueof127willraisethepitchoneoctave,andavalue

of0willlowerthepitchoneoctave.

Creating Vibrato

YoucanuseanLFOtocreatevibrato.

LFO1Int.orLFO2Int.setsthedepthofhowthe

selectedLFOwillaffectthepitch.Withasettingof

+12.00,vibratowillproduceamaximumof±1octaveof

pitchchange.

JS+YIntspecifiestheamountofvibratothattheLFO

willproducewhenthejoystickispushedawayfrom

you.

Intensity(AMSIntensity)specifiesthedepthof

vibratothatwillbeappliedbytheLFOwhen

modulatedbytheselectedAMS(AlternateModulation

Source).Forexample,ifthepanelswitchassignment

forSW1issettoSW1Mod.(CC#80)(Prog1–7a),and

yousetLFO1AMStoSW1:CC#80andspecifyan

appropriatevalueforIntensity,vibratowillbeapplied

whenyouturnSW1onorwhenMIDIcontrolchange

#80isreceived.

Pitch EG

WhentheIntensityvalueissetto+12.00,thepitchEG

specifiedinthePitchEGpagewillproducea

maximumof±1octaveofpitchchange.

Torealisticallysimulatetheslightchangeinpitchthat

occurswhenastringispluckedorattheattackofa

brassorvocalsound,youcanusetheEGtocreatea

subtlechangeinpitchattheattack.

Portamento

Portamentomakesthepitchchangesmoothlywhen

youplaythenextnotebeforereleasingtheprevious

note.

TheTimeparametercontrolshowlongitwilltakethe

pitchtochange.Asthisvalueisincreased,thepitch

willchangeoveralongertime.Withavalueof000,

therewillbenoportamento.

YoucanturnPortamentoonandoffviaSW1orSW2,

byassigningthemtoPorta.SWCC#65.

Playing and editing Programs

38

Using Filters

Thefiltersallowyoutodiminishoremphasize

specifiedfrequencyareasofthesound.

Thetoneofthesoundwilldependsignificantlyon

thefiltersettings.

Thebasicfiltersettings,includingtherouting,type,

cutofffrequency,andresonance,aresetontheP3–1:

Filterpage.

Filter Routing

Eachoscillatorhastwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.The

FilterRoutingparametercontrolswhetheroneorboth

ofthefiltersareused,andifbothareused,itcontrols

howtheyareconnectedtoeachother.

TheSingleroutingusesonlyFilterAasasingle2‐pole,

12dB/octavefilter(6dBforBandPassandBandReject).

TheSerialroutingusesbothFilterAandFilterB.The

oscillatorfirstgoesthroughFilterA,andthenthe

outputofFilterAisprocessedthroughFilterB.

ParallelalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.The

oscillatorfeedsbothfiltersdirectly(andallow

independentsettingsforeach),andtheoutputsofthe

twofiltersarethensummedtogether.

The24dB(4Pole)routingmergesbothfilterstocreatea

single4‐pole,24dB/octavefilter(12dBforBandPass

andBandReject).IncomparisontoSingle,thisoption

producesasharperroll‐offoffrequenciesbeyondthe

cutofffrequency,aswellasaslightlymoredelicate

resonance.Manyclassicanalogsynthsusedthistype

offilter.

SerialandParallelRouting

Filter Types

Thisselectsthepartsofthesoundthatwillbeaffected

bythefilter,asdescribedbelow.WiththeSerialand

Parallelroutings,youcanindependentlysetthetypes

forFilterAandFilterB.

Thefilterswillproduceverydifferentresults

dependingontheselectedfiltertype.

LowPass:Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundthatare

higherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthemost

commontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright

timbressounddarker.

HighPass:Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundthatare

lowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto

maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy.

BandPass:Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,both

highsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff

frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow

frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramatically

dependingonthecutoffsettingandtheoscillator’s

multisample.

Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBand

Passfiltertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonograph

sounds.Withhigherresonancesettings,itcancreate

buzzyornasaltimbres.

BandReject:Thisfiltertype–alsocalledanotchfilter–

cutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe

cutofffrequency.Trymodulatingthecutoffwithan

LFOtocreatephaser‐likeeffects.

FilterTypesandCutoffFrequency

Filter A (Low Pass)Oscillator

Oscillator

Filter B (High Pass)

Filter A (Low Pass)

Filter B (High Pass)

Low Pass

High Pass

Band Pass

Band Reject

Cutoff Frequency

Detailed Editing with Programs Using Filters

39

Resonance

Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe

cutofffrequency,asshowninthediagrambelow.

Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and

frequenciesbeyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminish

smoothly.

Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbre

ofthefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormore

extreme.Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbe

heardasaseparate,whistlingpitch.

Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,please

see“KeyFollow”onpage 29oftheParameterGuide.

Modulating the filters

Youcanmodulatethefiltercutofffrequencyusingthe

FilterEG,theLFOs,keyboardtracking,andother

built‐inandMIDIcontrollers.Thisisagreatwayto

addarichvarietyoftonalchangetothesound.

Filter EG

TheFilterEGisamulti‐stageenvelope,whichyoucan

usetomodulatethefilteraswellasotherProgram

parameters.TheEGitselfissetupontheEGtab;the

waythatitaffectsthefiltersiscontrolledbythe

parametersdescribedbelow,ontheFilter1/2–

Modulationpage:

TheIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBsettingscontrol

thebasicamountofEGmodulationforfilter

frequenciesAandB,respectively,beforeother

modulation.

TheVelocitytoAandVelocitytoBsettingsletyouuse

velocitytocontroltheamountofEGmodulation.

TheAMSsettingselectsanAMSmodulationsourceto

scaletheamountoftheFilterEGappliedtoFiltersA

andB.ThetwofiltersshareasingleAMSsource,with

separateintensityIntoAortoBsettings.

LFO modulation

YoucanmodulatethefilterviaLFO1,LFO2,andthe

CommonLFO.Amongotherapplications,LFO

modulationofthefiltercanproducetheclassic“auto‐

wah”effect.

TheFilter1/2–LFOMod.pageletsyousetupthe

followingparametersseparatelyforeachLFO:

IntensitytoAandIntensitytoBspecifyhowmuch

theLFOchangesthetone.

JS‐YIntensitytoAandJS‐YIntensitytoBspecifythe

depthofthewaheffectproducedbytheLFOwhenthe

joystickismovedtowardyourself,orwhenCC#2is

received.

TheAMSsettingselectsanAMSmodulationsourceto

scaletheamountoftheLFOappliedtoFiltersAandB.

ThetwofiltersshareasingleAMSsource,with

separateintensitysettings.

ForexampleifAMSissettoSW1:CC#80,turningSW1

onwillapplyanauto‐waheffect(seepage 37).

Keyboard Track

Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplay

higherpitches.Atitsmostbasicapplication,keyboard

trackingre‐createsthiseffectbyincreasingthecutoff

frequencyofalowpassfilterasyouplayhigheronthe

keyboard.Usually,someamountofkeytrackingis

necessaryinordertomakethetimbreconsistentacross

theentirerange.

TheKROMEkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuchmore

complex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferentratesof

changeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.

Forinstance,youcan:

• Makethefiltercutofffrequencyincreasevery

quicklyoverthemiddleofthekeyboard,andthen

openmoreslowly–ornotatall–inthehigher

octaves.

• Makethecutofffrequencyincreaseasyouplay

loweronthekeyboard.

• Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplit‐like

effects.

How Key Track works: Keys and Ramps

Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps,

orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Howitworks:Keysand

Ramps”onpage 28oftheParameterGuide.

Low resonance

High resonance

Playing and editing Programs

40

Using the Amp section

TheAmpsectionincludescontrolsforvolume,pan,

andthedrivercircuit.

YoucancontrolthevolumeusingtheAmpEG,LFO1/

2,KeyTrack,andvelocity,alongwithotherAMS

sources.

EachOscillatorhasitsownAmpsection:Amp1for

OSC1,andAmp2forOSC2.

Background - what does “Amp”

mean?

Differentsoundshavecharacteristicshapestotheir

volumelevels.

Forexample,thevolumeofapianonotebeginsata

highvolumetheinstantyouplaythenote,andthen

decreasesgradually.

Thevolumeofanorgannote,ontheotherhand,

remainsconstantaslongasyoucontinuepressingthe

key.

Thevolumeofanoteonaviolinorwindinstrument

canbevariedduringthenotebythemusician(i.e.,by

regulatingtheamountofpressureontheboworthe

forceofthebreath).

Pan

Pan

ThemainPanparametercontrolsthestereoposition

afterthesignalhaspassedthroughtheoscillator,filter,

andamp.

Normallyyou’llsetthistoC064,sothatthesoundis

centeredequallybetweentheleftandrightspeakers.

TocreateastereoeffectwhenOscillatorModeissetto

Double,settheAmp1/Driver1pagePantoL001,and

theAmp2/Driver2pagePanR127.Thiswillmake

OSC1gototheleftspeaker,andOSC2gototheright

speaker.

WithasettingofRandom,thepanwillchange

randomlyeachtimeyouplayanoteonKROME,

producinganinterestingeffect.

Pan - Use DKit Setting

UseDKitSettingapplieswhenOscillatorModeisset

toDrumsorDoubleDrums.

Ifthisischecked,theProgramcanuseadifferentpan

positionforeachdrumsound,asspecifiedbythe

DrumKit.Ifthisisunchecked,alldrumsoundswill

usetheProgram’spanposition.

ThefactorypresetsandGMdrumkitsuseindividual

panpositionsforthedifferentdrums,sonormallyit’s

besttoleavethischecked.

Amp modulation

ThebasicvolumelevelissetbytheAmpLevel

parameter.Youcanthenalterthisusingthe

modulationsourcesbelow:

Keyboard Track

Thisletsyouvarythevolumerelativetothenoteyou

play.

Fordetails,pleasesee“KeyboardTrack”onpage 39.

Amp Modulation

VelocityIntensityisusedbymostprogramsto

decreasethevolumeofsoftlyplayednotesand

increasethevolumeofstronglyplayednotes,andthe

AmpModulationparameteradjuststhedepthofthis

control.

NormallyyouwillsetAmpModulationtopositive(+)

values.Asthissettingisincreased,therewillbe

greatervolumedifferencebetweensoftlyplayedand

stronglyplayednotes.

LFO1/2

SpecifieshowtheLFO’swillproducecyclicchangesin

volume(tremoloeffect).

ThevolumewillbeaffectedbytheLFO(s)whereyou

setanLFO1Intensity,LFO2Intensityvalue.

Intensity(AMSIntensity)adjuststhedepthofhowthe

tremoloeffectproducedbytheLFOwillbeaffected

whenyouassignanAMS(LFO1AMS,LFO2AMS).

Forexample,ifyousetAMStoJS‐Y:CC#02,tremolo

willbeappliedwhenyoupushtheKROME’sjoystick

down(towardyourself),orwhenCC#02isreceived.

Volume

Time

Volume

Time

Piano Organ

Volume decays

gradually

Volume remains constant

until note is released

Detailed Editing with Programs Making controller assignments

41

Amp EG

TheAmpEGletsyoucontrolhowthevolumechanges

overthecourseofanote.

Everyinstrumenthasitsowncharacteristicvolume

envelope.Thisispartofwhatgiveseachinstrumentits

identifiablecharacter.

Conversely,bychangingthevolumecontour–for

instance,applyingastring‐likeAmpEGcurvetoan

organmultisample–youcanproduceinterestingand

unusualsounds.

Drive

TheDrivecircuitaddssaturationandoverdrivetothe

sound,foreverythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrastic

distortion.Unlikeanoverdriveeffect,Driveprocesses

eachvoiceindividually,sothetimbrestaysthesame

regardlessofhowmanyvoicesarebeingplayed.

Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work

togethertocreatetheoveralleffect.

Drivecontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthe

timbre.Lowsettingswillproducemildsaturation,and

highersettingscreatemoreobviousdistortion.

Often,it’susefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwith

theDrive.

Note: evenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,the

Drivecircuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisa

completelypristinesound,usetheBypasscontrol

instead.

LowBoostisaspeciallow‐frequencyEQwhich

controlsthebodycharacterofthesound.Thespecific

EQfrequenciesaffectedwillchangewiththeDrive

setting.

Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso

intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter.

Making controller

assignments

Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2

SW1andSW2arethetwobuttonsabovethejoystick.

Theseon/offbuttonscanperformanumberofdifferent

functions,suchasmodulatingsoundsoreffects,or

lockingthemodulationvaluesofthejoystick.

Also,eachonemayworkeitherasatoggle,orasa

momentaryswitch.InTogglemode,eachpress

alternatesbetweenonandoff;inMomentarymode,

theswitchonlychangesforaslongasyouholdit

down.

EachProgram,Combination,andSongstoresitsown

settingsforwhatthebuttonswilldo,andwhethereach

buttonisonoroff(basedontheircurrentstateswhen

thedataissaved).

YoucansetupPanelSwitchAssignontheControllers

Setuppage.

Note: Theon/offstatusoftheSW1andSW2buttons

willbepreservedwhenyouwritetheprogramor

combination.

Note: YoucanuseSW1/2asalternatemodulationor

effectdynamicmodulationsourcestocontrolprogram

parametersoreffectparameters.

Todoso,youwillnormallyassignSW1Mod.(CC#80)

andSW2Mod.(CC#81).

ForanexampleofassigningtheSW1buttonasan

effectdynamicmodulationsourceforaprogram,and

usingittocontrolaneffect,seepage 82.

Foracompletelistofthepossibleassignments,see

page 348oftheParameterGuide.

Note: Ifyouwanttokeepthesesettingsafterthepower

isturnedoff,youmustsavethem(seepage 116).

Piano

Organ

Strings

Mode Page

Programs Prog P1: Basic/Controllers

Combinations Combi P1: Controllers

Songs Seq P1: Controllers

Playing and editing Programs

42

Setting the functions of Realtime

Controls USER knobs 1–4

WhentheRealtimecontrolsissettoUSER,thefour

knobsontherightfunctionasRealtimeknobs1–4.

Thesecanperformanumberofdifferentfunctions,

suchasmodulatingsoundsoreffects,adjustingeffects

sendlevels,andsoon.

EachProgram,Combination,andSongstoresitsown

settingsforwhattheknobswilldo.

WhenusingtheslidersforAMSorDmod,it’s

importanttounderstandthatcreatinganassignmentis

atwo‐stepprocess.First,youassigntheknobtosenda

MIDIcontroller,suchasKnobMod.1(CC#17).Second,

youassignthatMIDIcontrollertomodulateoneor

moreProgramoreffectsparameters.

Forthefirstpartoftheabove,usethemode’s

ControllersSetuppage(See“Settingthefunctionsof

SW1andSW2,”above).

Thedefaultassignmentsforknobs1–4areKnobMod.1

(CC#17),KnobMod.2(CC#19),KnobMod.3(CC#20),

andKnobMod.4(CC#21),respectively.

Here’sanexampleofhowtosetupknob1tocontrola

Program’sfilterandampEGattacktime:

1. PresstheMODEPROGbuttontoenterProgram

mode.

2. AccesstheP1:Basic/Controllers–Controllers

Setuppage.

PressthePAGEbuttontoaccessPageSelect,and

choose“P1Basic/Controllers.”PresstheControllers

tab.

3. PresstheRealtimeControlsKnobAssign“Knob

1–B”popupbutton,andchooseF/AAttack

(CC#73).

4. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNREALTIME

CONTROLbuttontoselectUSER.(TheLED

USERwilllightup.)

5. Useknob1tocontroltheEGattackforthefilter

andamp.

Fordetails,pleaseseepage 348oftheParameter

Guide.

Note: Ifyouwishtokeepthesesettingsafterthepower

isturnedoff,youmustsavetheProgram,

Combination,orSong(seepage 116).

Arpeggiator settings

Accordingtothenotedatareceivedfromthekeyboard

orfromtheMIDIINconnector,thearpeggiatorwill

automaticallygenerateawiderangeofphrasesor

patternsincludingarpeggios,guitarorkeyboard

backingriffs,bassphrases,ordrumpatterns.Whenthe

realtimecontrolsARPisselected,youcanusethe

knobstovarythedurationanddynamicsofthe

arpeggiatednotes.

Formoreaboutthearpeggiator,pleaseseepage 85.

Drum Track settings

YoucanusetheKROME’srichvarietyofdrum

patternstoaccompanyyouwithhigh‐qualitydrum

programswhileyouperformusingaprogram.

PlayingalongwithDrumTrackpatternsisoftena

usefulwaytocomeupwithnewphrases.

FormoreabouttheDrumTrackfunction,pleasesee

page 97.

Effects

Fordetails,pleasesee“UsingEffects”onpage 77.

Automatically importing a

Program into Sequence mode

YoucanusetheAutoSongSetupfeature,which

automaticallycopiesthesettingsoftheprogramor

combinationandputstheKROMEinrecord‐standby

modewhenyousimplypresstheREC(●)button.

ThenyoucanpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP

()buttontobeginrecording.

Fordetails,pleasesee“A u t o SongSetupfunction”on

page 59.

43

Playing and editing Combinations

About the KROME’s combinations

Combinationsletyousplitandlayerupto16Programs

atonce.

ACombinationismadeupof16Timbres(Notethat

youdon’thavetouseall16Timbres).EachTimbreis

assignedaProgram,alongwithparametersforkey

rangeandvelocityzones,mixersettings,MIDIchannel

andcontrollerfiltering,andsoon.

AswithPrograms,eachCombinationhasfiveinsert

effects,twomastereffects,andonetotaleffectfor

shapingandtransformingthesoundsoftheindividual

Timbres.

Thissectionofthemanualtakesaquicklookatplaying

Combinations,includingatourofthefront‐panel

controllersandbasiceditingtechniques.

Playing combinations

Selecting Combinations

Thereareseveraldifferentwaystoselect

Combinations.Eachoneisconvenientinadifferent

way:

•Using“CombinationSelect”andtheVALUE

controllers:

•UsingtheBank/CombinationSelectmenu:

•UsingtheCategory/ProgramSelectmenu:

•Find

•Usingafootswitch:page 19

•SendingMIDIprogramchangemessagestoselect

Programsremotely:

Fordetails,pleaseseebelow.

Selecting a program using

“Combination Select” and the VALUE

controllers

1. PresstheCOMBIbutton.(TheLEDwilllightup.)

(Refertotheillustrationbelowforthebuttons.)

Alternatively,youcanusethemodebutton(see

“Selectingmodes”onpage 9).

TheKROMEwillenterCombinationmode.

2. AccesstheCombiP0:Play–ProgramT01–08page.

Thisisshowninthetoplineofthedisplay.

Ifadifferentpageisshown,presstheEXITbutton

severaltimestomovetotheCombiP0:Play–Program

T01–08page.

3. Makesurethat“CombinationSelect”isselected.

Ifitisnot,press“CombinationSelect”inthedisplayto

highlightit.

4. Selectthecombinationyouwanttoplay.

Youcanusethefollowingmethodstoselectacombination.

4: INC/DEC buttons

3: Combination Select

2: COMBI P0: Play

4: VALUE dial

1: COMBI button

4: Numeric keypads

ENTER button

5: BANK SELECT

A–F buttons

1: Mode name

(button)

Mode button Mode, page number

and name

Tab name

Combination Select

(Combination number and name) Category Select popup button

(Category number and name)

Bank

number

Combination Select popup button

Playing and editing Combinations

44

•UsetheINCorDECbuttons.

•TurntheVALUEdial.

•Usenumerickeys0–9toenterthecombination

number,andpresstheENTERbutton.

5. PressaCOMBIBANKA–Dbuttontoswitch

banks.

WhenyouselectadifferentBank,thebutton’sLEDwill

lightup,andtheselectedbankwillappearontheleft

sideofthedisplay.

Forexample,toselectbankB,presstheCOMBIBANK

Bbutton.TheBbuttonwilllightup,andthename

BankBwillappearintheleftsideofthedisplay.

Auditioning the sound

PlaytheKROME’skeyboardtohearthecombination

you’veselected.

Keyzonepreviewallowsyoutocheckthetimbre’s

layerandsplitsettings,aswellashowthearpeggiator

isused.

•Thekeyboardareaindicatesthelast(single)note‐

onthatwasreceivedontheglobalMIDIchannel.

•Thekeyzoneareashowsthetimbresthatwill

soundatthekeyposition,differentiatedbyseveral

colorsaccordingtothesettingsofeachtimbre.

Green:TimbresthataresoundedontheglobalMIDI

channel,suchasbythekeyboard.

Yellow:Timbresthatwillsoundonlywhenthe

arpeggiatorison(seepage 90).

Orange:Timbresthatwillsoundonlywhenthedrum

trackison.

Blue:Timbreswhosetimbrechannelissetto

somethingotherthantheglobalchannel.Thesewill

notbesoundedbytheKROME’skeyboard,

arpeggiator,ordrumtrack,butwillsoundinresponse

toMIDInote‐onmessagesfromanexternaldevice.

Purple:Thesetimbresareusedtoplayanexternal

soundmodule.TheydonotsoundontheKROME.

None:Timbreswhosetimbrestatusisoff.Thesewill

notsound.

Thevelocitymetershowsthenote‐onvelocityvalue.

•Note‐onvelocitiesfromthekeyboard,MIDIIN,

arpeggiator,anddrumtrackareshownforeach

timbre/channel.(Ifmultiplenote‐oneventsoccur

simultaneously,thehighestvelocityvaluewillbe

shown.)

•Sincethisshowsthenote‐onvelocityvalues,itis

notaffectedbythesettingoftheVolumeslidernor

bychangesintheaudiosignallevel.Also,themeter

willrespondevenifkeyzonesettingsorvelocity

zonesettingsaresuchthatthenoteisnotsounded.

TimbreswhosePlay/MuteandSolosettingsallows

themtoplayareshowninadarkcolor,andtimbres

thataremutedareshowninalightcolor.

Overview: Combination Banks

Withthefactorysettings,theKROMEcontains384

preloadedcombinationsthatareGM2compatible.In

additiontothese,thereare128combinationstostore

soundsthatyoucreate,orstoreoptionalsound

libraries.

Combinationsareorganizedintofourbanksasshown

inthefollowingtable.

Combinationbankcontents

Selecting by Bank/Combination

Select menu

YoucanselectCombinationsfromalistorganizedby

Combinationbank.

•PresstheCombinationSelectpopupbuttonto

accessthemenuandmakeyourselection.

Theselectionmethodisthesameasin“Selectingby

Bank/ProgramSelectmenu”onpage 22;Refertothat

pagefordetails.

Bank/CombinationSelectmenu

Bank Combi. No. Explanation

A, B, C 000...127 Factory Combinations

D 000...127 Initialized Combinations

Velocity meter

Playing combinations Using controllers to modify the sound

45

Selecting by Category/Combination

Select menu

YoucanselectCombinationsarrangedbycategory,

suchaskeyboard,organ,bass,anddrums.

Whenshippedfromthefactory,thepreloaded

Combinationsareorganizedinto16categories,each

withseveralsub‐categories.

•PresstheCategorySelectpopupbuttontoaccess

themenuandmakeyourselection.

Theselectionmethodisthesameasin“Selectingby

Category/ProgramSelectmenu”onpage 23;referto

thatpagefordetails.

Category/CombinationSelectmenu

Find

Youcansearchforacombinationbyaportionofits

name.

Theprocedureisthesameasexplainedin“Find”on

page 23.Pleaseseethatexplanationfordetails.

Using controllers to modify

the sound

TheKROMEprovidesavarietyofcontrollersthatyou

canusetovarythesound,suchasthejoystick,the

SW1,SW2buttons,andthecontrolsurfaceknobs.It

alsoprovideschordtriggerbuttons.

Fordetails,pleaseseethecorrespondingexplanation

forPrograms:“UsingControllers”onpage 24.

Performing with the

arpeggiator or drum track

Basedonnotedataitreceivesfromthekeyboardor

fromtheMIDIINconnector,thearpeggiatorcan

generateawiderangeofphrasesandpatterns

includingarpeggios,guitarorkeyboardbackingriffs,

bassphrases,ordrumpatterns.Whentherealtime

controlsARPisselected,youcanusetheknobstovary

thedurationanddynamicsofthearpeggiatednotes.

Formoreaboutthearpeggiator,pleaseseepage 85.

TheDrumTrackfunctionusesarichvarietyofdrum

patternstoplaytheKROME’shigh‐qualitydrum

programs.Youcanperformalongwiththedrum

patterns,orsynchronizeDrumTrackpatternswiththe

phrasesgeneratedbyarpeggiator.

FormoreabouttheDrumTrackfunction,pleasesee

page 97.

Playing and editing Combinations

46

Easy Combination editing

YoucaneditanyoftheCombinationsshippedwith

KROME.Youcancreateyourowncombinationsby

editingapreloadedcombination,orbystartingfrom

aninitializedcombination.

Acombinationhassixteentimbres;youcanassigna

programtoeachtimbreandspecifyitsvolumeand

pan,thekeyrangeinwhichtheprogramwillsound,

andhowitssoundwillberoutedtotheeffects.Youcan

createsimplesetupssuchasdetunedsounds,split,or

layers,orhighlycomplexorchestra‐likesetups.

Evenwithoutmovingtothevariouspagesfordetailed

editing,youcanmakedramaticchangesjustfrom

withintheCombiP0:Playpage.Youcanalsoedit

usingthecontrolsurface’sknobsonthefrontpanel.

Changing the program of each

timbre

ChangingtheProgramsassignedtotimbres(1–16)isa

quickwaytodramaticallyalterthesoundofthe

Combination.

1. AccesstheCombiP0:Play–ProgramT01–08/T09–

16page.

Inthispageyoucanviewtheprogramassignedtoeach

timbre1–16,andtheplay/muteandsolostatusofeach.

2. Useanyofthefollowingmethodstoselecta

Programforeachtimbre.

•ChooseProgramSelect,usenumerickeys0–9to

inputtheprogramnumber,andpresstheENTER

button.

•ChooseProgramSelectandturntheVALUEdialor

usetheINC/DECbuttons.

•IftheProgramSelectparameterisselected,the

PROGBANKA–Fbuttonswillswitchprogram

banks.(IfTimbreProgramSelectisselected,the

BANKbuttonLEDoftheprogrambankselectedfor

thattimbrewilllightup.)

•FromtheBank/ProgramSelectmenuyoucanview

andselectprogramsbybank.

•FromtheCategory/ProgramSelectmenuyoucan

viewandselectprogramsbycategory.

•YoucantransmitMIDIprogramchangesfroma

connectedexternalMIDIdevice.(Seepage 359of

theParameterGuide)

Note: ToselectthetimbreprogramviaMIDIprogram

changethetimbre’sstatusmustbesetto“INT.”

Adjusting the mix

Adjusting the volume of each timbre

1. AccesstheCombiP0:Play–MixerT01–08page.

Thispageshowsthevolume,pan,andProgram

assignmentsforall8Timbres.

2. Inthedisplay,pressthetimbre1volumeslider

andslideitupordowntoadjustthevolume.

Youcanalsohighlightthenumericalareaoftheslider

andusetheVALUEdialorthenumerickeystoadjust

thevalue.

IfyoucheckHoldBalance,movinganyoneofthe

volumesliders(volumevalues)willcausethevolume

oftheothertimbrestochangeaswell,maintainingthe

relativevolumebalancebetweentimbres1–16.Thisisa

convenientwaytoadjusttheoverallvolume.

Adjusting the panning of each timbre

1. AccesstheCombiP0:Play–MixerT01–08page.

2. Pressthetimbre1panknob,andslideitleft/right

toadjustthepanning.

Youcanalsohighlightthenumericalareaoftheknob

andusetheVALUEdialorthenumerickeystoadjust

thevalue.

Timbrepaninteractswiththepanstoredinthe

Program.AsettingofC064reproducestheProgram’s

oscillatorpansettings.AdjustingtheTimbrePanwill

movethesoundtoleftorrightwhilepreservingthe

panrelationshipbetweentheoscillators.Asettingof

L001isfarleft,andR127isfarright.

Selected

Timbre Info

Timbre No.

Category/Timbre

Program Select

Play/Mute

Solo On/O

Bank/Timbre

Program Select

Program Select

Detailed Editing with Combinations Simple editing using the knobs

47

Simple editing using the

knobs

YoucanusetheControlSurfacetoperformavarietyof

edits.

Forexample,youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjust

theFiltercutofforresonance.Youcanalsouseitto

varythedepthofaneffect,ortochangethewayin

whichthearpeggiatorgeneratesaphrase.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Realtimecontrolknobs”on

page 25.

Saving a Combination you’ve

edited

Afteryou’veeditedacombination,youmustsaveitif

youwanttokeepthechangesyou’vemade.Ifyoure‐

selectthecombinationorturnoffthepowerbefore

saving,youreditswillbelost.

1. PresstheWRITEbutton.

TheWriteCombinationdialogboxwillappear.Ifyou

wanttochangethewritingdestinationorthename,

maketheappropriatechanges(seepage 117).

2. PresstheWRITEbuttononceagaintosave(write)

thedata.

Fordetails,pleasesee“WritingaProgramor

Combination”onpage 115.

YoucanalsosavecombinationsonanSDcardasPCG

files.

Fordetails,pleasesee“SavingtoSDcard(Media–

Save)”onpage 118.

Detailed Editing with Combinations

Youcaneditthepreloadedcombinations(BanksA–C)

thattheKROMEisshippedwith,orstartwithan

initializedCombinationtocreateyourownoriginal

sounds.

YoucanusethefactoryProgramstocreatenew

Combinations,oruseyourowncustomPrograms.

Note: Ifyou’reintheprocessofeditingaProgramin

Programmode,andyouusethatProgramina

Combination,you’llheartheeditedversionin

Combinationmodeaswell.

About the edit pages

IntheCombiP0:Playpageyoucanselectandplay

combinations.Hereyoucanalsousethecontrol

surface’sknobsandthetone‐adjustfunctionforquick

editing,ortoeditthesettingsofthearpeggiatoror

drumtrack.Intheotherpagesyoucaneditthesound

ingreaterdetail.

Fordetailsoneachmodeandhowtoaccesseachpage,

pleasesee“Basicoperations”onpage 9.

Parameters

Parameters

Parameters

Parameters

Timbre2

Timbre3

Timbre16

Timbre4

Timbre1 Parameters

Program

Program

Program

Program

Program

AUDIO OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Master

Eects

1, 2: P9

Total

Eects:

P9

Insert

Eects

1…5: P8

Arpeggio: P7–1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Timbre

Insert Eects

Master Eects

FX Control Bus

Routing: P8-1, 2

DrumTrack: P7–7 Tone Adjust: P0–7

3Band EQ

3Band EQ

3Band EQ

3Band EQ

3Band EQ

Controllers: P1–1

Combinationstructureandcorrespondingpages

P1–1, P2–2, etc. indicate the on-screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KROME.

Playing and editing Combinations

48

A suggested approach for

editing

First,selectaProgramforeachTimbre,ontheP0:

Play–ProgramT01–08orT09–16page.(Notethatyou

don’thavetouseall16Timbres)

Next,createanydesiredkeyboardorvelocitysplits,

layers,orcrossfadesbetweenthedifferentTimbres.

YoucandothisontheP4:Zone/Delay–Keyboard

Zonespage.

Afterthis,adjustthevolumesoftheTimbres(backon

theProgramSelect/Mixertab),andsetupanyother

Timbreparametersasdesired.

Toaddfinishingtouchestothesound,setuptheInsert,

Master,andTotalEffectasdesired(ontheP8:Routing/

IFXandP9:MFX/TFX/LFOpages,respectively.)These

effectscanbedifferentfromthoseassociatedwiththe

individualProgramsinProgrammode,ifdesired.

Inaddition,youcanmakearpeggiatoranddrumtrack

settings(ontheP7:ART/DTpage)andcontroller

settings(ontheP1:Controllerspage)tocreatethe

finishedCombination.

Soloing timbres

YoucanusetheControlSurface’sSolofunctiontohear

thesoundofeachtimbrebyitself.

Fordetails,pleasesee“SoloOn/Off”onpage 72ofthe

ParameterGuide.

Restoring edited settings

Using COMPARE

Whenyou’reintheprocessofeditingasound,

pressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillrecallthesaved

versionofthesound,asitwasbeforeyoustarted

editing.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Comparefunction”onpage 11.

Layers, Splits, and Velocity

Switches

WithinaCombination,youcanusenoterangeand

velocityleveltodefinethe“zone”inwhichaspecific

timbrewillplay.

TheProgramsassignedtoeachTimbrecanbeplayed

inthreeways:aspartofalayer,asplit,oravelocity

switch.ACombinationcanbesettouseanyoneof

thesemethodsortousetwoormoreofthesemethods

simultaneously.

Layer

LayerscausetwoormoreProgramstoplay

simultaneouslywhenanoteisplayed.

Split

SplitscausedifferentProgramstorespondondifferent

areasofthekeyboard.

Velocity Switch

VelocitySwitchescausedifferentProgramstorespond

dependingonthevelocity(howhardyouplaythe

notes).

OntheKROME,youcanuseadifferentProgramfor

eachofuptosixteenTimbres,andcombinetwoor

moreoftheabovemethodstocreateevenmore

complexsetups.

Asanadditionalpossibility,youcansettheslopefora

keyzoneorvelocityzonesothatthevolume

diminishesgradually.Thisletsyouchangeasplitintoa

keyboardcrossfade,oravelocityswitchintoavelocity

crossfade.

Program B

Program A

Layer:

Two or more programs sound

simultaneously.

Program B

Program A

Split:

Dierent programs will sound in

dierent areas of the keyboard.

Program A

Program B Keyboard playing

dynamics

Strong

Soft

Velocity Switch:

Keyboard playing dynamics

(velocity) switches between

dierent programs.

Program C

Program D

Program B

Program A

Keyboard playing

dynamics

Strong

Soft

Example:

B and C/D are split. In the lower

keyboard range, A and B are

layered. In the higher keyboard

range, C and D are switched by

velocity and layered with A.

Program A Program B Keyboard X-Fade (keyboard

crossfade):

As you play from low notes to

high notes, the volume of A

will fade out, and the volume

of B will fade in.

Detailed Editing with Combinations Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches

49

Creating Key Splits and Layers

Splits and Layers

Let’screateaCombinationthatcombinesbothsplits

andlayers,likethediagrambelow:

1. AccesstheCombiP0:Play–ProgramT01–08page.

2. SelectapianosoundforTimbre1,abrasssound

forTimbre2,andastringssoundforTimbre3.

3. AccesstheP3:TimbreParameters–MIDIT01–08

page.

4. ForTimbres1–3,setStatustoINTandMIDI

ChanneltoGch(theGlobalChannel).

5. AccesstheP4:Zone/Delay–KeyZT01–08page.

6. SetTimbre1’sTopKeytoG9,anditsBottomKey

toC4.

Youcanalsoenteranotevaluebyselectingthe

parameterandthenplayingthedesirednoteonthe

keyboardwhileholdingdowntheENTERbutton.

7. SetTimbres2and3toaTopKeyofB3,anda

BottomKeyofC–1.

Key Zone Slope

Inadditionto“hard”splits,wherethesoundchanges

abruptly,youcanusetheSlopeparametersto

graduallyfadeasoundinoroutoverarangeofkeys.

Intheexampleabove,youcouldsettheBottomKeyof

timbre1toG3,andsettheTopKeyoftimbre2toG4,

sothatthesetwotimbresoverlap.

Next,ifyousettheBottomSlopeoftimbre1to12,and

settheTopSlopeoftimbre2to12,thesoundwill

changegraduallyinsteadofchangingsuddenly.

Creating Velocity Switches

Next,let’screateasimplevelocityswitched

Combination,likethediagrambelow:

1. AccesstheCombiP0:Play–ProgramT01–08page.

2. SelectabrasssoundforTimbre1,andastrings

soundforTimbre2.

3. AccesstheP3:TimbreParameters–MIDIT01–08

page.

4. ForTimbres1and2,setStatustoINTandMIDI

ChanneltoGch(theGlobalChannel).

5. AccesstheP4:Zone/Delay–VelZT01–08page.

6. SetTimbre1’sTopVelocityto127,anditsBottom

Velocityto64.

Youcanalsoenteravelocityvaluebyselectingthe

parameterandthenplayinganotewiththedesired

velocityonthekeyboardwhileholdingdownthe

ENTERbutton.

7. SetTimbre2toaTopVelocityof63,andaBottom

Velocityof1.

Velocity Zone Slope

SimilartoKeyZoneSlopes,asdescribedabove,these

letyoufadeinandfadeoutsoundsgraduallyovera

velocityrange,insteadofasimplehardswitch.

Inthecaseoftheexampleabove,youcouldsetthe

velocityzonesofthetwoTimbressothattheypartially

overlap.Then,settheTopSlopeandBottomSlopeso

thatthesoundchangesgradually,insteadofchanging

suddenlybetweenvelocityvaluesof63and64.

C–1 C4 G9B3

PianoTimbre 1

Brass

Timbre 2

Strings

Timbre 3

127

64

63

1

Strings

Velocity

switch

Timbre 1

Timbre 2

Brass

Playing and editing Combinations

50

MIDI settings

Timbre Parameters MIDI page

Status

ThiscontrolsthestatusofMIDIandtheinternaltone

generatorforeachTimbre.Normally,ifyou’replaying

aninternalProgram,thisshouldbesettoINT.

IfthestatusissettoOff,EXT,orEX2,thatTimbre’s

internalsoundswillnotbeplayed.Offsimplydisables

theTimbreentirely.TheEXTandEX2settingsallow

theTimbretocontrolanexternalMIDIdevice.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Status”onpage 81ofthe

ParameterGuide.

Bank Select (when status=EX2)

WhentheStatusissettoEX2,theseparametersallow

youtotransmitMIDIBankSelectmessagestoexternal

MIDIdevices.

MIDI Channel

TimbresthatyouwishtoplayfromtheKROME’s

keyboardmustbesettotheglobalMIDIchannel.Your

playingonthekeyboardistransmittedontheglobal

MIDIchannel,andwilltriggeranytimbrethatmatches

thischannel.NormallyyouwillsetthistoGch.When

thisissettoGch,theMIDIchannelofthetimbrewill

alwaysmatchtheglobalMIDIchannel,evenifyou

changetheglobalMIDIchannel.

OnsomepreloadedCombinations,Timbresused

bythearpeggiatormayhavetheirMIDIChannels

settosomethingotherthanGch.Thesewillbe

timbresthatplayonlywhenthearpeggiatorison,

whichisaveryusefultechniqueforcreating

“A p r e g g iatorbased”Combinations.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Arpeggiatorsettingsin

CombinationandSequencermodes”onpage 89.

Inparticular,notetherelationshipsbetween

arpeggiatorA/BassignmentsandMIDIChannel.

MIDI filter settings

ForeachMIDIFilteritem,youcanspecifywhetheror

notthecorrespondingMIDImessagewillbe

transmittedandreceived.Thecheckeditemswillbe

transmittedandreceived.

TheMIDIfiltersdon’tturnthefunctionsthemselveson

oroff.Instead,thefilterjustcontrolswhetherornot

thatMIDImessagewillbetransmittedandreceived.

Forexample,ifportamentoison,portamentowillbe

appliedtotheinternalKROMEsoundevenifEnable

PortamentoSWisunchecked.

Asanotherexample,let’ssaythatyou’veselecteda

bassProgramforTimbre1,andapianoProgramfor

Timbre2,withthegoalofcreatingabass/pianosplit.

Youcouldchoosethefollowingsettingssothat

pressingthedamperpedalaffectsonlyTimbre2’s

pianosound:

1. AccesstheP5–1:MIDIFilter<1>T01–08page.

2. Un‐checktheEnableDamperboxforTimbre1.

3. ChecktheEnableDamperboxforTimbre2.

Detailed Editing with Combinations Altering Programs to fit within a Combination

51

Altering Programs to fit

within a Combination

YoucanmakevariouschangestoProgramswithinthe

contextofaparticularCombinationtomakethemfit

betterwithotherPrograms,ortocreateparticular

soniceffects.Thesechangesdonotaffecttheoriginal

Programs,orhowthoseProgramssoundinother

Combinations(seepage 81oftheParameterGuide).

Timbre Parameters: OSC

Force OSC Mode

Ifyouwishtoforceapolyphonicprogramtosound

monophonically,setthiseithertoMN(Mono)orLGT

(Legato).Conversely,setthistoPolyifyouwishto

forceamonophonicprogramtoplaypolyphonically.

NormallythisshouldbesettoPRG,sothatthesound

willplayassetbytheoriginalProgram.

Fordetails,pleasesee“ForceOSCMode”onpage 82of

theParameterGuide.

OSC Select

IfthetimbreisusingaProgramwheretheOscillator

ModeisDoubleorDoubleDrums,andyouwantonly

OSC1orOSC2(notboth)tosound,setthistoOSC1

(onlyOSC1willsound)orOSC2(onlyOSC2will

sound).

Normally,thisshouldbesettoBTH(Both).

Portamento

IftheProgramusesportamento,butyou’dliketo

disablethisforthecurrentCombination,setthis

parametertoOff.

Conversely,ifyouwanttoforcetheportamentotobe

on,orjusttochangetheportamentotime,setthistoa

valueof001–127.Theportamentowillchangetouse

thenewlyspecifiedtime.

Normally,thisshouldbesettoPRG.

Timbre Parameters: Pitch

Transpose, Detune (BPM Adjust)

Theseparametersadjustthepitchofthetimbre.

•Inalayer‐typecombination,youcansettwoor

moretimbrestothesameprogram,andcreatea

richersoundbyusingTransposetoshifttheirpitch

apartbyanoctaveorbyusingDetunetocreatea

slightdifferenceinpitchbetweenthetwo.

•Insplit‐typecombinations,youcanuseTranspose

toshiftthepitch(insemitoneunits)ofthe

programsspecifiedforeachkeyzone.

Note: Ifyouwishtochangetheplaybackpitchofa

drumprogram,useDetune.Ifyouchangethe

Transposesetting,therelationshipbetweenthenotes

anddrumsoundswillchange.

Use Program’s Scale, Scale

Thisspecifiesthescaleforeachtimbre.

IfyoucheckUseProgram’sScale,thescalespecified

bytheprogramwillbeused.Timbreswherethis

parameterisnotcheckedwillusetheScalesetting.

Playing and editing Combinations

52

Delay

YoucansetsomeTimbressothattheydon’tsound

immediatelyatnote‐on.Thiscancreatecooleffects,

andmoredramaticlayers.

YoucanspecifythedelayforeachTimbreeitherin

milliseconds(ms),orinrhythmicvalueswhichsyncto

thesystemtempo.

IfyousettheDelaytoKeyOff,theTimbrewillsound

whenthenoteisreleased.

Editing Programs with Tone Adjust

UsingToneAdjust,youcancreatedetailededitsto

ProgramswithinthecontextoftheCombination.

TheseeditswillnotaffecttheoriginalProgram,orany

otherCombinationswhichusetheProgram.Toedita

ProgramwithToneAdjust:

SelectatimbreintheTimbrefieldoftheP0:Play–Tone

Adjustpage.Thenselecttheparameterthatyouwant

toadjust,andusetheVALUEcontrollerstoeditthe

sound.

Arpeggiator settings

Accordingtothenotedatareceivedfromthekeyboard

orfromtheMIDIINconnector,thearpeggiatorwill

automaticallygenerateawiderangeofphrasesor

patternsincludingarpeggios,guitarorkeyboard

backingriffs,bassphrases,ordrumpatterns.Ifthe

SELECTbuttonissettoARP,youcanusetheknobsto

varythedurationanddynamicsofthearpeggiated

notes.

Formoreaboutthearpeggiator,pleaseseepage 85.

Drum Track settings

Whileyouperformusingacombination,youcanuse

theKROME’srichvarietyofdrumpatternstoplay

high‐qualitydrumprograms.

PlayingalongwithDrumTrackpatternsisoftena

usefulwaytocomeupwithnewphrases.

FormoreabouttheDrumTrackfunction,pleasesee

page 97.

Effects

Fordetails,pleasesee“UsingEffects”onpage 77.

Automatically importing a

Combination

into Sequencer mode

TheAutoSongSetupfeatureautomaticallyappliesthe

settingsofthecurrentCombinationtoasong.

Fordetails,pleasesee“A u t o SongSetupfunction”on

page 59.

53

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Overview

About the KROME’s Sequencer

ThesequencerbringstogethertheKROME’snumerous

functionssuchasitsarpeggiator,RPPR,high‐

performanceeffects,andcontrollers,allowingyouto

takeadvantageoftheseinawiderangeofsituations.

Thissequencerisa16‐trackMIDIsequencerthatcan

storeupto128songsand210,000MIDIevents.Youcan

useittorecordandplaybacknotesfortheinternal

soundgeneratoraswellasforexternalMIDIsound

modules.

Whenyouturnoffthepower,thesettingscreated

inSequencermode,thesongdata,anyuser

patterndata,andCueListthatyourecordedwill

notbebackedup.Ifyouwishtokeepthisdata,

youmustsaveitonanSDcardbeforeturningoff

thepower,orperformaMIDIdatadumptosave

thedataonanexternaldatafileretc.

Ifyouwishtowritetheprograms,track

parameters,effects,andarpeggiatorsettingsetc.

selectedforasongasatemplatesong,usethe

menucommandSaveTemplateSong.

Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,KROME

willnotcontainanysongdata,soifyouwishto

playasongonthesequencer,youmustfirstload

datafromSDcard,orreceiveaMIDIdatadump

fromaMIDIfiler.Fordetails,pleaseseepage 118,

andpage 219oftheParameterGuide.

Sequencer mode structure

Sequencermodeisstructuredasfollows.

Songs

Asongconsistsoftracks1–16,amastertrack,song

parameterssuchasthesongname,arpeggiator,Drum

Trackfunction,effectandRPPRparameters,and100

userpatterns.

Amaximumof128suchsongscanbecreatedon

KROME.

Tracks1–16consistofsetupparameters(suchaseach

track’sprogram,pan,andvolume)locatedatthestart

ofthesong,andthemusicaldataitself.Themaster

trackconsistsoftempoandtimesignaturedata(see

“Setupparameters&Musicaldata”onpage 106ofthe

ParameterGuide).

Song recording and editing

Songrecordingisperformedontracks.

Youcanrecordtracksineitheroftwoways;realtime

recordingorsteprecording.Forrealtimerecording

youcanchooseoneofsixrecordingmodes.

YoucanedittracksbyusingEventEditoperationsto

modifytherecordeddataorinsertnewdata,andby

usingTrackEditfunctionssuchasCreateControlData,

whichgeneratesandinsertspitchbend,aftertouch,or

controlchangedata.

Patterns

Therearetwotypesofpatterns:presetpatternsand

userpatterns.

Presetpatterns:Patternssuitablefordrumtracksare

presetininternalmemory,andcanbeselectedforany

song.

Userpatterns:Eachsongcanhaveupto100patterns.

Whenusingapatterninadifferentsong,usethe

UtilitymenucommandsCopyPatternorCopyFrom

Songetc.tocopythepattern.Thepatternlengthcanbe

specifiedinunitsofameasure.

Eachpatternconsistsofmusicaldataforonetrack.Itis

notpossibletocreatepatternsthatcontainmultiple

tracks.

Youcanusethesepatternsbyplacingtheminatrack

(PuttoTrackmenucommand)orbycopyingthem

(CopytoTrackmenucommand).Youcanalsouse

patternswiththeRPPRfunctionofasong(see

page 71).

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

54

Recording and editing a pattern

Youcanrecordapatternineitheroftwoways:realtime

recordingorsteprecording.However,unlikerealtime‐

recordingtoatrack,youcanselectonlyonerecording

type(looprecording)whenrealtime‐recordingtoa

pattern.

Youcaneditthepatterntocorrectmistakesinthe

recordeddata,oruseeventeditingtoinsertnewdata.

YoucanusetheGetFromTrackmenucommandto

obtainadesiredregionofperformancedatafroma

trackanduseitaspatterndata.Conversely,youcan

usethePuttoTrackorCopytoTrackmenu

commandstoplaceorcopyapattern’sperformance

dataintoatrack.

How Sequencer patterns are related to Drum

Track patterns

ThepatternsoftheDrumTrackfunctionyouusewith

aProgramorCombinationarerelatedtoSequencer

modepatternsasfollows.

Presetpatternsareacommonlibrarythatcanalsobe

usedbytheDrumTrackfunction.

UserpatternscannotbedirectlyusedbytheDrum

Trackfunction,buttheycanbeconvertedtouserDrum

TrackpatternsandusedwithaProgramor

Combination.Ifyouconvertauserpattern,itwillbe

storedininternalmemory,andthisdatawillnot

disappearevenwhenyouturnoffthepower.

Cue List

Thecuelistallowsyoutoplaybackmultiplesongsin

succession.TheKROMEletsyoucreatetwentycue

lists.Eachcuelistletsyouconnectupto99songsand

specifythenumberoftimesthateachsongwillrepeat.

ThemenucommandConverttoSongletsyouconvert

thesongsinacuelistintoasinglesong.

Forexampleyoucanuseacuelisttocreatethe

backing,convertthecuelisttoasong,andthenadd

solophrasesonunusedtracks.

Transport control

Thesecontrolsletyouplayback,record,fast‐forward,

orrewindthesequencer.

Front panel buttons

YoucanusethefrontpanelSEQUENCERbuttonsto

controlrecordingandplaybackonthesequencer.

PAUSE ( ) button

Thisbuttonpausestheplaybackofthesong.When

paused,thebutton’sLEDwilllightup.PressPAUSE

()onceagaintoresumeplayback,andtheLEDwill

turnoff.

REW ( ) button

WhentheSongisplayingorpaused,thisbuttonwill

rewindthesong.Whenyoupressandholdthisbutton,

itsLEDwilllightup,andtheplaybackwillrewind.

(Rewindisdisabledduringrecording,andwhilethe

Songisstopped.)

Note: YoucanusetheFF/REWSpeedmenucommand

tospecifythefast‐forwardandrewindspeed.

FF ( ) button

WhentheSongisplayingorpaused,thisbuttonwill

fast‐forwardthesong.Whenyoupressandholdthis

button,thebuttonwilllightup,andtheplaybackwill

fast‐forward.(Fast‐forwardisdisabledduring

recording,andwhiletheSongisstopped.)

LOCATE ( ) button

BypressingtheLOCATE()buttonyoucanmoveto

aspecifiedlocatepoint.Bydefault,you’llmoveto

001:01.000.

Tochangethelocatepointthat’sassignedtothe

LOCATE()button,usethemenucommandSet

Location.Alternatively,youcansetthelocatepoint

duringplaybackbyholdingdowntheENTERbutton

andpressingtheLOCATE()button.

START/STOP ( ) button

Thisstartsorstopsrecordingandplaybackin

Sequencermode.

REC ( ) button

Pressingthisbuttonwillenterrecord‐readymode.

Onceyou’reinrecord‐readymode(shownbythe

button’slitLED),youcanbeginrecordingbypressing

theSEQUENCERSTART/STOP()button.For

details,pleasesee“RecordingMIDIinrealtime”on

page 60.

Buttons in the display (the transport

bar)

Thetransportbuttonsinthebottomlineofthedisplay

canalsobeusedtocontrolsequencerrecordingand

playbackinthesamewayasthefrontpanel

SEQUENCERbuttons.

Thetransportbuttonswillappearwhenyoupressthe

“<”buttononthelowerrightsideofthedisplayand

dragittowardtheleft.Toclosethem,pressthe“>”

buttonanddragittowardtheright.

RECLOCATE START/

STOP

PAUSE REW FF

RECLOCATESET

LOCATE

<, >

popup

START/

STOP

PAUSE REW FF

Playing Songs Playback

55

Playing Songs

Playback

Inordertoplaybacksongdatainthesequencer,you

mustfirstrecord,loadordumpsongdataintothe

KROME.

Let’sstartbyloadingandplayingthedemosongdata.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Listeningtothedemosongs”

onpage 21oftheQuickStartGuide.

1. PresstheSEQbuttonorMODEbuttontoenter

Sequencermode.

TheP0:Play/REC–ProgramT01–08orT09–16page

willappear.Ifthisisnotdisplayed,presstheEXIT

buttonaboutthreetimes.

2. Use“SongSelect”toselectthesongyouwantto

playback.

YoucanpresstheSongSelectpopupbuttonand

choosefromalist.Ifyouselectanemptylist,anew

songwillbecreated.

YoucanalsoselectasongbyusingtheINC/DEC

buttonorVALUEdial.Howeverifthereisnosong,

youcan’tmakeaselectionusingtheVALUE

controllers.

3. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP()

button.

Alternatively,pulloutthetransportbarandpressthe

START/STOP()button.Thetransportcontrol

functionalityintheprocedurebelowisdescribedas

buttonoperations,butyoucanalsoperformthesame

operationsusingtheon‐screentransportbuttons.

Thesongyouselectedinstep2willbeginplaying.

Note: Thesongwillbeginplayingifyoupressthe

START/STOP()buttoninapageotherthanP10:

Pattern/RPPR.Ifyoupressthisbuttonwhileyou’rein

P10:Pattern/RPPR,thecurrently‐selectedpatternwill

beginplaying.(InP11:CueList,thesongsofthecue

listwillbeplayed.)

4. Duringplayback,youcanpresstheSTART/STOP

()buttontostopplayback.

IfyoupresstheSTART/STOP()buttononce

again,playbackwillresumefromwhereyoustopped.

FordetailsonthefunctionsoftheLOCATE(),

PAUSE(),REW(),andFF()buttons,please

seepage 54.

YoucanusetheFF/REWSpeedmenucommandto

specifythefast‐forwardandrewindspeed.

Changing the volume, mute, and solo

settings of each track

IntheSEQP0:Play/REC–ProgT01–08,T09–16,Mixer

T01–08,andT09–16pagesyoucanchangethevolume,

mute,andsolosettingsofeachtrack.

Muting a specific track/Monitoring a

specific track (Mute/Solo functions)

TheKROMEprovidesaMutefunctionthatletsyou

silencespecifiedtracks1–16,andaSolofunctionthat

letsyouhearthespecifiedtrackorchannelbyitself.

Thesefunctionscanbeusedinvariousways.For

exampleyoucanintentionallymuteorsolospecific

tracks,orlistenonlytotherhythmsectionofthe

previously‐recordedtrackswhileyourecordnew

tracks.Let’stryouttheMuteandSolofunctions.

1. Use“SongSelect”toselectthesongthatyouwant

toplayback.

2. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP()

button.

3. Presstrack1Play/Rec/Mute.

ThedisplaywillchangefromPlaytoMute,andthe

playbackoftrack1willnolongerbeheard.Inthisway,

the“mute”functionallowsyoutosilenceaspecified

trackuntilthetrackisun‐muted.

Presstrack2Play/Rec/Mute.Thedisplaywillchange,

andtheplaybackoftrack2willalsobemuted.To

cancelmuting,pressPlay/Rec/Muteonceagain.

4. Presstrack1“SoloOn/Off.”

“Solo”willbehighlighted,andthistime,onlythe

performanceoftrack1willbeheard.Toplaybackonly

aspecifiedtrackbyitselfinthiswayisknownas

“soloing”thetrack(turningSoloon).

IfbothMuteandSoloareused,theSolofunctionwill

begivenpriority.

Presstrack2“SoloOn/Off.”

Thedisplaywillchange,andyouwillhearthe

playbackoftracks1and2.Youwon’thearthesoundof

tracks3–16.

5. ToswitchSolooff,pressSoloOn/Offonceagain.

PressSoloOn/Offforbothtracks1and2.

Thedisplaywillchange,andtheplaybackoftracks1

and2willbemuted.IftheSolofunctionisturnedoff

foralltracks,playbackwillbeaccordingtothePlay/

Rec/Mutesettings.

TheSOLOsettingisnotstoredwhenyousavethe

song.

Popup

Location

Song Position Bar

Track Select

Song Select

Meter Tempo

Program Select,

& Popup

Category

Track 2

Solo

Play/Mute/Rec

Track 1

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

56

Exclusive Solo

ExclusiveSoloisafunctionthatlimitstheSolo

function(describedabove)toasingletrackatatime.If

ExclusiveSoloison,onlythetrackforwhichSolowas

lastturnedonwillbeplayed;othertrackswillalways

besilent.

UsetheExclusiveSolomenucommandtospecifyhow

theSolofunctionwillfunction.

ExclusiveSolooff:Youwillbeabletosolomorethan

onetrackatatime.Thestatusofatrackwillchange

eachtimeyoupressitsSoloOn/Offbutton.

ExclusiveSoloon:WhenyoupressaSoloOn/Off

button,onlythattrackwillbesoloed.

Tip:YoucanturnExclusiveSoloon/offbyholding

downtheENTERbuttonandpressingnumerickey1.

Loop playback

Whenrecordingorplayingbackasong,youcanloop

individualtracksthatareplaying.

IntheP0–1:PlayLoopT01–08orT09–16page,check

TrackPlayLoopforthetracksyouwanttoloop,and

useLoopStartMeasureandLoopEndMeasureto

specifythestartingandendingmeasureoftheregion

thatwillplaybackasaloop.

IfyoucheckPlayIntro,themeasuresprecedingthe

loopwillbeplayedbackasanintroductionbeforethe

loopbegins.

Ifyouplaybackfromthefirstmeasurewiththe

settingsshowninthescreenshotabove,thespecified

regionofmeasureswillrepeatasfollows.

IfPlayIntroisunchecked,thespecifiedregionof

measureswillrepeatasfollows.

Measures 12345678910 11 12 13

Track 1 1234567856785

Track 2 9109109109109109109

Measures 12345678910 11 12 13

Track 1 5678567856785

Track 2 9109109109109109109

Loop Start

Measure

Play Intro

Track Play Loop

Loop End

Measure

Recording Preparations for recording

57

Recording

Preparations for recording

Beforeyoubeginrecording,makesurethatthe

memoryprotectsettinginGlobalmodeisturned

off.Fordetails,pleasesee“Protectingthe

memory”onpage 110.

Creating a Song

Beforewecanbeginthisexample,weneedtoselectan

emptysongwherewecanrecord.

1. PresstheSEQbuttonorMODEbuttontoenter

Sequencermode.

2. Choose“SongSelect”(e.g.,intheP0:Play/REC–

ProgramT01–08page).

YoucanpresstheSongSelectpopupbutton,and

choosefromalist.

3. Usethenumerickeystoinputthenumberofthe

newsongthatyouwanttocreate,andpressthe

ENTERbutton.(Forexample,pressthe1switch

andthentheENTERbutton.)Adialogboxwill

appear.

IfyoupressedtheSongSelectpopuptoaccessthe

SongNo.dialogbox,pressthedesiredsongnumberto

openthedialogbox.

4. Use“SetLength”toinputthedesirednumberof

measuresandpresstheOKbutton.

Youcanchangethenumberofmeasureslaterif

desired.Fordetails,pleasesee“SetSongLength”on

page 176oftheParameterGuide.

5. PresstheOKbuttontocreatethesong.

Tip:YoucanusetheENTERbuttoninsteadoftheOK

button.

Track settings

Sincewe’regoingtorecordanewsonginthisexample,

wewillstartbyexplaininghowtoassignaprogramto

eachtrack,andadjustbasicsettingssuchasvolume.

1. Assignaprogramtoeachtrack.

Use“ProgramSelect”toassignaprogramtoeach

track.Themethodisthesameaswhenassigninga

programtoatimbreinacombination(seepage 46).

YoucancopyvarioussettingsfromProgramsor

Combinations.(Seepages166,167oftheParameter

Guide.)

2. Whenassigningaprogram,youcanuseTrack

Selecttochoosethetracktowhichyouwishto

assignaprogram,andauditionthesound.

3. Setthepanandvolumeofeachtrack.

PresstheMixer1–8tab(ortheMixer9–16tab)toaccess

theMixerT01–08page(MixerT09–16page).

•Pansetsthepanpositionofeachtrack,andVol um e

setsthevolumelevelofeachtrack.

4. SpecifythetonegeneratorandMIDIchannelthat

willbeplayedbyeachtrack.

PressthePAGEbuttontoaccessSEQPageSelect,and

press“P3TrackParameters”TheP3:TrackParameters

pagewillappear.PresstheMIDI1–8tab(ortheMIDI

9–16tab)toaccesstheMIDIT01–08page(MIDIT09–16

page).

•UseStatustospecifywhethereachtrackwillplay

theinternaland/orexternalsoundgenerator.

NormallywhenusingtheKROME,youwillselectINT

orBTH.

INT:Duringplayback,theKROME’sinternaltone

generatorwillplaytheMIDIdatarecordedonthat

track.WhenyouusetheKROME’skeyboardor

Popup

Track Select

Location

Song Select

Meter

REC Resolution

Tempo

Tempo

Mode

Program Select,

& Popup

Category

Solo

Play/Mute/Rec

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

58

controllers,youwillbeplayingandcontrollingthe

trackselectedbyTrackSelect.

EXT,EX2,BTH:Duringplayback,theMIDIdata

recordedonthattrackwillbetransmittedfromMIDI

OUTtoplayanexternalsoundmodule.Whenyouuse

theKROME’skeyboardorcontrollers,MIDIdatawill

betransmittedtoplayandcontroltheexternalsound

moduleselectedbyTrackSelect.(TheMIDIchannelof

theexternaltonegeneratormustbesettomatchthe

MIDIChannelofKROMEtracksthataresettoEXT,

EX2orBTH.)

IfStatusissettoBTH,boththeexternaltonegenerator

andinternaltonegeneratorwillbeplayedand

controlled.

•UseMIDIChanneltospecifytheMIDIchannelfor

eachtrack.

NormallyyouwillsettheMIDIChanneltoa

differentchannel:1–16foreachtrack.Tracksthat

aresettothesameMIDIchannelwillsound

simultaneouslywhenyourecordorplayback

eitherofthetracks.

5. Adjusttheeffectsettings.

AdjustsettingsforeacheffectinP8:Routing/IFXand

P9:MFX/TFX/LFO.

Fordetails,pleasesee“UsingeffectsinCombinations

andSongs”onpage 81.

6. Setthetempoandtimesignature.

•Tosetthetempo,youcanturntheTEMPOknobor

presstheTAPbuttonatthedesiredinterval.

Alternatively,youcanselect(Tempo)intheP0:

Play/REC–ProgramT01–08page(orsimilarpage),

andusetheVALUEcontrollerstosetthetempo.Set

TempoModetoManual.

•Nextyouwillsetthetimesignature.Inthis

example,we’llexplainhowtosetthetimesignature

usingthe“Meter”field.Normally,youspecifythe

timesignaturebeforerecordingthefirsttrack,and

thenbeginrecording.

a) PresstheSEQUENCERREC(●)button,andset“Meter”

to**/**.

b) Press**/**tohighlightit,andusetheVALU Econtrollers

tosetthetimesignature.

c) PresstheSTART/STOP()buttontobegin

recording.Whenthepre‐counthasendedandLocate

reaches001:01:000,presstheSTART/STOP()

buttontostoprecording.Thetimesignatureyou

specifiedhasnowbeenrecordedontheMastertrack.

IfyoupresstheSTART/STOP()buttonduringthe

pre‐count,thetimesignaturewon’tberecorded.

7. Setthe“RECResolution”ifnecessary.

Whenyourecordinrealtimeonatrack,thisparameter

specifieshowthetimingoftherecordedMIDIdata

willbecorrected.Thetimingwillalsobecorrected

whenyourecordautomationdatainrealtmeonan

audiotrack.(Datathatwasalreadyrecordedwillnot

becorrected.)

Forexample,let’ssupposethatyourecordedsome

eighthnotesinrealtime,butyourtimingwasnotquite

perfect,asshowninpart1oftheillustrationbelow.If

RECResolutionweresettowhenyourecorded,the

timingwouldautomaticallybecorrectedasshownin

part2oftheillustration.IfRECResolutionissettoHi,

thenoteswillberecordedwiththetimingatwhich

youplaythem.

8. Makeothersettingsasnecessary.

Youcanadjustthesettingsforthearpeggiator(P7:

ARP/DT),MIDIfiltering(P5:MIDIFilter),etc.(See

page 89)

YoumayalsowishtouseToneAdjusttotweakthe

sound.Whenyouarefinishedmakingthesesettings,

thebasicsetupiscomplete.

Saving your song parameter settings

Thesongparametersettingsyoucreateherecanbe

savedasatemplate.Ifyouusethesesettings

frequently,youcansimplyloadoneofthetemplates

you’vesaved.

Fordetails,pleasesee“SaveTemplateSong(Saveas

UserTemplateSong)”onpage 164oftheParameter

Guide.

Using template songs

Loadingatemplatesongisaneasywaytocreate

settingsappropriateforaparticularmusicalstyle.You

canalsoassignadrumpatterntoatrackatthesame

time.

1. IntheP0:Play/RECpage,pressthemenubutton

andchoose“LoadTemplateSong.”

Adialogboxwillappear.

2. Inthe“From”field,choosethetemplatesongyou

wanttoload.

3. Ifyoucheck“CopyPatterntoTracktoo?”,adialog

boxforcopyingapatternwillautomatically

appearafteryouexecutethe“LoadTemplate

Song”operation.

Ifyouexecutethecommandwithoutcheckingthis,

onlythetemplatesongyouselectedinstep2willbe

loaded.

4. PresstheOKbuttontoloadthetemplatesong,or

presstheCancelbuttonifyoudecidetocancel.

Whenyouperformthisoperation,songsettingsother

thantrackLoopandRPPRwillbecopied.

IfyouexecutedthisoperationwithCopyPatternto

Tracktoo?checkedinstep3,theCopyPatternTo

Trackdialogboxwillappear.

Recording Preparations for recording

59

Thisdialogboxisthesameastheonethatappearsfor

theCopyToTrack(P10:Pattern/RPPR–PatternEdit)

menucommand.

5. Inthe“Pattern”field,selectthepatternthatyou

wanttocopy.

IntheToTrackfield,selectthecopy‐destinationtrack.

IntheMeasurefield,specifythestartingmeasureof

thecopy‐destination.

Followingthepatternnameforeachofthe605preset

patterns,themusicalstyleandthenameofthemost

suitableDrumscategoryprogramarepartially

displayed.

Byloadingadrumstrackandthecorrespondingpreset

pattern,youcaninstantlysetupadrumtrack

appropriateforeachpresettemplatesong.

6. Toexecutethisoperation,presstheOKbutton.

Whenyouexecutethisprocedure,theMeasurefield

willcountupautomatically,showinghowmany

measuresoftheselectedpatternhavebeenplacedin

theselectedsong.Youcanthencopyanotherpatternif

desired,oraddmoremeasuresofthesamepattern.

Whenyou’refinished,presstheExitbutton.

Copying the settings of a combination

or program

Youcancopythesettingsofacombinationorprogram

intothesequencer.

Thiscanbedoneinthefollowingways.

•AutoSongSetup

AutoSongSetupisafunctionthatcopiesthe

settingsoftheselectedcombination(in

Combinationmode)orprogram(inProgrammode)

tothesonginSequencermode.

•MenucommandsCopyFromCombiorCopyFrom

Program.(Seepages166,167oftheParameter

Guide)

InSequencermode,youcanusethesepagemenu

commandstocopythedesiredsettings.

Auto Song Setup function

1. EnterCombinationmode.

2. InP0:Playpage,selectthedesiredcombination

andedittheArpeggiatoretc.asdesired.

Note: Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedstateofthe

combination,usetheWriteCombinationmenu

commands.

3. PresstheREC(●)button.Alternatively,selectthe

pagemenucommand“AutoSongSetup.”

TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear.

4. ToexecutetheAutoSongSetupfunction,pressthe

REC(●)buttonortheOKbutton.Ifyoudecide

nottoexecute,presstheCancelbutton.

YouwillautomaticallymovetoSequencermode,and

thesettingsofthecombinationwillbecopiedtothe

song.

Thefirstunusedsongwillbethecopy‐destination

song.

Contents automatically copied from a combi-

nation

Thecopiedcontentswillbethesameaswhenyou

executethemenucommandCopyFromCombiwith

thefollowingsettingsinthedialogbox.(Seepage 166

oftheParameterGuide)

•IFXs,MFXs,TFXchecked

•AutoAdjustArpsettingforMultiRECchecked

Contents automatically copied from a pro-

gram

Thecopiedcontentswillbethesameaswhenyou

executethemenucommandCopyFromProgramwith

thefollowingsettingsinthedialogbox.(Seepage 167

oftheParameterGuide)

•IFXs,MFXs,TFXchecked

•Arpchecked

•TosettoTrack01

•ArpsettoA

•withDrumTrackchecked

•To:DrumTracksettoTrack10

•CheckRecordingSetupMultiREC

•SetthePlay/Rec/MutesettingtoRECfortracks01

and10(seepage 101oftheParameterGuide).

5. TheKROMEwillautomaticallyenterrecord‐ready

mode,andthemetronomewillsoundaccordingto

theMetronomesetting(Seepage 119ofthe

ParameterGuide).

6. PresstheSTART/STOP()buttontobegin

realtimerecording.Tostoprecording,pressthe

START/STOP()buttononceagain.

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

60

Recording MIDI in real time

Whenyou’vefinishedwith“Preparationsfor

recording,”youcanstartrecording.

Thisisamethodofrecordingwhatyou’replayingon

thekeyboardandyourcontrollerusage,inrealtime.

Thismethodofrecordingisnormallyusedonetrackat

atime,andiscalledsingletrackrecording.

Asanalternative,multitrackrecordingallowsyouto

simultaneouslyrecordmultiplechannelsofdataonto

multipletracks.Thisisthemethodyouwillusewhen

usingtheDrumTrackfunction,theRPPRfunction,and

thearpeggiatortorecordmultipletracksofmusical

dataatonce,orwhenyouplaybackexistingsequence

dataonanexternalsequencerandrecorditonto

KROME’ssequencerinrealtime.

Recording setup

InP0:Play/REC–PreferencespageRecordingSetup,

selecttherealtimerecordingmethodyouwanttouse.

Overwrite

Bydefault,thisrecordingmethodisselected.

Thiswillrecordyourperformancebyoverwritingany

previouslyrecordeddata.Alldatafollowingthe

measurewhereyoustartrecordingwillbeerased.

Normallyyouwillusethismethodtorecord,andthen

modifytheresultsbyusingothertypesofreal‐time

recordingorMIDIeventediting.

1. UseTrackSelecttochoosethetrackthatyouwant

torecord.

2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.

3. In“Location,”specifythelocationwhereyouwish

tobeginrecording.

4. PresstheSEQUENCERREC(●)button,andthen

presstheSTART/STOP()button.

IftheMetronomeSetupisstillsettothedefault

settings,themetronomewillsoundforatwo‐measure

pre‐count,andthenrecordingwillbegin.

Playthekeyboardandmovecontrollerssuchasthe

joysticktorecordyourperformance.

5. Whenyoufinishplaying,presstheSTART/STOP

()button.

Recordingwillend,andthelocationwillreturntothe

pointwhereyoubeginrecording.

IfyoupressthePAUSE()buttoninsteadofthe

START/STOP()button,recordingwillpause.

WhenyoupressthePAUSE()buttononceagain,

recordingwillresumewhereyouleftoffbefore

pausing.Whenyouarefinished,presstheSTART/

STOP()buttontostoprecording.

Thefollowingrecordingsetupparametersarealso

available.

Overdub

Selectthismethodifyouwishtorecordadditional

performancedatabyoverdubbingitwithouterasing

thepreviously‐recordeddata.

Manual punch-in

Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtousethe

SEQUENCERREC(●)buttonorafootswitchtore‐

recordselectedportionsofapreviously‐recorded

track.

Auto punch-in

Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoautomaticallyre‐

recordselectedportionsofapreviously‐recorded

track.

Then,recordingwilloccuronlyoverthespecifiedarea

(AutoPunchInStartMeasure–AutoPunchInEnd

Measure),rewritingitwiththenewlyrecordeddata.

Loop All Tracks

Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtorepeatedlyrecord

overaspecifiedareaofatrack,whilecontinuingtoadd

data.Thisissuitableforcreatingdrumpatterns,etc.

Fordetails,pleasesee“A n exampleofrealtime

recording”onpage 61.

Multi (multitrack recording)

UseMIDImulti‐trackrecordingifyouwantto

simultaneouslyrecordmultipletracksofdifferent

channels,suchaswhenrecordingtheoutputofthe

drumtrack,arpeggiatororRPPRfunctions,orwhen

recordingfromanexternalmulti‐tracksequencer.

Location

Recording Step recording

61

An example of realtime recording

Inthisexample,we’llassignadrumprogramtotrack

01andcreatethefollowingone‐measuredrumphrase.

1. Createanewsong,andspecifyadrumprogram

fortrack01.

UseTrackSelecttoselecttrack01,andverifythatyou

hearadrumprogram.(Seepage 57)

2. AccesstheP0:Play/REC–Preferencespage.In

RecordingSetup,specify“LoopAllTracks”and

setittoM001‐M001(seepage 117oftheParameter

Guide).

Withthissetting,measure1willberecorded

repeatedly.Thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeaddedat

eachpass.

3. Set“RECResolution”to.(Seepage 58)

4. PresstheSEQUENCERREC(●)button,andthen

theSTART/STOP()button.

Themetronomewillsoundatwo‐measurecount‐

down,andthenrecordingwillbegin.

5. Asshowninthemusicalexampleprintedabove,

startbyplayingtheC3noteofthekeyboardto

recordthebassdrumforonemeasure.

6. Next,playtheE3noteofthekeyboardtorecord

thesnareforonemeasure,andthentheF#3noteto

recordthehi‐hat.

7. PresstheSTART/STOP()buttontostop

recording.

8. Playbacktheresult,andlistentothedrum

performancethatyourecorded.

PresstheSTART/STOP()button.Whenyou’ve

finishedlistening,presstheSTART/STOP()

buttononceagaintostopplayback.

9. Ifyou’renotsatisfiedwiththeresult,pressthe

COMPAREbuttontoreturntothestatepriorto

recording,andthenre‐recordfromstep4.

Note: Whenyou’refinishedrecording,changethe

RecordingSetupbacktothenormally‐usedOverwrite

(P0:Play/REC–Preferencespage).

Inaddition,accesstheP0:Play/REC–PlayLoopT01–

08page,checkTrackPlayLoopfortrack01,andsetthe

LoopStartMeasureandLoopEndMeasureto001.

Whenyouplayback,track01willrepeatedlyplaythe

firstmeasure.

Step recording

Steprecordingistherecordingmethodwhereyou

specifythedurationandstrengthofeachnote,anduse

thekeyboardtospecifythepitchofeachMIDInote.

YoucanusetheRestbuttonandTiebuttonofthe

dialogboxtoinputrestsandties.

Steprecordingisusefulwhenyouwanttocreate

mechanicallyprecisebeats,orwhenyouneedto

recordaphrasethatwouldbedifficulttoplaybyhand

“inrealtime,”orwhenyoufinditdifficulttoplay

extremelycomplicatedorrapidpassages.

An example of step recording

Inthisexample,we’llassignabassprogramtotrack02

andstep‐recordthefollowingtwo‐measurebass

phrase.

1. Specifyabassprogramfortrack02.UseTrack

Selecttoselecttrack02,andverifythatyouheara

bassprogram.

2. AccesstheP6:TrackEdit–TrackEditpage.

Bass drum: C3

Snare: E3

Hi hat: F#3

Note

Step

Time:

Select

Step

Time:

. 3 -

Key, Button Measure/

Beat Tick

C3 . C3 key 001 / 01.000

G3 - G3 key 001 / 01.360

- Rest button 001 / 02.000

C4 - C4 key 001 / 02.240

- Rest button 001 / 02.360

C4 - C4 key 001 / 03.120

D3 - D3 key 001 / 03.240

Eb3 - Eb3 key 001 / 04.000

E3 - E3 key 001 / 04.240

F3 - F3 key 002 / 01.000

- Rest button 002 / 01.120

C3 - C3 key 002 / 01.360

- Rest button 002 / 02.000

F2 - F2 key 002 / 02.240

Tie - Tie button 002 / 03.000

F2 - F2 key 002 / 03.240

- Rest button 002 / 03.360

A2 - A2 key 002 / 04.000

A3 - A3 key 002 / 04.240

- Rest button 002 / 04.360

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

62

3. Set“FromMeasure”to001.

Withthissetting,steprecordingwillbeginfrom

measure1.

4. Pressthemenubutton,andpressmenucommand

“StepRecording.”

Adialogboxwillappear.

5. In“StepTime,”use“Select”tospecifythebasic

timingvalue.

InputthefirstC3noteas.(dottedeighthnote).

Usethepopupbuttontothelefttoselect.

Youcanchooseanotevaluerangingfromawholenote

()toa32ndnote().

Inputadottednotebyselecting“.”withthepopup

buttonsatright.

Youcanspecify“3”toinputatriplet.Ifyouwanttouse

theunmodifiedlengthofthenotethat’sselectedatthe

left,choose“–”.

“NoteDuration”indicatesthelengththatthenote

itselfwillsound.Smallervalueswillproduceastaccato

note,andlargervalueswillproducealegatonote.For

thisexample,leavethissettingunchanged.

“NoteVelocity”isthevelocity(playingstrength),and

largervalueswillproducealoudervolume.Setthisto

Key.

IfyouselectKeyforthisparameter,thevelocityofhow

youactuallyplaythekeyboardwillbeinput.

6. Onthekeyboard,pressandthenreleasethefirst

C3notethatyouwanttoinput.

Thedatayouinputwillappearinthedisplayas

numericalvalues.Ontheupperrightside,Measure

001BeatTick01.000willchangetoMeasure001Beat

Tick01.360.Thenextnoteyouinputwillbeplacedat

thislocation.

7. Asdescribedinsteps5and6,inputthenotesand

reststhatfollowthefirstC3note.

Inadditiontothemethodsdescribedinsteps5and6,

youcanalsousethefollowinginputmethods.

•Toinputarest,presstheRestbutton.Thiswill

inputarestoftheselectedStepTimevalue.

•Toenteratie,sothattwoormorenotesofthesame

pitchwillbeplayedasasingleunbrokennote,

presstheTiebutton.WhenyoupresstheTie

button,thepreviously‐inputnotewillbeextended

bytheStepTimelength.

•Todeleteanoteorrestthatyouinput,pressthe

StepBackbutton.Thepreviously‐inputnotewillbe

deleted.

•Toinputachord,simultaneouslypressthenotesof

thedesiredchord.Evenifyoudonotpressthem

simultaneously,notesthatarepressedbeforeyou

fullyremoveyourhandfromallkeysonthe

keyboardwillbeinputatthesamelocation.

•Toauditionanotewithoutactuallyinputtingit,

pressthePAUSE()button.Nowwhenyouplaya

noteonthekeyboard,itwillsound,butthenote

willnotbeactuallyinput.Inthisstate,playinga

keywillproduceasound,butwillnotinputanote.

PressthePAUSE()buttononceagaintocancel

therecord‐pausestate,andresumeinputtingnotes.

8. Whenyouarefinishedrecording,presstheDone

button.

PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP()button

toplayback.

AccesstheP0:Play/REC–PlayLoopT01–08page,

checkTrackPlayLoopfortrack02,setLoopStart

Measureto001,andLoopEndMeasureto002.track

02willplaymeasures1–2repeatedly.

9. Ifyou’renotsatisfiedwiththeresult,pressthe

COMPAREbuttontoreturntothestatepriorto

recording,andthenre‐recordfromstep4.

Whenyoubeginsteprecording,alldatainthe

trackthatfollowsthemeasurewhereyoubegan

recordingwillbeerased.Youneedtobeawareof

thisifyoubeginsteprecordingfromameasure

mid‐waythroughthesong.

Ifyouwanttocopydataintoameasurethat

alreadycontainsdata,performsteprecordingin

anemptytrack,andusetheMoveMeasureor

CopyMeasuremenucommands.(Seepage 179of

theParameterGuide)

Ifyouwanttoeditoraddtotherecordeddata,you

canusetheEventEditorPianoRollfunction.(See

pages 169,171oftheParameterGuide)

Recording Recording multiple tracks from an external sequencer

63

Recording multiple tracks

from an external sequencer

TheplaybackfromanexternalMIDIsequencer

connectedtotheKROMEcanberecorded

simultaneouslyusingmulti‐recording.

1. MakesurethattheMIDIOUTofyourexternal

sequencerisconnectedtotheMIDIINofthe

KROME.

Ifitisnotconnected,turnoffthepower,makethe

connection,andthenturnthepoweron.

2. IntheGlobalP1:MIDI–MIDIBasicpage,set

MIDIClocktoExternalMIDI.Withthissetting,

theKROMEwillsynchronizetoMIDIclock

messagesfromyourexternalsequencer.

MakesurethatReceiveExt.RealtimeCommandsis

checked.

3. CreateanewsonginSequencermode,andinthe

P0:Play/REC–Preferencespage,checktheMulti

RECcheckbox.SetRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.

4. PressPlay/Rec/Mutetoselect“REC”forthetracks

youwanttorecord.

Forthetracksyoudon’twanttorecord,selectPlayor

Mute.

5. IntheP3:TrackParameters–MIDIT01–08and

T09–16page,useMIDIChanneltospecifythe

MIDIchannelofeachtrack.

SettheMIDIchannelofeachKROMEtracktomatch

theMIDIchannelofeachexternalsequencertrack.

Datafromeachchannelwillberecordedonthe

correspondingKROMEtrack.

MakesurethatStatusissettoINTorBTH.

6. PresstheLOCATE()buttontosetthelocation

to001:01.000.

7. PresstheSEQUENCERREC(●)buttontoenter

record‐standbymode.

8. Startyourexternalsequencer.

TheKROME’ssequencerwillautomaticallybegin

recordingwhenitreceivestheMIDIStartmessage

transmittedbyyourexternalsequencer.

9. Whenplaybackhasended,stopyourexternal

sequencer.

TheKROME’ssequencerwillautomaticallystop

recordingwhenitreceivestheMIDIStopmessage

transmittedbytheexternalsequencer.Youcanalso

stoprecordingbypressingtheSTART/STOP()

buttonontheKROME.

Afterthis,youcanplaybackthenewlyrecorded

sequence:

10. IntheGlobalP1:MIDI–MIDIBasicpage,set

MIDIClocktoInternal.

SetTempoModetoAutointheSeqP0:Play/REC–

ProgramT01–08page.

PresstheSTART/STOP()buttontoplayback.

Note: Ifthecorrectsoundsarenotselectedwhenyou

startplayingback,youmaybeabletosolvethe

problembyusingthemenucommandEventEdit(P6:

TrackEdit)tore‐specifytheProgramChangedata.

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

64

Recording System Exclusive

events

ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDI

deviceortheparameterchangesproducedwhenyou

editatrackparameteroreffectparametercanbe

recordedinrealtimeonanytrack.

Duringplayback,theexclusivemessagesyourecorded

willcontrolthetrackparametersandeffectparameters

ofthesong,andcanbesenttoexternalMIDIdevices.

Note: YoucanusethemenucommandPutEffect

SettingtoTracktoinsertanexclusiveeventcontaining

theparametersettingsforaninserteffect,mastereffect

ortotaleffectintothedesiredlocationofatrack,so

thatthesesettingswillautomaticallyswitchduring

playback.

GM,XG,andGSexclusivemessagescanbe

recordedonatrack,buttheKROME’stone

generatorwillnotrespondtothesemessages.

Recording internal parameter

changes

YoucanuseSysExforautomationofinternalKROME

effectsandProgramparameters.

Herewe’llexplainhowtorecordinternalparameter

changes.Asanexample,we’llexplainhowparameter

changesrecordedonadifferenttrackcanbeusedto

modifytheparametersoftheinserteffect(IFX1)

appliedtotheprogramoftrack1.

Note: Inordertorecordsystemexclusivemessages,

makesurethattheGlobalP1:MIDI–MIDIRouting

settingEnableExclusiveischecked.GotoGlobal

modeandverifythatthisischecked.

1. SelectthedesiredprogramforMIDItrack1,and

routeittoIFX1.Thenrecordaphraseofabout

sixteenmeasures.

•IntheP0:Play/REC–ProgramT01–08page,use

“ProgramSelect”toselectthedesiredprogramfor

MIDITrack01.

•IntheP8:Routing/IFX–RoutingT01–08page,route

theMIDITrack01Bus(IFX/Output)SelecttoIFX1.

ThenintheP8:Routing/IFX–InsertFXSetuppage,

selectthedesiredeffectforIFX1.

• SelectMIDITrack01inTrackSelect.Thenpress

theSEQUENCERREC(●)buttonandthenthe

START/STOP()button,andrecordaphrase

ofaboutsixteenmeasures.

2. SelectTrack09in“TrackSelect,”andrecord

parameterchangesasdesired.

Note: Forthisexample,selectanemptytrack.Ifyou

wanttorecordontoaMIDItrackthatalreadycontains

data,settheP0:Play/REC–Preferencespage

RecordingSetupto“Overdub,”asdescribedon

page 60.

• SelectTrack09inTrackSelect.Thenpressthe

SEQUENCERREC(●)buttonandthentheSTART/

STOP()button,andbeginrecording.

•A

ttheappropriatetimewhilerecording,adjustthe

parameter(s)thatyouwanttorealtime‐record.

IntheP8:Routing/IFX‐InsertFXSetuppage,select

anothereffectforIFX1,andmodifytheeffect

parametervalues.

Note: Inadditiontoeffectparameterchanges,youcan

alsorecordparameterssuchassoundparameters.For

detailsontheparametersthatcanberecorded,please

seepage 191oftheParameterGuide.

3. Stoprecording.

Note: Exclusivemessagesarealwaysrecordedonthe

currenttrackselectedbyTrackSelect.Inthisexample,

theyarerecordedonMIDItrack9.

Note: IntheMIDIeventeditpageyoucanviewthe

recordedexclusiveeventsandtheirlocation.Exclusive

eventsaredisplayedas“EXCL”.

Toviewtheseevents,gototheP6:TrackEdit–Track

Editpage,andselectthemenucommandMIDIEvent

Edit.ThenintheSetEventFiltersdialogbox,check

ExclusiveandpresstheOKbutton.

Exclusiveeventscannotbechangedtoadifferent

typeofevent.Norcanothereventsbechanged

intoexclusiveevents.

4. Ifyougotothepage(e.g.,P8:Routing/IFX)that

showstheparametersyouadjustedinrealtime,

youcanwatchtherecordedchangesbereproduced

whilethesongplaysback.

Recording Recording patterns

65

Exclusive messages that will be recorded dur-

ing realtime recording

Thefollowingexclusivemessageswillberecorded.

(Seepage 191oftheParameterGuide)

•ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDI

device.

• ParameterchangesinSequencermode.

•MasterVolumeuniversalsystemexclusive

messagesassignedtoafootpedalorknob.

Using realtime controls to record

changes in a MIDI track’s pan, EQ,

volume, and tone adjust

Bycontrollingthepan,EQ,volume,andtoneadjust

parametersduringrealtimerecording,youcanrecord

thesechangessothattheywillbereflectedduring

playback.

Usemulti‐trackrecordingifyouwanttomodifythe

settingsofmultipletrackssimultaneously.

Note: Controllingtheseparameterswilltransmit

controlchangeorsystemexclusivemessages.Inorder

forthisdatatoberecorded,theGlobalP1:MIDI–MIDI

RoutingEnableControlChangeandEnableExclusive

settingsmustbechecked.GotoGlobalmodeand

verifythattheseitemsarechecked.

Note: UseParam.MIDIOutinGlobalP1:MIDIBasic

pagetospecifywhethercontrolchangemessagesor

systemexclusivemessageswillbetransmittedwhen

youeditthePan(CC#10),Volume(CC#7),orSend1/2

level(CC#93andCC#91)parameters.

Inthiscase,theGlobalP1:MIDI–MIDIRouting

settingsEnableControlChangeandEnableExclusive

mustbecheckedrespectively.

Recording patterns

Recording and editing patterns

Youcanrecordpatternsineitheroftwoways;realtime

recordingorsteprecording.However,patternrealtime

recordingdiffersfromsongrealtimerecordinginthat

youcanuseonlyLooptyperecording.

YoucaneditpatternsbyusingEventEditoperationsto

modifytherecordeddataorinsertnewdata.Youcan

alsousetheGetFromTrackmenucommandto

convertadesiredregionofperformancedatafroma

MIDItrackintoapattern.Conversely,youcanusethe

PuttoTrackorCopytoTrackmenucommandsto

placeorcopytheperformancedatafromapatterninto

aMIDItrack.

Inaddition,youcanusethe“ConverttoDrumTrack

Pattern”pagemenucommandtoconvertauser

patterntoadrumtrackpattern.(See“Convertingtoa

DrumTrackpattern”onpage 103)

Recording patterns in real time

Whenrealtime‐recordingapattern,apatternofthe

specifiednumberofmeasureswillplayback

repeatedly,allowingyoutocontinueaddingmusical

datatoit.

1. Createanewsong,andasdescribedin

“Preparationsforrecording”onpage 57,setthe

tracktotheprogramthatwillbeusedbythe

pattern.

2. AccesstheP10:Pattern/RPPR–PatternEditpage.

3. UseTrackSelecttochoosethetrackthatyouwill

usetorecordthepattern.

Thepatternwillplaybackwiththeprogramandother

settingsoftheselectedtrack.

4. Set“Pattern(PatternBank)”toUser,andset

“PatternSelect”toU00.

UserpatternsU00–U99canbecreatedforeachsong.

5. Selectthemenucommand“PatternParameter”.

Pattern Select

Track

Select

Remove Data

REC Resolution

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

66

Adialogboxwillappear.

6. Setthenumberofmeasuresinthepatterntoa

“Length”of04(fourmeasures),andset“Meter”to

atimesignatureof4/4.PresstheOKbutton.

7. Asnecessary,set“RECResolution”toapply

realtimequantization.

8. Beginrealtimerecording.

Youcanrecordinthesamewayasyoudidwhen

recordingtrackswithLoopAllTracks.(See“LoopAll

Tracks”onpage 60)

PresstheSEQUENCERREC(●)button,andthenpress

theSTART/STOP()button.

Afterthepre‐count,patternrecordingwillbegin.Play

thekeyboardandusethejoystickandothercontrollers

torecordyourperformance.

Whenyoureachtheendofthepattern,thesequencer

willreturntothebeginningofthepatternandcontinue

recording.Ifyoucontinuerecording,thenewly

recordeddatawillbeaddedtothepreviously‐

recordeddata.

9. Ifyouwanttodeletespecificdatawhileyou

continuepatternrecording,youcanpresstheREC

(●)buttonorcheckthe“RemoveData”checkbox.

Fordetailsrefertostep6of“LoopAllTracks”on

page 60.

10. PresstheSTART/STOP()buttontostop

recording.

Ifyoumadeamistakeordecidetore‐record,pressthe

START/STOP()buttontostoprecording,and

presstheCOMPAREbutton.Thenbeginthepattern

recordingprocedureagainasinstep8.

Other way to record

Using the Drum Track function and

the arpeggiator to record on multiple

tracks simultaneously

Youcanusemulti‐recordingtosimultaneouslyrecord

amulti‐trackperformanceusingtheDrumTrack

functionandarpeggiator.

Fordetails,pleasesee“RecordingMIDIinrealtime”

onpage 60.

Using the RPPR function to record on

multiple tracks simultaneously

Youcanusemulti‐recordingtosimultaneouslyrecord

amulti‐trackperformanceusingtheRPPRfunction.

Fordetails,pleasesee“CreatinganRPPRpattern”on

page 71.

Song editing Song

67

Song editing

Youcanapplyavarietyofeditingprocedurestoa

song.Theavailabletypesofeditingproceduresare

listedbelow.

Song

Load(Save)TemplateSong:Loadsasongtemplate

intothesong(orsavesasongasatemplate)(see

page 58).

CopyFromCombination/CopyFromProgram:

Copies

thesettingsofthespecifiedcombination/programtothe

settingsofthesongthat’scurrentlyselected.

CopyFromSong:Thiscommandcopiesallofthe

settingdataandmusicaldatafromthespecifiedsong

tothesongthat’scurrentlyselected.

Renamesong:Renamestheselectedsong.Youcan

enterupto24characters.

DeleteSong:Thiscommanddeletesthecurrently

selectedsong.

FF/REWSpeed:Thisallowsyoutosetthespeedat

whichfast‐forwardorrewindwilloccurwhenyou

presstheFF()buttonorREW()button.

GMInitialize:ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystem

OnmessagetotheSequencermode,resettingallMIDI

trackstotheGMsettings.

SetSongLength:Thiscommandchangesthelengthof

thespecifiedsong.Whenitisexecuted,thelengthof

themastertrackwillchange,andthenumberof

measuresplayedwillchange.

MIDI tracks

Tracks

StepRecording:Thisallowsyoutospecifythelength

andvelocityofeachnotenumerically,andtoinput

MIDIdata,thepitches,fromthekeyboard.Youcanuse

theRestbuttonandTiebuttontoenterarestortie.

EventEdit:Hereyoucaneditindividualeventsof

MIDIdata.

PianoRoll:Allowsyoutoeditnotes,velocities,and

controlchangesinthepianorollscreen.Byselecting

anddraggingeventsinthescreen,youcanedittheir

pitchortiming,ordeleteoraddevents.

EraseTrack:Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthe

specifiedtrack.Itisnotpossibletoerasethemaster

trackbyitself.

CopyTrack:Thiscommandcopiesmusicaldatafrom

thecopysourcetracktothespecifiedtrack.

BounceTrack:Thiscommandcombinesthemusical

dataofthebouncesourceandbouncedestination

tracks,andplacesthecombineddatainthebounce

destination.Allmusicaldatainthebouncesourcewill

beerased.

EraseMeasure:Thiscommanderasesthespecified

type(s)ofmusicaldatafromthespecifiedrangeof

measures.TheEraseMeasurecommandcanalsobe

usedtoremoveonlyaspecifictypeofdata.Unlikethe

DeleteMeasurecommand,executingtheErase

Measurecommanddoesnotcausethesubsequent

measuresofmusicaldatatobemovedforward.

DeleteMeasure:Thiscommanddeletesthespecified

measures.WhentheDeleteMeasurecommandis

executed,themusicaldatafollowingthedeleted

measureswillbemovedtowardsthebeginningofthe

sequence.

InsertMeasure:Thiscommandinsertsthespecified

numberofmeasuresintothespecifiedtrack.Whenyou

executetheInsertMeasurecommand,themusicaldata

followingtheinsertlocationwillbemovedbackward.

RepeatMeasure:Thiscommandrepeatedlyinsertsthe

specifiedmeasuresforthespecifiednumberoftimes.

WhenyouexecutetheRepeatMeasurecommand,the

measureswillbeinsertedfollowingthemeasure

specifiedbyToEndofMeasure,andmusicaldata

followingtheinserteddatawillbemovedbackward.

CopyMeasure:Thiscommandcopiesthemeasuresof

musicaldataspecifiedasthe“From”sourcetothe

beginningofthemeasurespecifiedasthe“To”

location.WhenyouexecutetheCopyMeasure

command,theexistingtrackdataatthecopy

destinationwillberewritten.

MoveMeasure:Thiscommandmovesthespecified

measuresofperformancedatatoanothermeasure.

WhenyouexecutetheMoveMeasurecommand,the

performancedatafollowingthemove‐sourcemeasures

willmoveforwardbythecorrespondingnumberof

measures,andtheperformancedatafollowingthe

move‐destinationwillmovebackward(i.e.,laterinthe

song)bythesamenumberofmeasures.

CreateControlData:Thiscommandcreatescontrol

change,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempodatainthe

specifiedregionofaMIDItrackorthemastertrack.

EraseControlData:Thiscommanderasesdatasuchas

controlchanges,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempoin

thespecifiedrange.

Quantize:ThiscommandcorrectsthetimingofMIDI

dataofthetypeyouspecify(notedata,controlchange,

aftertouch,pitchbend,programchange,etc.)inthe

track.Youcanalsoadjustforswing.

Shift/EraseNote:Thiscommandshifts(moves)or

erasesthespecifiednotenumbersinaspecifiedMIDI

trackandrangeofmeasures.

ModifyVelocity:Thiscommandmodifiesthevelocity

valuesofnotesinthespecifiedareasothattheywill

changeovertimeaccordingtoaselectedcurve.

CreateExclusiveData:Thiscommandcreates

universalsystemexclusivemessagesorKROME

parameterchangemessagesinthespecifiedregionofa

MIDItrack.

EraseExclusiveData:Thiscommanderases(deletes)

universalsystemexclusivemessagesorKROME

parameterchangemessagesfromthespecifiedregion.

Todeletealltypesofsystemexclusivemessageother

thanthoselistedabove,settheEraseMeasure

command’s“Kind”fieldtoExclusive,andexecutethe

command.

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

68

Pattern

StepRecording(LoopType):Hereyoucanperform

steprecordingintoapattern.

EventEdit:Hereyoucaneditindividualeventsofthe

musicaldatainapattern.

PianoRoll:Youcaneditnotes,velocities,andcontrol

changesinthepianorollscreen.

PatternParameter:Thiscommandspecifiesthe

numberofmeasuresandthetimesignatureofthe

selectedpattern.

ErasePattern:Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthe

selectedpattern.

CopyPattern:Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsand

musicaldataoftheselectedpatterntoanotherpattern.

BouncePattern:Thiscommandcombinesthemusical

dataofthebouncesourcepatternandbounce

destinationpattern,andplacesthecombinedmusical

datainthebouncedestination.

GetFromTrack:Thiscommandtakesmusicaldata

fromaMIDItrackandloadsitintothespecified

pattern.

PutToTrack:Thiscommandplacesapatternintoa

MIDItrack.

CopyToTrack:Thiscommandcopiesthespecified

areaofmusicaldatafromthespecifiedpatterntoa

MIDItrackasmusicaldata.

ConverttoDrumTrackPattern:Thiscommand

convertsauserpatternintoauserdrumtrackpattern,

whichcanthenbeusedwiththeDrumTrackinany

mode.

LoadDrumTrackPattern:Thiscommandloadsauser

DrumTrackpatternintoauserpattern.

EraseDrumTrackPattern:Thiserasesthespecified

DrumTrackpattern.

Track view edit

Herewe’llexplaintrackviewediting.

Youcanvisuallyspecifyregionsofmeasuresinthe

display,andthenmove,copy,orerasethem.

Foreachtrack,eventdatasuchasnotes,velocities,and

controlchangesaredisplayed(seetheillustration

below).

Youreditingwillapplytothehighlightedmeasures.

TherangeisshowninFROMMEASUREandToEND

ofMEASUREintheupperline.

Youcanmove,copy,orerasedatainunitsofmeasures.

Note: Youcan’tspecifyaregionofmeasuresunlessa

toolisselectedinthetoolbox.

Examples of using the tools

Example)

Moving the events of measures 1–2 to measures 5–6

1. Pressthetool.

2. Dragovermeasures1–2tospecifytheeditregion.

3. Pressthetool.

4. Pressmeasure5(themove‐destinationmeasure).

Alternatively,dragtheeditregiontomeasure5.

Track View area select

The bar at left indicates the

four tracks shown in the track

view area (in this example,

tracks 1–4).

Setup

Press this button to open

the Track View Setup

dialog box.

Displays note events in a

one-octave range

Displays the values for the

control message name indicated

in the left of the screen

Indicate the selected region.

Linked with the identically-

named parameter of the

Track Edit page.

( Track View Setup)

Track name indication

Control message name indication

( Track View Setup)

Scroll button

Selected region

Velocity indication

( Track View Setup)

( Track View Setup)

( Track View Setup)

Scroll button

Scroll button

Note events

Location bar

Track view area

Pattern

Tool box

Jump to the piano roll.

Specify the starting

measure.

Specify the ending

measure.

Move the events of the

selected measure(s).

Copy the events of the

selected measure(s).

Erase the events of the

selected measure(s).

1

2

34

Song editing Track view edit

69

5. Inthisexample,aneventexistsinthemove‐

destinationmeasure,sotheDragMovedialogbox

willappear.

Overwritewilloverwritethesourcedataoverthe

destinationdata(replacingthedestinationdatawith

thesourcedata).Mergewillcombinethesourceand

destinationdata.

PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethemove.

Iftherearenoeventsinthemove‐destination

measures,thisdialogboxwillnotappear;themove

willoccurimmediately.

Example)

Moving the data of an entire track

1. Returnthelocationtothebeginning.

2. Pressthetool.

3. Presstheleftsideofmeasure1inthetrackyou

wanttomove.

4. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothemove‐

destinationtrack,andrelease.

Ifthemove‐destinationmeasurescontainevents,the

DragMovedialogboxwillappear.

Overwritewilloverwritethesourcedataoverthe

destinationdata(replacingthedestinationdatawith

thesourcedata).Mergewillcombinethesourceand

destinationdata.PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethe

move.

Iftherearenoeventsinthemove‐destination

measures,thisdialogboxwillnotappear;themove

willoccurimmediately.

Example)

Copying the events of measures 1–2 to measures 3–4

1. Pressthetool.

2. Dragovermeasures1–2tospecifytheeditregion.

3. Pressthetool.

4. Pressmeasure3(thecopy‐destinationmeasure).

Alternatively,dragtheeditregiontomeasure3.

The destination is overwritten

by the source data

If you choose Overwrite

The two sets of data are combinedIf you choose Merge

2

3

4

1

2

34

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

70

Thecopywillbeexecuted.

5. Ifdesired,youcanpressanothercopy‐destination

tocopythedatarepeatedly.

Example) Copying the data of an entire track

Youcancopythedataofanentiretracktoanother

track.

Referto“Example)Movingthedataofanentiretrack.”

Instep2,choosethetool.

Piano Roll Editing

PianoRolleditingletsyouenter,edit,ordeleteevent

datasuchasnotes,velocities,andcontrolchanges.

1. IntheSeqP6:TrackEdit‐TrackViewpage,specify

thetrackandmeasurethatyouwanttoedit.

2. SelectthetoolintheTrackViewpageorselect

“PianoRoll”fromthemenucommandstoaccess

thePianoRollwindow.(Seeillustrationbelow)

3. Makesurethattheeventsyouwanttoeditare

displayedinthenoteviewareaattheupperpart

ofthewindoworinthecontrolviewareaatthe

lowerpartofthewindow.

•Pressthenoteviewareaselector,andusethevalue

controllers.

• Selectthetool,anddrag.

•Enter“Meas”or“#”intheeventlist.

•Usetheviewcontrolzoombuttonstozoom‐in/out.

•Switchtheviewareaheightselector.

4. Usethetoolboxtoselectatool,andeditthedata.

Note: Ifyouwanttoundoanedit,presstheUndo

button.

5. Toplaybacktheevents,pressthePlaybutton.A

dialogboxwillopen,andthesongwillstart

playing.Thisallowsyoutochecktheresultsof

yourediting.

6. Youcanchangesettingssuchasthenote

resolution.PresstheSetupbutton,andadjustthe

settingsinthePianoRollSetupdialogbox.

7. Whenyou’refinishedediting,presstheDone

button.

5

Control view area

Event list

Note view area

Note view area select

Note events

View area height select

Zoom

Scroll (view control)

The selected note event

Enter notes.

Delete notes.

Switch the note event

display

Ends piano roll editing

Move the note view

area that is displayed.

Select what will be

shown in the control

view area. (In this

example, velocity values

are shown.)

The Piano Roll Setup dialog

box will appear when you

press the Setup button

(->see Piano Roll Setup).

Undo cancels the

preceding edit. Redo

returns to the state prior

to Undo.

Plays back the song. The Piano Roll

Edit Play dialog box will appear

when you press this button

( Piano Roll Edit Play).

Toolbox:

Select or move a note.

Change the length of notes.

Creating an RPPR pattern Creating RPPR data

71

Creating an RPPR pattern

RPPRstandsforRealtimePatternPlay/Recording,and

isafunctionthatletsyouassignpatterndatatoeach

key,andthenplaybackthatpatternsimplybypressing

thekeywhereitisassigned.Youcanrealtime‐record

thisperformance.

Creating RPPR data

1. Createanewsong,andchooseadrumprogramfor

track1.

2. AccesstheP10:Pattern/RPPR–RPPRSetuppage.

Inthispage,theRPPRfunctionisautomatically

turnedon.

3. Selectthekeywherethepatternwillbeassigned.

4. SelectC#2.

Youcanalsochangethissettingbyholdingdownthe

KEYeditcellandplayinganoteonthekeyboard.

Note: C2andlowerkeysareusedtostopplayback,

andcannotbeassignedpatterns.

5. Check“Assign”forC#2.

6. Set“PatternBank”toPreset,andset“Pattern

Select”toP001.

7. Set“Track”toTrack01.

Theselectedpatternwillbeplayedaccordingtothe

settings(program,etc.)ofthetrackyouselecthere.

8. Assignpatternstootherkeys.

For“KEY,”presstheINCbuttontoselectD2.

9. PresstheRevertbutton.

TheAssign,PatternBank,PatternSelect,andTrack

settingswillbegiventhepreviously(steps5–7)

specifiedvalues.

10. Choose“PatternSelect,”andpresstheINC

buttontoselectP002.

ByusingRevertinthisway,youcanworkefficiently

whenassigningcontiguous(ornearby)pattern

numbersortracks.

•Asdescribedabove,assignseveralotherpatterns

suchasP003andhigher.

11. PresstheC#2key.

Theassignedpatternwillplay.

12. TakeyourfingerofftheC#2key,andpresstheD2

key.

Thepatternwillchange,andplaybackwillbegin.At

thistime,thepatternoperationwilldependonthe

SyncandModesetting.

13. SetKEYtoC#2,andsetSynctoMeasure.Make

thesamesettingforD2.

Nowpressthenotesconsecutively.Noticethatthe

patternsfunctioninadifferentway.

WiththeMeasuresetting,patternswillbehandledin

one‐measureunits.Thesecondandsubsequent

patternswillstartinsyncwiththeendofpatternthat

waspreviouslyplayed.

IfyouchangetheModesettingtoOnce,theentire

patternwillplaybacktotheendevenifyourelease

yourfingerfromthekeyboardimmediately.

•Tostopplayback,eitherpressthesamekeyonce

again,orpresstheC2orlowerkey.

FordetailsonSync,Mode,andShift,pleasesee

page 158oftheParameterGuide.

•Theassignedkeysarealsoshowninthekeyboard

graphicinthedisplay.

•Keyswherenopatternsareassignedcanbeplayed

normally.UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackyou

wanttoplay.Forexampleyoucouldassignbacking

patternsfordrumsorbasstokeysC#2–B2anduse

thesekeystocontrolthepatternplayback,while

usingthekeysC3andabovetoplayasolo

performanceinrealtime.It’sagoodideatokeep

yourRPPRassignmentswithinaspecificrangeof

keys.

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

72

RPPR playback

Let’susetheRPPRpatternthatyoucreatedtoperform

intheP0:Play/REC–ProgramT01–08page.

1. AccesstheP0:Play/REC–ProgramT01–08page.

2. Checkthe“RPPR”checkbox.

TheRPPRfunctionwillbeturnedon.SettheRPPRon/

offforeachsong.

3. Playthekeyboard,andpatternswillbeginplaying

accordingtotheRPPRsettings.

IfyouwanttoplayRPPRphrasesfromanexternal

MIDIdevice,youcancontrolthemontheMIDI

channelofthetrackthat’sselectedinTrackSelect.

•PatternplaybackforkeyswheretheSyncsettingis

BeatorMeasurewillsynchronizetothepattern

playbackoftheveryfirstkeyplayed.

•Ifyouareplayingthepatterninsynchronization

(whenSyncisBeat,Measure,orSEQ),thepattern

willstartaccuratelyifyouplaythenoteslightly

earlierthanthetimingofthebeatormeasure.Even

ifyouplaythenoteslightlylaterthanthebeator

measure(butnolaterthana32ndnote),itwillbe

consideredtohavestartedatthebeatormeasure,

andthebeginningofthepatternwillbe

compressedsothattheremainderoftheplayback

willbecorrect.

4. ToturnofftheRPPRfunction,unchecktheRPPR

checkbox.

Play RPPR while a song plays back

RPPRcanbeplayedinsynchronizationwiththe

playbackofasong.

PatternplaybackforakeywithaSyncsettingofSEQ

willsynchronizetotheplaybackofthesong.Startthe

songplayback,andthenpressthekey.Thepattern

playbackwillstartinsynchronizationwiththe

measuresofthesong.

SynchronizationwillbelostifyouusetheREW

()orFF()buttonswhileasongisplaying.

Note: IfyouwantRPPRpatternplaybacktobeginat

themomentthatsongplaybackbegins,itisagood

ideatoinsertanemptymeasurecontainingnomusical

databeforethesongplaybackbegins.

Note: Ifthesongisstopped,thepatternwill

synchronizetothetimingofthearpeggiator.

Realtime-recording an RPPR

performance

Youcanrecordtherealtimeperformancegeneratedby

RPPR.

Recording an RPPR performance

TheRPPRplaybackcanberecordedasperformance

dataonthetrack(s)assignedtoeachpattern.This

meansthatyou’lluseeithersingletrackrecordingor

multi‐trackrecording,asappropriateforthetrack

settingsorperformancestyleoftheRPPRyou’re

playing.

Ontheotherhand,evenifRPPRusesonlyonetrack,

usemulti‐trackrecordingifyouwillberecording

anothertrackatthesametime.

Youshouldalsoselectmulti‐trackrecordingifyou

specifiedtheRPPRdatausingmultipletracksrather

thanjustasingletrack,andwanttosimultaneously

recordtheperformanceofmultipletracks.

Here’showyoucanrecordanRPPRperformanceand

akeyboardperformanceatthesametime.Beforeyou

continue,usetheP0:Play/REC–ProgramT01–08page

toassignadrumprogramtoMIDItrack1,andabass

programtoMIDItrack2.

1. AssignseveralkeysstartingwithC#2topreset

patterns.

ChecktheC#2Assignsetting,andsetPatternBankto

PresetandPatternSelecttothedesiredpresetpattern.

ForTrack,selectMIDItrack1(Track01)towhichyou

assignedadrumprogram.

2. ForeachRPPRpattern,setSynctoSEQ.

WithasettingofSEQ,RPPRpatternstriggeredwhile

thesequencerisplayingorrecordingwillstartin

synchronizationwiththemeasuresofthesequencer.

(Seepage 158oftheParameterGuide.)

3. AccesstheP0:Play/REC–ProgramT01–08page.

4. Checkthe“RPPR”checkbox,andsetTrackSelect

toMIDITrack02.

IftheRPPRcheckboxisselected,theRPPRfunction

willbeturnedoneveninpagesandtabsotherthan

RPPRSetup,allowingyoutoperformwiththeRPPR

functionbypressingakeytowhichanRPPRis

assigned.

Note: InthenoterangeC#2andabove,keystowhich

nopatternhasbeenassignedcanbeplayedtosound

theprogramoftheMIDItrackselectedbyTrack

Select.

RPPR On

Creating an RPPR pattern Realtime-recording an RPPR performance

73

5. SinceyouwantthetracksyouplayviaRPPRand

thetrackyouplayfromthekeyboardtobe

recordedatthesametime,checktheMultiREC

checkbox.

Note: IfRecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks,it

willnotbepossibletoselectMultiREC.Setthe

RecordingSetuptoOverwrite(seepage 60).

6. PresstheSEQUENCERREC(●)buttontoenter

record‐readymode.

7. Forthetracksyouwillberecording(MIDITrack1,

2),pressPlay/Rec/Mutetomakethemindicate

REC.

Makesurethatthetracksyou’renotrecordingare

indicatedasPlayorMute.

8. PresstheLOCATE()buttontosetthelocation

to001:01.000.

9. PresstheSTART/STOP()button,andthen

pressakeythatplaysanRPPRpattern.

ThenpressthekeywheretheRPPRpatternplaybackis

assigned.

IfthekeywheretheRPPRisassignedispressed

duringthepre‐countbeforerecording,RPPRpattern

playbackwillstartthemomentthatrecordingbegins

afterthepre‐count.

RecordtheRPPRpatternplaybackandkeyboard

performance.

Whenrecordingtheplaybackofpatternstriggered

byRPPR,thetimingoftherecordedeventsmaybe

slightlyskewed.Ifthisoccurs,trysettingREC

ResolutiontoasettingotherthanHi.

10. Whenyouarefinishedperforming,pressthe

START/STOP()button.

Recordingwillend,andthesequencerwillreturnto

thelocationwhererecordingbegan.

Ifyoumadeamistakeduringyourperformanceor

wouldliketore‐record,youcanusetheCompare

function(presstheCOMPAREbutton)tore‐recordas

manytimesasyouwish.

11. Ifyouwanttorecordothertracks,un‐checkthe

MultiREC(Seestep5)or“RPPR”(Seestep4)

checkboxesasnecessary.

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

74

Creating and playing a Cue List

Acuelistallowsyoutoplaymultiplesongsin

succession.Youcancreatetheindividualsectionsofa

song,suchastheintro,melodyA,melodyB,chorus,

andending,andthenuseaCueListtoassemblethese

sectionsintoasongbyspecifyingthedesiredorder

andthenumberofrepetitionsforeachsection.Youcan

theneditthecuelisttoefficientlytryoutdifferent

structuresforyoursong.

Youcanalsousethisasajukeboxfunctionthatwill

playbackcompletedsongsintheorderyouspecify.

Creating a cue list

Eachunitinacuelistiscalleda“step,”andeachstep

containsasongnumberandthenumberofrepeats.

Forexample,supposeyou’vecreatedthesongsS000:

INTRO,S001:VERSE,andS002:CHORUS.Let’susea

cuelisttoconnectthesesongstogether.

1. AccesstheSeqP11:CueListpage.

Withthedefaultsettings,songS000willbeselectedfor

“Step”01,andEndwillbeselectedfor“Step”02.

2. AddasongtotheSteparea.

Selectthe“Song”forStep02,andpresstheInsert

button.Asongwillbeaddedtostep02.Pressthe

popupbutton,andthenchooseS001:VERSEfromthe

list.

Inthesameway,selecttheStep03“Song,”andpress

theInsertbuttontoaddasongtoStep03.Setthisto

S002:CHORUS.

WhenyoupresstheCutbutton,theselectedstepwill

bedeletedandtemporarilysaved.Whenyoupressthe

Insertbutton,thesongthatwascutwillbeinsertatthe

selectedstep.

IfyoupresstheCopybutton,theselectedstepwillbe

copied.IfyoupresstheInsertbutton,thecopiedstep

willbeinserted.

3. SetthelaststeptoEnd.

IfyousetthistoContinuetoStep01,thecuelistwill

playbackrepeatedly.

4. In“Repeat,”specifythenumberoftimesthatthe

songforthatstepwillberepeated.Forthis

example,setStep02S001:VERSEto02.

5. Specifywhethereffectsettingswillalsobe

switchedwhenthesongateachstepisplayed

back.Ifyouwanteffectsettingstochange,check

the“LoadFX?”checkbox.

Forthisexample,checkthe“LoadFX?”checkboxfor

Step01,whichloadstheeffects.

6. Toplaybackatthetempothatwasspecifiedfor

eachsong,set“TempoMode”toAuto.

IfthisissettoManu(Manual),playbackwillusethe

tempospecifiedby“=”.

7. WhenyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP

()buttonh,playbackwillbeginfromthe

stepthatisspecifiedasthe“CurrentStep.”

•Step:Thearrowwillindicatethestepthat’s

currentlyplaying.indicatesthecurrentlyselected

“Step.”TheSongPositionBarlocatedbelowthe

songnameshowstheprogressionofthesong

withinthestep.Whilestopped,youcanspecifythe

CurrentStepandthedisplaywillchange

accordingly.

•M****:Indicatesthestartingmeasureofthatstep.

•Meter:Indicatesthecurrently‐playingtime

signature.Thiscannotbechanged.

•Thenameofacuelistcanbespecifiedbythe

RenameCueListmenucommand.

•Whenyouplaythekeyboard,theprogramofthe

trackselectedbyTrackSelectwillsound.Ifa

differentprogramisselectedforeachsong,the

Step Song Repeat

S000: Intro

S001: A

S002: B

S003: Chorus

S001: A

01

02

03

04

05

06 S002: B

02

02

01

02

02

01

S003: Chorus

S001: A (Solo)

S003: Chorus

S004: Ending

07

08

09

10

02

01

03

02

Cue List

Intro Intro A A B Chorus

Chorus AAB Chorus Chorus

A(Solo) Chorus Chorus Chorus Ending Ending

Song Position Bar

Saving your song Converting a cue list to a song

75

programthat’sspecifiedforthesongthat’s

currentlyplayingwillplay.

Converting a cue list to a song

TheConverttoSongmenucommandletsyouconvert

acuelisttoasinglesong.

Fordetails,pleasesee“ConverttoSong(ConvertCue

ListtoSong)”onpage 189oftheParameterGuide.

Saving your song

Inordertoensurethatthedatayoucreateis

reproducedfaithfully,werecommendthatyousave

yourdatabyusingSaveAllsothattheprogramswill

alsobesaved.Howeverifyouhavenotchangedthe

programnumbersorsoundsusedinyoursong,saving

onlythesong‐relateddata(.SNG)willminimizethe

sizeofthedata.

Whenyouturnoffthepower,theSequencermode

settings,therecordedsongs,andtheuserpattern

datawillbelost.

1. InsertanSDcardintheSDcardslot.

Withthecardlabelfacingupward,inserttheconnector

endofthecardintotheSDcardslotandpressitin

untilyouhearaclick.

Makesurethatthecardisorientedcorrectlywhen

youinsertit.Forcingitinthewrongdirectionmay

damagetheslotorthecard,andthedatamaybe

lost.

2. PresstheWRITEbutton.

TheSaveSongsandCueListsDatadialogboxwill

appear.Ifyouwanttochangethename,adjustthe

appropriatesettings(seepage 117).

3. PresstheWRITEbuttononceagaintosave(write)

thedata.

Ifdataofthesamenamealreadyexists,asmessagewill

askwhetheryouwanttooverwritetheexistingdata.If

youwanttooverwritetheexistingdata,presstheOK

button.

Ifthesave‐destinationdirectoryissomething

otherthanaDOSdirectory(e.g.,ifyou’reina

directoryshownbyopeninga.PCGor.SNGfile),

amessagesuchas“File/pathnotfound”will

appear,andyouwon’tbeabletosavethedata.If

thisoccurs,movetoMediamode,selectthe

appropriatesave‐destination(i.e.,aDOS

directory),andthenexecute“SaveAll”or“Save

SEQ.”

Saving a template song

Ifyouwanttheprograms,trackparameters,effect

settings,andarpeggiatorsettingsetc.usedbyasongto

besavedasaTemplatesong,usetheSaveTemplate

Songmenucommandtosavethesesettings.

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

76

77

Using Effects

An overview of the KROME’s effects

Youcanchoosefrom193differenttypesofhigh‐

qualitydigitaleffects.TheKROMEprovidesfiveinsert

effects,twomastereffects,andonetotaleffect,together

withamixersectionthatcontrolstheroutingofthese

effects.Allofthesearestereoin/out.

Specificparametersoftheseeffectscanalsobe

controlledinrealtimefromtheKROME’scontrollers

orviaMIDImessagesusingDynamicModulation

(Dmod),byMIDI/TempoSync,orbyusingacommon

LFOtoapplysynchronizedchangestomultiple

modulationeffects.

Effect I/O

Insert Effects

InsertEffects(IFX1–5)arestereo‐in/stereo‐out.Ifyou

selectDry(unprocessed)fortheWet/Dryparameter,

thestereoinputsignalwillbeoutputinstereowithout

beingprocessedbytheeffect.IfyouselectWet(effect

applied),theprocessedsignalwillbeoutputinoneof

thefollowingways:

Master Effects

MasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2arestereo‐in/stereo‐

out.Send1andSend2determinethesendleveltothe

MasterEffects.

WithMastereffects,onlytheWet(processed)signal

willbeoutput.TheoutputsignalsfromtheMaster

EffectsareroutedtotheL/Rbuswiththeoutputlevel

specifiedbyReturn1andReturn2.Theseoutput

signalsaremixedwiththeoutputsignalsfromthebus

specifiedbyBus(IFX/Output)Select(P8–Routing

pageineachmode)L/R,orwiththeoutputsignals

fromthebusspecifiedbyBus(IFX/Output)Select(P8–

InsertFXSetuppageineachmode)L/R,thenroutedto

thetotaleffect.

Selecting“000:NoEffect”willmutetheoutput.The

processedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowing

ways,accordingtothetypeofeffects.

Total Effect

Thetotaleffect(TFX)isstereo‐in/stereo‐out.TheDry

(unprocessed)sideoftheWet/Dryparametersendsthe

stereoinputsounddirectlytothestereooutput.The

waythattheWet(processed)sideisoutputdependson

thetypeofeffect,asfollows.

Note: TheParameterGuideincludesblockdiagrams

foreachindividualeffect,whichincludetheeffect’s

input/outputstructure.(Seepage 251oftheParameter

Guide)

Stereo In - Stereo Out

Mono In - Mono Out

Mono In - Stereo Out

Eect

Eect

Eect

+

Eect

+

Wet

Stereo In - Stereo Out

Mono In - Mono Out

Mono In - Stereo Out

Eect

Eect

Eect

+

Eect

+

Wet

Stereo In - Stereo Out

Mono In - Mono Out

Mono In - Stereo Out

Eect

Eect

Eect

+

Eect

+

Wet

Using Effects

78

Effects in each mode

Program mode

Forprograms,youcanuseinserteffectstoprocessthe

finalsoundinthesamewaythatyouusetheFilter,

Driver,Amplifier,andEQ(equalizer)toprocessthe

soundfromtheoscillators(OSC1&2).Next,the

mastereffectsareusedtocreateoverallambiencesuch

asreverb,andyouusethetotaleffecttomakefinal

adjustments.Youcanapplyaneffectinthesameway

totheoutputofadrumtrackprogram.Allofthese

settingscanbemadeindependentlyforeachprogram.

Combination and Sequencer modes

InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusethe

trackEQandinserteffectstoprocessthesoundofeach

timbre/trackprogram.Thenyoucanusethemaster

effectstocreateoverallambience,andusethetotal

effecttomakefinaladjustments.

InCombinationmode,youcanadjustthesesettingsfor

eachcombination,andinSequencermodeyoucan

adjustthemforeachsong.

InSequencermode,youcanswitchbetweeneffectsor

modifytheeffectparametersandrecordthesechanges,

sothateffectswillswitchautomaticallyoreffect

parameterswillbemodifiedautomaticallyasthesong

playsback.

Programmode

Oscillator1 Filter1 Driver1 Amplier1

Oscillator2 Filter2 Driver2 Amplier2 EQ

EQ

Insert Eect 1–5

Drum Track

Total Eect

Master Eect 1, 2 Return

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Send

CombinationandSequencermodes

Timbre 1 /MIDI Track 1 EQ

Timbre 16 /MIDI Track 16 EQ

Insert Eect 1–5 Total Eect

Master Eect 1, 2 Return

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Send

Routing effect settings Program Effects settings

79

Routing effect settings

Theinserteffects,mastereffects,andtotaleffecthave

thesamestructureinallmodes,buttherouting

settingswilldeterminehowtheoscillatorsofa

programorthetimbresofacombinationortrackofa

songwillbesenttoeachinserteffect,mastereffector

totaleffect.Inthepagesthatfollow,wewillexplain

howyoucanadjustroutingsettingsandeffectsettings

ineachmode.

Program Effects settings

Routing

1. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFX–Routingpage.

2. UseBus(IFX/Output)Selecttospecifythebus

wheretheoscillatoroutputwillbesent.Ifyou

wanttheoscillatoroutputtobeinputtoinsert

effect1,chooseIFX1.

L/R:Theoutputwillnotbesenttothetotaleffect.After

bypassingthetotaleffect,thesoundwillbesentto

AUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandR.

IFX1–5:TheoutputwillbesenttoinserteffectIFX1–5.

Off:Choosethisifyouwantthesignaltobeconnected

inseriestothemastereffectsatthesendlevels

specifiedbySend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2).

3. OSCMFXSendspecifiesthesendlevelfromeach

oscillatortothemastereffects.

ThiscanbesetonlywhenBus(IFX/Output)Selectis

eitherL/RorOff.

IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX1–5,thesend

leveltothemastereffectsissetbySend1andSend2

(InsertFXSetuppage)afterthesignalpassesthrough

theinserteffects.

4. FXControlBussendstheoutputofoscillator1and

2totheFXControlbus.Usethisifyouwantthe

audioinputtotheeffecttobecontrolledbya

differentsound.

YoucanusethetwoFXControlbusestocontroleffects

freely.Fordetails,pleasesee“FXControlBuses”on

page 238oftheParameterGuide.

Insert effects

5. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFX–InsertFXSetup

page.

6. Choosetheeffecttypethatyouwanttousefor

eachinserteffectIFX1–5.

Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,alleffectswillbe

displayed,organizedintotencategories.Usethepages

locatedtotheleftandrighttoselectacategory,and

chooseaneffectfromthedesiredcategoryonthe

display.

YoucanusetheCopyInsertEffectmenucommandto

copyeffectsettingsfromanotherprogrametc.Also,

youcanuseSwapInsertEffecttoexchange(for

example)IFX1andIFX5.

7. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnontheinsert

effect.

Eachtimeyoupressthisbutton,theinserteffectwill

toggleon/off.WhenOff,theresultwillbethesameas

when000:NoEffectisselected;thesoundwillbe

outputwithoutbeingprocessedbytheinserteffect.

8. MakeChainsettings.

IftheChaincheckboxischecked,theinserteffectwill

beconnectedinseries.Sincetheoutputoftheoscillator

isbeingsenttoIFX1instep2,adjustingsettingsas

showninthediagramabovestep6,wouldconnectall

fiveinsertioneffectsIFX1IFX2IFX3inseries,so

thattheseeffectswouldbeinsertedintotheoutputof

theoscillator.

9. AdjustsettingsforPan:#8,Bus(BusSelect),Send

1,Send2andFXCtrlforthesoundafterithas

passedthroughtheinserteffects.

Ifyou’vespecifiedachain,thesettingsthatfollowthe

lastIFXinthechainwillbevalid(exceptforFXCtrl).

Pan:#8:SetsthepanoftheIFXoutput.

Bus(BusSelect):Specifiestheoutputdestination.

NormallyyouwillsetthistoL/R.

Send1,Send2:Setsthesendlevelstothemaster

effects.Forthisexample,setthisto127.

FXControlBus:TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreate

effects“sidechains.”Sidechainsletyoucontrolan

effectwithoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),whilethe

effectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudiosignal.

Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders,compressors

andlimiters,gates,etc.Fordetails,pleasesee“FX

ControlBuses”onpage 238oftheParameterGuide.

Using Effects

80

10. AccesstheP8:Routing/IFX–InsertFXSetuppage,

andedittheparametersoftheinserteffectyou

selected.

PresstheIFX1–5tabsandedittheparameters.

Effect1On/Off:Turnstheinserteffecton/off.Thisis

linkedwiththeon/offsettingontheInsertFXSetup

page.

P(EffectPreset):Selectsaneffectpreset.TheKROME’s

internalmemorycontains“effectpresets”whichare

parametersettingsforeacheffectfrom001:Stereo

Compressorthrough193:EarlyReflections.

Effectparametersyoueditaresavedaspartofeach

program,buteffectpresetsallowyoutosaveandrecall

yourfavoriteparametersettingsforeacheffect.If

you’vecomeupwithaneffectsettingyoulike,usethe

menucommandWriteFXPresettosaveitasapreset

sothatyoucaneasilyrecallitinadifferentprogramor

mode.

Fordetailsontheparametersofeacheffect,see

page 251andfollowingintheParameterGuide.

Double-size effects

Double‐sizeeffects(172:St.MltbandLimiter–193:

EarlyReflections)usetwiceasmuchspaceasother

effects.

Youcanusedouble‐sizeeffectsforinserteffectsIFX1–

IFX4andmastereffectMFX1.However,becauseit

takesuptwounitsofeffectspower,thenext‐numbered

effectwillbeunavailable.Forexample,ifyou’ve

selectedadouble‐sizeeffectforIFX1,youwon’tbeable

touseIFX2.Ifyou’veselectedadouble‐sizeeffectfor

MFX1,youwon’tbeabletouseMFX2.

Anexampleofwhenadouble‐sizeeffectisselectedforIFX1

andIFX4

Master effects

11. Theinputlevelstothemastereffectsaresetby

theSend1,2levels(step3or9).IfSend1,2are

zero,themastereffectswillnotapply.Send1

correspondstoMFX1,andSend2correspondsto

MFX2.

12. AccesstheProgP9:MFX/TFX/LFO–Routingpage.

13. InMFX1andMFX2,selectthetypeofeachmaster

effect.

Theprocedureisthesameaswhenselectinganinsert

effect(seestep6).

Note: Youcanonlyselectadouble‐sizeeffectfor

MFX1.Fordetails,pleasesee“Double‐sizeeffects,”

above.

14. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnonthemaster

effect.

Eachtimeyoupressthisbutton,themastereffectwill

toggleon/off.WhenOff,theoutputofthemastereffect

willbemuted.

15. UseReturn1andReturn2toadjusttheoutput

levelsofthemastereffects.

Note: Foreacheffect,theWetvalueoftheWet/Dry

parameteristheoutputleveloftheeffect.Thereturn

valueismultipliedwiththis(“Return”=127willbe

x1.0)todeterminetheactualoutputlevelofthemaster

effect.

16. SelecttheMFX1andMFX2pages,andsetthe

parametersforeachselectedeffect.

Fordetailsonthe“ProgramEffectssettings”step10.

Total Effect

17. IfyouuseBus(IFX/Output)SelecttochooseL/R

astheoscillatoroutput,orifyousetthepost‐IFX

BustoL/R,thesignalwillbeinputtothetotal

effect.

Theoutputfromthemastereffectisinputtothetotal

effectviatheReturn1andReturn2settingsoftheProg

P9:MFX/TFX/LFO–Routingpage.

Afterbeingprocessedthroughthetotaleffect,the

signalisoutputfromtheAUDIOOUTPUTL/MONO

andRoutputs.

18. AccesstheProgP9:MFX/TFX/LFO–Routingpage.

19. ChoosethedesiredtotaleffectforTFX.The

procedureisthesameaswhenselectinganinsert

effect.(Seestep6)

Youcan’tuseadouble‐sizeeffectasthetotaleffect.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Double‐sizeeffects,”above.

P (Eect Preset)

Eect Parameters

Eect On/O

Wet/Dry

Routing effect settings Using effects in Combinations and Songs

81

20. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnthetotaleffecton.

Thetotaleffectwilltoggleon/offeachtimeyoupress

thebutton.IfthisisOff,theresultwillbethesameasif

000:NoEffectisselected.Theinputsoundwillbe

outputwithoutbeingprocessedbythetotaleffect.

21. AccesstheTFXpage,andedittheparametersof

eacheffecttoadjustthefinalsoundasdesired.

Fordetailsonthe“ProgramEffectssettings”,seestep

10.

Using effects in Combinations

and Songs

InCombination,andSequencermodes,youcan

specifytheroutingofeachtimbre/tracktotheinsert

effects,mastereffectsandtotaleffect.Thesesettings

areadjustedinthesamewayineachofthesemodes.

WewillbeusingtheexampleofCombinationmodein

ourexplanationhere.

Routing

1. AccesstheCombiP8:Routing/IFX–RoutingT01–

08page.

2. Use“Bus(IFX/Output)Select”tospecifythebus

whereeachtimbrewillbeoutput.ChooseIFX1if

youwanttosendtheoutputofatimbretoinsert

effect1.

Therouting,inserteffects,andchainsettingsare

showngraphicallyontheupperpartofthepage.In

thisexample,T01(timbre1)usesIFX1and2.T02uses

IFX2,T03usesIFX3and4,T02andT05useIFX4,and

T06andT07useIFX5.

3. UseSend1andSend2tospecifythesendlevelof

eachtimbretothemastereffects.

ThiscanbesetonlyifBus(IFX/Output)Selectissetto

L/RorOff.

Note: Theactualsendlevelisdeterminedby

multiplyingthisbytheSend1orSend2settingsfor

oscillators1and2withintheprogramselectedbythe

timbre.IftheprogramparameterSend1orSend2is

setto0,theresultinglevelwillstillbe0evenifyou

raisethissendlevel.

IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX1–5,thesend

levelstothemastereffectsaresetbySend1andSend2

(InsertFXSetuppage)followingtheinserteffects.

4. PresstheFXControl1–8tabstoaccesstheFX

ControlT01–08pages.

Bus(IFX/Output)SelectisthesameasintheRouting

T01–08page.Youcansetitfromeitherpage.

FXControlBussendstheoutputofthetimbretoanFX

Controlbus.Usethiswhenyouwanttheaudioinput

toaneffecttobecontrolledbyanothersound.There

aretwoFXControlbuses,whichgivesyouagreatdeal

offreedomforcontrollingeffectsfreely.Fordetails,

pleasesee“FXControlBuses”onpage 238ofthe

ParameterGuide.

Insert effects

5. AccesstheCombiP8:Routing/IFX–InsertFX

Setuppage.

6. SelectaninserteffectinIFX1–5andeditthe

settings.

7. AccesstheIFX1–5pagestoedittheindividual

effectparameters.

Thesesettingscanbeadjustedinthesameway.(See

page 79.)

YoucanuseMIDItocontroldynamicmodulation

(Dmod)foreacheffect,thepost‐IFXpan(CC#8),

andSend1andSend2levels.

Anasterisk“*”isshownattherightofCh01–Ch16

forthechannelnumberoftracksroutedtoIFX.If

you’veroutedmultipletracksthathavedifferent

MIDIchannelsettings,thisspecifiesthechannel

onwhichtheywillbecontrolled.

Master effects and Total effect

Thesesettingscanbeadjustedinthesamewayason

page 80.

YoucancontroltheseeffectsviaMIDIonthe“Ctrl

Ch.”ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillcontrol

dynamicmodulation(Dmod)fortheMasterand

TotalEffect.

Using Effects

82

Dynamic modulation, Common FX LFO

Dynamic modulation (Dmod)

Dynamicmodulation(Dmod)letsyouuseMIDI

messagesortheKROME’scontrollerstomodulate

specificeffectparametersinreal‐time.

Dynamic modulation to control an effect pa-

rameter in realtime

Asanexample,let’ssetupdynamicmodulationto

controlaneffectparameterinrealtime.

1. Asdescribedintheprocedurefor“Program

Effectssettings”onpage 79,setIFX1to078:L/C/R

BPMDelay.Verif ythatyou’rehearingadelay

effect.

2. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFX–IFX1page.

Now, we can set the Dmod to change the delay

level via the Joystick

3. SetInputLevelD‐modto+100.

4. SetSourcetoJS+Y:#01.

Thedelaysoundwilldisappear.

Theinputleveltotheeffectcanbecontrolledbythe

joystick.Asyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourself,

thedelaysoundwillgraduallyincrease.

In addition, we can use Dmod to change the feed-

back level via SW1

5. IntheP1:Basic/Controllers–ControllersSetup

page,settheSW1functiontoSW1Mod.CC#80,

andtheModetoToggle.

ChooseP8:Routing/IFX–IFX1page.SettheFeedback

SrctoSW1:#80,andsetAmtto+30.

Whenyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourselfand

presstheSW1button,thefeedbacklevelwillincrease,

andthedelaysoundwillcontinueforalongertime.

TheAmtsettingspecifiesthefeedbacklevelthatwill

beineffectwhentheSW1buttonispressed.IfAmtis

setto–10,pressingtheSW1buttonwillreducethe

feedbacklevelto0.

Finally, we can use the MIDI/Tempo Sync

function to synchronize the delay time to the

arpeggiator tempo.

6. SetBPMtoMIDI.

7. ForL,C,andR,settheDelayBaseNoteandTimes

asdesired.

Forthisexample,setDelayBaseNoteto andTimes

tox1sothattheeffectwillbeeasilyunderstandable.

Thedelaytimewillrepeatatanintervalofa8thnote.

8. RotatetheTEMPOknob,andthedelaytimewill

change.

Whenyou(pushthejoystickawayfromyourselfand)

presstheSW1button,thefeedbacklevelwillrise,and

thedelayswillbecomelonger.

9. WhenyouturnontheARPbutton,arpeggiator

willbeginplaying.

Selectanydesiredarpeggiator.Whenyourotatethe

TEMPOknob,thedelaytimewillchangein

synchronizationwiththechangingtempoofthe

arpeggiator.

Dependingonthespecificdelayeffect,youmay

hearsomeunexpectednoiseifyouchangethe

tempowhilethedelayissounding.Thisisbecause

thedelaysoundbecomesdiscontinuous,andisnot

amalfunction.

Forsomeeffects,youcansynchronizetheLFO

frequencytothetempo.Settheeffectparameters

MIDISynctoOn,andBPMtoMIDI.Fordetails,

pleaseseepage 236oftheParameterGuide.

Dynamic modulation, Common FX LFO Common FX LFO

83

Common FX LFO

TwoCommonFXLFOsareavailableformodulation

effects,suchaschoruses,filters,phasers,etc.Normally,

thephaseoftheLFOsofmultiplemodulation‐type

effectswillnotbesynchronizedevenifyousetthemto

theidenticalFrequency,sincetheLFOsarebeing

generatedindependently.

However,ifyouselectCommon1orCommon2forthe

LFOTypeparameterofamodulation‐typeeffect,the

effectwillusetheoneofthecommonLFOsinsteadof

itsownindividualLFO.Thisallowsyoutouseasingle

CommonFXLFOtocontroltwoormoremodulation‐

typeeffectssuchasflanger,phaser,orauto‐panwith

thesamephase.Sinceyoucanmakeindependent

settingsforLFOwaveformandphaseoffsetforeach

effect,youarefreetocreatecomplexcombinationsof

effects.

Stereo Flanger

Common FX LFO1

Common FX LFO

Stereo Phaser

Stereo Auto Pan

Waveform = TriangleFrequency[Hz]

Reset Phase Oset = 0 [deg]

Waveform = Sine

Phase Oset = 0 [deg]

Waveform = Sine

Phase Oset = +90 [deg]

LFO Type = Common1

Generate original LFO waveform

Using Effects

84

85

Arpeggiator function

Using the arpeggiator while you play

Thearpeggiatorisafunctionthatautomatically

generatesarpeggios(patternsofindividualnotes

derivedfromachord).Mostarpeggiatorsproducean

arpeggiowhenyouplayachordonthekeyboard.

TheKROME’sarpeggiatorisalsopolyphonic,andcan

produceavarietyofchordaltransformationsor

phrasesbasedonthepitchortimingofthenotesyou

playonthekeyboard.Thesefunctionsletyouusethe

arpeggiatortoplayawiderangeofpatternsincluding

drumorbassphrases,andguitarorkeyboardbacking

riffs.Itisalsoeffectivetousethearpeggiatoraspartof

thesound‐designprocesswhencreatingsubtly‐

movingpads,synth‐sounds,orsoundeffects.

TheKROME’sDualArpeggiatorfeatureletsyouuse

twosimultaneousarpeggiopatternsinCombination

mode,andSequencermode.Youcantakeadvantageof

thisinmanyways,includingaseparatearpeggio

patternforadrumprogram,andanotherappliedtoa

bassprogram,orusingakeyboardsplitorvelocityto

switchbetweentwoarpeggiopatterns.

TheKROMEprovidesfivepresetarpeggiopatterns:

thestandardUP,DOWN,ALT1,ALT2,and

RANDOM.Youcanalsocreateandstore1,028ofyour

ownuserpatterns.Thefactorysettingscontainawide

varietyofarpeggiopatternsstoredintheseuser

locations(seepage 211oftheParameterGuide).

Using the arpeggiator in

Program mode

1. PressthePROGbuttontoenterProgrammode,

andselectaprogram.Fordetails,pleasesee

“SelectingPrograms”onpage 21.

2. PressARPbutton(theLEDwilllight)toturnon

thearpeggiator.Arpeggioswillbeginsounding

whenyouplaythekeyboard.

3. Asdescribedinthefollowingsections“Using

knobs1–4tocontrolthearpeggiator”and

“Selectinganarpeggiopatternandspecifyingits

function,”movethecontrollersormodifythe

parameterstochangethewaythatthearpeggios

areplayed.

Arpeggiator on/off

•EachtimeyoupresstheARPbutton,the

arpeggiatorwillbeswitchedon/off.

Whenthearpeggiatoristurnedon(theLEDwilllight

up)andtheselectedarpeggiopatternwillbeginwhen

youplaythekeyboard.

Note: Theon/offstatusissavedwhenyouwriteeach

program.

InCombinationandSongmodes,thearpeggios

maynotstartwhenyoupresstheARPbutton‐

dependingonthesavedsettings.Youmayneedto

playakeyboard(seepage 90).

Adjusting the arpeggiator tempo

• RotatetheTEMPOknoborTAPbutton

toadjustthetempo.

The“ =”displayintheupperrightof

theLCDwillchange.Thetempocanbe

adjustedoverarangeof40.00–300.00

bpm.TheLEDwillblinkintimewith

thespecifiedtempo.

AsanalternativetousingtheTEMPO

knoborTAPbutton,youcanalsosetthe

tempobyselecting“=”inthedisplay,

usingthenumerickeys0–9toenterthetempo,and

pressingtheENTERbutton.Youcanalsosetthe

tempobyusingtheVALUEcontrollers.TheLED

willblinkinsynchronizationwiththetempoyou

specify.

Note: Thetemposettingisalsosavedwhenyouwritea

program.

Note: Thearpeggioplaybackspeedisaffectedbythe

Resosetting(ProgP0:Play–Arpeggiatorpage),or

Resolution(P7:ARP/DT–ARPSetuppage).

IftheGlobalP1:MIDI–MIDIBasicpageMIDI

ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,External

USB,orsettoAutoandMIDIClockmessagesare

beingreceived,thedisplaywillindicate“=”EXT,

meaningthattheKROMEissynchronizedtoan

externalMIDIdevice.Inthiscase,youwon’tbe

abletochangethetempobyusingtheKROME.

The chord you played on

the keyboard is sounded as

an arpeggio (broken chord)

Arpeggiator function

86

Using knobs 1–4 to control the

arpeggiator

•Youcancontrolthearpeggiatorbypressingthe

SELECTbuttontoselectARPandthenturning

knobs1–4.

Adjusting the duration of the arpeggiated

notes

•Turnknob1toadjustthedurationofthe

arpeggiatednotes.

Rotatingtheknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthe

durationofthenotes,androtatingittowardthe

rightwilllengthenthedurationofthenotes.Atthe

centerposition(12o’clock),thenotelengthwillbe

asspecifiedbytheprogramparameter:Gate(Prog

P7:ARP/DT–ARPSetuppage).

Note: Theknobsettingissavedwhenyouwriteeach

program.

Note: ItiseffectivetousetheSELECTbuttontoselect

TONE,andthenadjustknob4(RELEASE).

Changing the dynamics of the arpeggiated

notes

•Turnknob2toadjustthedynamicsofthe

arpeggiatednotes.

Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillmakethe

notessofter,andturningittowardtherightwill

makethenotesstronger.Whentheknobisinthe

centerposition(12o’clock),thevalueofthepro‐

gramparameterVelocity(ProgP7:ARP/DT–Arp

Setuppage)willbeused.

Note: Thestateoftheknobissavedwhenyouwrite

theprogram.

Note: ItiseffectivetousetheSELECTbuttontoselect

TONE,andthenadjustknobs1(CUTOFF),2

(RESONANCE),and3(EGINT).

Adding a shuffle feel to the arpeggio pattern

•Ifyouturnknob3,thetimingofthearpeggiated

notesoneven‐numberedbeatswillbeshifted

forwardorbackward.

Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillspeedupthe

timingoftheeven‐numberedbeats.Whentheknob

isinthecenterposition(12o’clock),thetimingwill

beasspecifiedbytheprogramparameterSwing

(GlobalP6:ArpeggioPattern‐Setuppage).

Changing the number of steps in the

arpeggio pattern

•Byturningknob4(STEP),youcanchangethe

numberofstepsinthearpeggiopattern.

Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthe

patternlength(“Length”)byhalf.Turningtheknob

towardtherightwillshortentheintervalofthe

arpeggiatednotes(“Resolution”)byhalf.Whenthe

knobisinthecenterposition(12o’clock),thepat‐

ternwillbeasspecifiedbytheparametersLength

andResolution(GlobalP6:ArpeggioPattern–

Setuppage).

Ifthearpeggiopatternselectedby“Pat(Pattern

Select)”isoneofthepresetarpeggiopatternsP0–

P4,turningtheknobswillnotproduceany

change.Theseadjustmentsareavailableonlyifa

userarpeggiopatternU0000(INT)–U1027(USER)

isselected.

Note: Thestateoftheknobsissavedwhenyouwrite

theprogram.

Note: Dependingontheprogramthat’sselected,using

knob4maynotproduceanyeffect.

Selecting an arpeggio pattern and

specifying its function

IntheProgP0:Play–Arpeggiatorpageyoucanselect

anarpeggiopatternandspecifyhowthearpeggiator

willfunction.

•InProgP0:Play,presstheARPtabtoaccessthe

ProgP0:Play–Arpeggiatorpage.

Selecting an arpeggio pattern

Anarpeggiopatterncanbeselectedfrompreset

arpeggiopatternsP0–P4anduserarpeggiopatterns

U0000(INT)–U1027(USER).Thefactorysettings

U0000(INT)–U0899(INT),U0900(USER)–U1027(USER)

containawidevarietyofpreloadeduserarpeggio

patterns.

•ChoosePattern,andusetheVALUEdial,INC/DEC

buttons,andpopupmenutoselectanarpeggio

pattern.

Userarpeggiopatternscanalsobeselectedbyusing

thenumerickeys0–9toinputthepatternnumber

andthenpressingtheENTERbutton.

P0: UP

UP

Using the arpeggiator while you play Using the arpeggiator in Program mode

87

P1: DOWN

P2: ALT1

P3: ALT2

P4: RANDOM

Changing the note value of the arpeggiated

notes

TheResolutionparameterletsyousetthenotevalue

ofthearpeggiatednotes,overarangefrom  3 –.

•PressResolution,andusetheVALUEdial,INC/

DECbuttons,orpopupmenutoselectthedesired

arpeggionotevalue.

Selecting the octave range where the

arpeggio is sounded

Usethe“Octave”radiobuttonstospecifytherangeof

octaveswherethearpeggiowillplay.

•Pressan“Octave”radiobuttontomakeyour

selection.

Sounding an arpeggio in the order of the

pitches in the chord you played

Youcanselectwhetherthenotesofthearpeggiowill

besoundedintheorderofthepitchesinthechordyou

played(regardlessoftheorderinwhichyouactually

playedthenotes),orintheorderinwhichyouplayed

thenotes.

•Pressthe“Sort”checkboxinthedisplaytomake

thissetting.

Checked:thearpeggiowillplayeachnoteinthe

orderofitspitch,regardlessoftheorderinwhich

youactuallyplayedthenotes.

Unchecked:thearpeggiowilltriggereachnotein

theorderinwhichyouactuallyplayedthenotes.

Setting the arpeggio to continue playing

even after you have taken your hand off the

keyboard

Youcanselectwhetherthearpeggiowillcontinue

playingwhenyoutakeyourhandoffthekeyboard,or

whetherthearpeggiowillstop.

•Pressthe“Latch”checkboxtomakethissetting.

Checked:Thearpeggiowillcontinueplayingeven

afteryouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.

Unchecked:Thearpeggiowillstopplayingwhen

youremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.

Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your

keyboard timing

Youcanspecifywhetherthearpeggiowillbeginatthe

momentyouplaythekeyboard,orwhetheritwill

alwaysplayinsynchronizationtotheMIDIclock

tempo.

•Pressthe“KeySync.”checkboxtomakethis

setting.

Checked:Thearpeggiopatternwillstartfromthe

beginningwhenyoupressakey.Thissettingissuit‐

ablewhenyouwantthearpeggiotostartfromthe

beginningofthemeasureasyouareplayinginreal‐

time.

Unchecked:Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe

MIDIclocktiming.

Sounding both the arpeggio notes and the

notes you play

•Pressthe“Keyboard”checkboxtoadjustthis

setting.

Checked:Thenotesyouplayonthekeyboardand

thenotesplayedbythearpeggiatorwillbothbe

heard.

DOWN

ALT1

ALT2

RANDOM

Octave: 4

UP

ON, UP

Sort

OFF, UP

Sort

1324

Arpeggiator function

88

Unchecked:Onlythearpeggiatednoteswillsound.

Changing the duration of the arpeggiated

notes

TheP7:ARP/DT–ARPSetupGateparameterspecifies

thedurationofthearpeggiatednotes.Withasettingof

000–100(%),thedurationwillalwaysbethespecified

gatetime.Stepisavailableifyou’veselected

U0000(INT)–U1027(USER)asthePattern;thegate

valuespecifiedforeachstepwillbeused.

Youcanalsocontrolthisbyusingthearpeggiocontrol

(ARP)GATEknob(seepage 86).

Specifying the arpeggio pattern’s velocity

and other settings

InP7:ARP/DT–ARPSetup,theVelocityparameter

specifiesthevelocityofthearpeggiatednotes.Ifyou

chooseavalueintherangeof001–127,thatvelocity

valuewillalwaysbeused.IfyouchooseKey,the

velocityvalueofhowyouplayedthekeywillbeused.

Stepisavailableif“Pattern”issettoU0000(INT)–

U1027(USER);thiscausesthevelocityvaluespecified

foreachsteptobeused.

“Swing”offsetsthetimingofarpeggiatednotesthat

areeven‐numbered(countingfromthebeginning).

“Velocity”and“Swing”canbecontrolledbyknobs2

and3respectivelywhenSELECTissettoARP.

Specifying the zone where the arpeggiator

will function

InP7:ARP/DT–ARPScanZoneyoucanspecifythe

rangeofnotes(keys)andvelocitieswherethe

arpeggiatorwillfunction.

Using the arpeggiator in

Combination mode

InCombinationmodetheKROMEprovidesdual

arpeggiators,allowingyoutoruntwoarpeggio

patternssimultaneously.

1. InCombinationmode,selectacombination(see

“SelectingCombinations”onpage 43).

Asyouselectvariouscombinations,you’llnoticethat

theARPbuttonLEDwilllightupforsome

combinations(see“Linkingthearpeggiatorto

programsorcombinations”onpage 91).

Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thearpeggiatorwill

start.Evenforothercombinations,youcanturnthe

arpeggiatoronbypressingtheARPbutton(theLED

willlightup).

2. Listentohowthearpeggiocanbemodifiedas

describedinthe“Usingknobs1–4tocontrolthe

arpeggiator”(above)and“Selectinganarpeggio

patternandspecifyingitsfunction”sections

(below).

TheARPbutton,TEMPOknob,TAPbutton,and

controlsurfaceARPwillapplytoboth

arpeggiatorsAandB.Theirstateissavedwhen

thecombinationiswritten.

Selecting an arpeggio pattern and

adjusting settings

IntheCombiP0:Play–Arpeggiatorpageyoucan

selectanarpeggiopatternandspecifyhowthe

arpeggiatorwillfunction.

•InCombiP0:Play,presstheARPAtabortheARP

BtabtoselecttheCombiP0:Play–ArpeggiatorA

orBpage.

Select the arpeggiator(s) that will run

UsetheArpeggiatorRuncheckboxestospecifythe

arpeggiator(s)thatyouwanttohaverunning.The

arpeggiator(s)thatarecheckedherewillrunwhenthe

ARPbuttonison.However,thearpeggiatorwillonly

playatimbreifthetablenexttothecheckboxes

assignsarpeggiatorAorBtoatimbre:T1–16.You

changethesesettingsinCombiP7:ARP/DT–ARP

SetupT01–08,T09–16pageArpeggiatorAssign(see

page 90).

Timbre AssignArpeggiator Run

Using the arpeggiator while you play Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes

89

Arpeggiator-A, Arpeggiator-B

ForeacharpeggiatorAandB,youcanadjustsettings

forPattern(Select),Resolution,Octave,Sort,Latch,

KeySync,andKeyboard(seepage 86).

Checking the structure of a user arpeggio

pattern

Let’sseehowthecombination“A005:BoomPowPad”

(category:LeadSplits)isconstructed.

•Selectcombination“A005:BoomPowPad”

(category:LeadSplits),andlookattheArpeggio

PlayApageandArpeggioPlayBpage.

•In“TimbreAssign”you’llseethatarpeggiatorAis

assignedtotimbres1–5,andarpeggiatorBis

assignedtotimbres6and7.

Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thedrumprogramsof

timbres1–4willbesoundedbythearpeggiopattern

ofarpeggiatorA.(Timbre5isadummyprogram

usedtoplaytimbres1–4.Seepage 91.)

ArpeggiatorBwillsoundtheprogramsoftimbres6

and7.

•IfyouuncheckArpeggiatorRunAorArpeggiator

RunB,itwillstop.

Ifyoucheckitonceagainandplaythekeyboard,

thatarpeggiatorwillbeginrunning.

•WhenyouaccesstheCombiP7:ARP/DT–ARP

ScanZonepage,you’llseethattheB“TopKey”

and“BottomKey”parametersaresetsothat

arpeggiatorBwillrunonlyforthenotesB3and

below.ArpeggiatorAissettorunforanykey.

•Thedrumprogramsoftimbres1–4usethesame

arpeggiatorApattern,butsincethenotessounded

byeachtimbrearedividedbykeyzone,eachwill

playonlyaportionofthearpeggiatorpattern.Goto

theP0:Play–ProgramT01–08pageandtrymuting

eachtimbre1–4toheartheresult.Youcanadd

varietybyusingdifferentcombinationsoftimbres.

Arpeggiator settings in

Combination and Sequencer

modes

InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanuseuse

twoarpeggiopatternssimultaneously,thankstothe

KROME’sdualarpeggiatorfunctionality.Thesettings

ineachofthesemodesareadjustedinasimilarway.

Thefollowingexampleshowshowtoadjustsettingsin

Combinationmode.

Thedualarpeggiatorfunctionalityletsyoudothe

followingthings.

•Assignanarpeggiatorforeachtimbre.Choosefrom

Off,(arpeggiator)A,or(arpeggiator)B.☞step5

• IndependentlyspecifywhetherAandBwill

function.☞step6

•Selectanarpeggiopatternandsetparameters

independentlyforAandB.☞step7

• MakeScanZonepagesettingssothatyoucanuse

keyboardrangeorplayingvelocitytoswitch

betweennormalplayingandarpeggiatedplaying,

ortoswitchbetweenarpeggiatorsAandB.☞step8

• Makesettingsfortimbresthatwillbesilentwhen

thearpeggiatorisOff,andwillsoundonlywhen

thearpeggiatorisOn.☞step10

Arpeggiator function

90

Arpeggiator settings

1. SelectCombiP0:Play–ProgramT01–08page.

Selectprogramsforthetimbresthatyouwishtouse.

Forthisexample,selectanydesiredprogramfor

timbres1–4.

2. SelectCombiP3:TimbreParameters,MIDIT01–08

page.

Forthetimbresthatyouwillbeusing,setStatusto

INT,andsetMIDIChanneltoGchortotheglobal

MIDIchannel(setinGlobalP1:MIDIBasicMIDI

Channel).

Forthisexample,settimbres1–4toaStatusofINT,

andtimbres5–8toaStatusofOff.SettheMIDI

Channeloftimbres1–4toGch.

3. SelectCombiP7:ARP/DT–ARPSetupT01–08

page.

4. Set“(Temp)”tospecifythetempo.

Thisisthesameasforaprogram.However,thetempo

issharedbybotharpeggiatorsAandB.

5. Make“ArpeggiatorAssign”settings.

AssignarpeggiatorAorBtothedesiredtimbres.Each

timbrewillbeplayedbythearpeggiatorthathasbeen

assignedtoit.

6. Make“ArpeggiatorRun”settings.

Checkthearpeggiator(s)thatyouwanttorun.The

arpeggiator(s)checkedherewillrunwhentheARP

buttonisturnedon.

Withthesettingsshowninthedisplayforsteps2and

3,turningtheARPbuttononwillcausearpeggiatorA

torunfortimbres1and2,andarpeggiatorBtorunfor

timbre3.WhentheARPbuttonisturnedoff,timbres

1–4willsoundasalayer.

IfalltimbresAssignstatusaresettoOff,orif

ArpeggiatorRunAorBisunchecked,thearpeggiator

willnotfunction.

7. OntheArpeggiatorAandArpeggiatorBpages,set

theparametersforarpeggiatorsAandB.

TheparametersforAandBarethesameasfora

program(seepage 86).

8. IntheScanZoneA/Bpage,specifytherangein

whicharpeggiatorsAandBwillfunction.

TheparametersforAandBarethesameasfora

program.

Youcanusekeyboardrangesorvelocityrangestouse

oneorbothofthearpeggiators,ortoswitchbetween

arpeggiatorsAandB.ByusingtheCombiP4:Zone/

Delay–KeyZoneT01–08–T09–16page,andVelZone

T01–08–T09–16pagetosetkeyboardandvelocity

rangesinconjunctionwitheachother,youcancreate

evenmorevariations.

9. Ifyouwishtosavetheeditedcombination

settingsininternalmemory,turnoffmemory

protectinGlobalmode,andwritethecombination

(seepage 115andpage 117).

10. The“Status,”“MIDIChannel”and“Assign”

settingsshowninthedisplayofsteps2and3can

bemadesothatcertaintimbreswillsoundonly

whenthearpeggiatorisOn,andwillbesilent

whenthearpeggiatorisOff.

Combination A001: Bossa Rose (SW1/2)

(Category: Keyboard)

Althoughthisisasomewhatsophisticatedediting

technique,wewilldescribethesettingsofoneofthe

presetcombinationsasanexample.

Whenyouplayaspecificregionofthekeyboard,this

combinessettingsthatcausethearpeggiatortoplayan

arpeggiousingdifferentsoundsthanwhatʹsbeing

playedbythekeyboard,withothersettingsthatcause

thearpeggiatorsoundstoremaincompletelyunplayed

whenthearpeggiatorisoff.

Beforeyouplay,makesurethattheglobalMIDI

channel(GlobalP1:MIDIBasicMIDIChannel)isset

to01.

SelectcombinationA001:BossaRose(SW1/2),turnthe

ARPbuttonon,andplay.

• ArpeggiatorAisassignedtotimbre2and16.When

youplaythekeyboard,thebassriffarpeggio

patternwillsoundthetimbre2program.

•TheABottomKeyandTopKey(CombiP7:ARP/

DT–ARPScanZonepage)aresetsothat

arpeggiatorAwillfunctiononlyfornotesB3and

lower.

• ArpeggiatorAisalsoassignedtotimbre16,butthis

issothatthetimbre2programwillsoundonly

whenthearpeggiatorison.

Noticethetimbresettingsfortimbre2and16.

•Ifthearpeggiatorisoff,playingthekeyboardwill

soundthetimbre(s)thataresettoGchortothe

globalMIDIchannel(inthiscase,01).Sincethe

MIDIChanneloftimbre2issetto02,itwillnot

sound.Timbre16issettoGch,butsince“Status”is

Offitwillnotsound.

Timbre Status MIDI Channel Assign

2INT02 A

16 Off Gch A

Using the arpeggiator while you play Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations

91

•NotesfromanyMIDIchannelthatisassignedtoa

timbrewilltriggerthearpeggiator.Inthiscase,

thesewillbeMIDIChannel02andGch(global

MIDIchannel).Whenthearpeggiatorison,playing

thekeyboardwilltriggerarpeggiatorA,whichis

assignedtotimbre16(Gch).Timbre2willbe

soundedbyarpeggiatorA.SincetheStatusof

timbre16isOff,itwillnotsound.

•SincetheStatusoftimbre16isOff,itwillnot

sound,regardlessofwhetherthearpeggiatorison

oroff.Itisadummytimbrethatcausestimbre2to

soundonlywhenthearpeggiatorison.

Combination A005: Boom Pow Pad

(Category: Synth)

Beforeyouplay,makesurethattheglobalMIDI

channel(GlobalP1:MIDIBasicMIDIChannel)isset

to01.

SelectcombinationA005:BoomPowPad,turntheARP

buttonon,andplay.

•ArpeggiatorAisassignedtotimbres1–5,and

arpeggiatorBisassignedtotimbres6and7.When

youpressanynoteoftheentirekeyboard,thedrum

programsoftimbres1–4willbesoundedbythe

arpeggiopatternofarpeggiatorA.Whenyouplay

theB3oralowernoteonthekeyboard,thesynth

programsoftimbres6and7willbesoundedbythe

backingarpeggiopattern.

•T

hearpeggiatorAparameters“BottomKey”and

“TopKey”(CombiP7:ARP/DT–ARPScanZone

page)aresetsothatarpeggiatorAwillrunforthe

entirekeyboard.

•TheBBottomKeyandTopKey(CombiP7:ARP/

DT–ARPScanZonepage)aresetsothat

arpeggiatorsBwillfunctiononlyforthenoteB3

andbelow.

•ArpeggiatorAisassignedtotimbre5aswell,but

thissettingissothatthetimbre1to4programwill

soundonlywhenthearpeggiatorison.Refertothe

precedingsection“CombinationBossaRose(SW1/

2).”

Linking the arpeggiator to

programs or combinations

Youcanspecifywhetherthearpeggiatorsettings

writtentoaprogramorcombinationwillberecalled

whenyouswitchprogramsorcombinations,or

whetherthecurrentarpeggiatorsettingswillbe

maintained.

Withthefactorysettings,theformerisselected.Use

thelatterwhenyouwanttokeepthesamearpeggio

patternrunning,andchangeonlytheprogramsound.

Thissettingismadein“LoadARPwhenchanging”

(GlobalP0:BasicSetup,Basicpage).(Seepage 110)

Creating a user arpeggio

pattern

About user arpeggio patterns

ThepatternsthatcanbeselectedontheKROME’s

arpeggiatorarecalled“arpeggiopatterns.”Thereare

twotypesofarpeggiopatterns:presetarpeggio

patternsanduserarpeggiopatterns.

Presetarpeggiopatterns:

Therearefivepatterns;UP,DOWN,ALT1,ALT2,and

RANDOM.

Thefunctionalityofthesepatternsisfixed,andcannot

beedited.

Userarpeggiopatterns:

Thereare1028patterns‐U0000(INT)–U1027(USER)‐

whichcandevelopchordsorphrasesinawidevariety

ofways,basedonthepitchesthatyouplayonthe

keyboardorthetimingwithwhichyouplaythem.

InGlobalP6:ArpeggioPattern,Setupyoucanmodify

theseuserarpeggiopatterns,orcreateanewuser

arpeggiopatternfromaninitializedcondition.Edited

userarpeggiopatternscanbewrittentointernal

memoryareasU0000(INT)–U1027(USER)(see

page 221oftheParameterGuide).

InMediamode,youcanalsosaveuserarpeggio

patternstomedia.

Editing a user arpeggio pattern

Ifyouwanttoeditauserarpeggiopattern,you

mustfirstmakesurethatmemoryprotectis

unchecked.(Seepage 197oftheParameterGuide)

IfyouenterthismodefromtheProgrammode,your

editingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternspecifiedfor

theselectedprogram.

1. InProgrammode,selectaprogramwhichusesthe

arpeggiopatternyouwishtoedit,oraprogram

thatyouwishtouseasabasisforeditingthe

arpeggiopattern.

2. PresstheARPbuttontoturnthearpeggiatoron

(thebuttonwilllightup).

EvenifyouenteredGlobalmodefromaprogramin

whichthearpeggiatorwasturnedoff,youcanusethe

ARPbuttontoturniton.

3. SelecttheGlobalP6:ArpeggioPattern–Setup

page(seepage 211oftheParameterGuide).

Arpeggiator function

92

4. “ArpeggiatorSelect”willautomaticallybesettoA

whenyounavigatetothispagefromProgram

mode.

5. In“Pattern,”selectthearpeggiopatternthatyou

wishtoedit.

Forthisexample,selectanemptyuserarpeggio

pattern.

Ifablankpatternisselected,playingthekeyboard

willnotstartanarpeggio.Althoughpreset

arpeggiopatternsP0–P4canbeselected,they

cannotbeedited.

Whenyoueditauserarpeggiopattern,the

changeswillhaveaneffectanytimethatthis

patternisusedinProgram,Combination,orSong.

6. In“Length,”specifythelengthofthepattern.

Afterthepatternhasplayedforthelengthspecified,it

willreturntothebeginning.Thissettingcanalsobe

changedduringorafterediting.Forthisexample,setit

to08.

Setknob4(STEP)tothecenterposition(12

o’clock)sothatthevaluesofthe“Length”and

“Resolution”parameters(GlobalP6:Arpeggio

Pattern‐Setuppage)willbeused.

Note: ForthepreloadarpeggiopatternsU0000(INT)–

U0899(INT),simplychangingthe“Length”can

significantlychangethecharacterofthepattern.Try

changingthelengthandlisteningtotheresult.(See

“Length(PatternLength)”onpage 211ofthe

ParameterGuide.)

7. Makesettingsforthe“ (Tempo),”“Resolution,”

“Octave,”“Sort,”“Latch,”“KeySync.,”and

“Keyboard”parameters.

Theseareprogramparameters,buttheycanbeset

fromhereaswell.

IfafteraccessingthispagefromProgrammode,

youmodifytheseparametersandwishtokeep

yourchanges,returntoProgrammodeandwrite

theprogram.Theseparametersarenotsavedby

“WriteArpeggioPattern.”

Forthisexample,makethesettingsshowndisplaystep

3.

8. InArpeggioPatternSetup,specifyhowthe

arpeggiowillbedeveloped.

9. PressthebuttontoselectEditdialog.

ApatternconsistsofStepsandTones.

•Step:Eachuserarpeggiopatternhasupto48steps.

Startingwiththefirststep,thearpeggiatorwillplay

notesatintervalsofthenotevaluespecifiedby

Resolution.Theverticallinesofthegridindicate

thesteps.

UseSteptoselectthestep;thenspecifyPitchOff‐

set,Gate,VelocityandFlamforeachstep.

YoucanalsoselectthestepbypressingtheStepline

intheparameterviewatthebottom.Youcanalso

editbydraggingintheparameterview.

Pressthebuttontotheleftoftheparameterviewto

switchbetweenPitch(PitchOffset)→Gate(Gate)

→Vel.(Velocity)→Flam(Flam).

•Tone:Eachstepcansoundachordofupto12tones

(ToneNo.00–11).Bytouchinganddraggingthe

overviewontherightpartofthescreenorbyusing

thezoomscrollbuttonsaboveit,selectthelocation

forenteringtonesinthezoomviewbelow.Press

thetouchgridtoentertones.

WhenStepisselected,youcanalsoentertonesby

usingthenumerickeys0–9andthe“–”and“.”but‐

tons.

Note: TheToneNo.correspondstothenumerickeys

0–9andthe“–”and“.”buttonsasshownbelow.Each

timeyoupressanumerickey0–9ora“–”or“.”button,

thecorrespondingtonewillturnonoroff.The

horizontallinesofthegridinthecenterofthedisplay

correspondtotones.

Tone00–09:0–9buttons

Tone10:–button

Tone11:.button

Entering tones

Alternate:Setorresetthetone.

Pen(setonly):Setthetone.

Erase(resetonly):Resetthetone.

Tool:Opensthetooltablet.Thetooltabletletsyou

usevariouscommandsinaregionyou’vespecifiedin

theoverview,ortocopyandpaste(see“ToolTablet”

onpage 214oftheParameterGuide).

Creating an example pattern

1. Pressthealternatebutton.

2. Entertonesinthetouchgridasshowninthe

illustrationbelow.

Overview

Resolution Tone Input

Touch Grid

Parameter

View

Zoom Scroll

T

one No.

01 Step No.

Length: 8

05

Using the arpeggiator while you play Creating a user arpeggio pattern

93

3. Whenyouplaythekeyboardasshowninthe

illustration,thearpeggiatorwillbeginplaying.

Tone0correspondstothepitchofthelowestkeyof

chordyouplayonthekeyboard.(IfSortisunchecked,

itwillcorrespondtothepitchofthefirstnoteyou

play.)

4. Forsteps01–08,makesettingsfor“PitchOffset,”

“Gate,”“Velocity,”and“Flam.”

PitchOffset:Thisoffsetsthepitchofthearpeggionote

insemitonesupordown.Youcaninputthesametone

foreachstep,andchangethePitchOffsetvaluefor

eachtocreateamelodyusingasingletone.(See

“Melodypattern”)

Gate:Specifiesthelengthofthearpeggionoteforeach

step.WithasettingofLegato,thenotewillcontinue

soundingeitheruntilthenextnoteofthesametoneor

untiltheendofthepattern.WithasettingofOff,the

notewillnotsound.

Velocity:Thisspecifiesthestrengthofthenote.Witha

settingofKey,thenotewillsoundatthestrengthof

howitwasactuallyplayed.

TheGateandVelocitysettingsyouselectherewill

bevalidiftheGateandVel oc ityparameters

(ProgramP7:ARP/DT–ARPSetuppage)ofthe

programselectedinProgrammodearesettoStep.

IftheseparametershaveasettingotherthanStep,

theGateandVelocitythatwerespecifiedforeach

individualstepwillbeignored,andallnotesofthe

arpeggiowillsoundaccordingtothesettingsin

ProgramP7:ARP/DT–ARPSetuppage.Besureto

verifythesettingsoftheprogram.

WheneditingGate,Velocity,andSwing,usethe

SELECTbuttontoselectARP,andsetknob1

(GATE)andknob2(VELOCITY)tothecenter

position(12o’clock).

5. Tochangetheuserarpeggiopatternname,usethe

“RenameArpeggioPattern”menucommand.(See

page 221oftheParameterGuide)

6. Ifyouwishtosavetheediteduserarpeggio

patterntointernalmemory,besuretoWritethe

userarpeggiopattern.(Seepage 221ofthe

ParameterGuide)

Ifyouturnoffthepowerwithoutwriting,theedited

contentswillbelost.

7. Ifyouwishtosavethestateoftheprogramatthe

sametime,returntoProgrammodeandwritethe

program.(Seepage 115)

Other examples of creating a user

arpeggio pattern

Melody pattern

1. Pressthealternatebutton.

2. Inthetouchgrid,settone0for“Step”01,02,03,04,

05,07,and08(i.e.,allbut06).

3. Specifythepitch.Setthe“Step”02“Pitch”to+10,

“Step”05“Pitch”to+12,andthe“Step”08“Pitch”

to–2.

4. Playasinglekey;thearpeggiowillbeginplaying.

Chordal pattern

1. Pressthealternatebutton.

2. Inthetouchgrid,settone00of“Step”01.

3. In“Step”03,04,06,and07,settones00–04.

4. Select“Step”01,andset“Gate”toLegato.

5. Select“Step”06,andset“Gate”toLegato.

Note: Tosimulatethetimingnuancesofastrummed

guitarchord,selectFlam.InProgrammode,selectan

acousticguitarprogram,andchoosetheuserarpeggio

patternthatyoucreatedhere.IntheArpeg.Program

P7:ARP/DT–ARPSetuppage,setGatetoStep.

Arpeggiator function

94

ThenreturntotheGlobalP6:ArpeggioPattern–Setup

page.Forodd‐numberedsteps,setFlamtoapositive

(+)value.Foreven‐numberedsteps,setFlamtoa

negative(–)value.

Drum pattern

Youcanusethearpeggiatortoplayarhythmpattern

byusing“FixedNote”withadrumprogram.

1. InProgrammode,selectadrumkitprogram.

Forthisexample,selectthepresetprogramA017:Jazz

Dry/Amb1Kit(Category:Drums).

2. InGlobalP6:ArpeggioPattern,selecttheSetup

page,andparametersettings.

ArpeggioToneMode:SetthistoFixedNote.Thiswill

causethetonetoalwayssoundatthespecifiedpitch.

FixedNoteMode:IfyousetthistoTriggerAllTones,

playingasinglenoteonthekeyboardwillsoundall

tones.

IfyousetthistoTriggerAsPlayed,thetoneswillbe

soundedaccordingtothenotesyouplayonthe

keyboard(seepage 212oftheParameterGuide).

3. SelecttheEditpage.

Let’sinputthefollowingrhythmpattern.

4. Foreach“Tone,”specify“FixedNoteNo.”

UsetheFixedNoteSetupbuttontoopenthedialog

box.Hereyoucanassignadifferentdrumsample(note

number)ofthedrumkittoeachfixednote.

Forthisexample,setToneNo.andFixedNoteNo.as

follows.

Thedrumsamplecorrespondingtoeachnotenumber

willdifferdependingonthedrumkit.It’sbesttoplay

thekeyboardtofindthedrumsoundyouwant;then

holddownFixedNoteNo.andplaythatnotetoenter

thedesirednotenumber.

5. Pressthealternatebutton.

6. Enterthekick(Tone00).

Inthetouchgrid,settone00(C2)ofStep01and05.

7. Enterthesnare(Tone01).

Inthetouchgrid,settone01(F2)ofStep03and07.

8. Entertheclosedhi‐hat(Tone02).

Inthetouchgrid,settone02(F#3)ofStep01,02,03,05,

06,and07.

9. Entertheopenhi‐hat(Tone03).

Inthetouchgrid,settone03(A#3)forStep04.

10. IfFixedNoteModeissettoTriggerAsPlayed,

playingasinglenoteonthekeyboardwillcause

onlythekick(Tone00)toplay.

Playingtwonotesonthekeyboardwillcauseonlythe

kick(Tone00)andsnare(Tone01)toplay.Inthisway,

thenumberofkeysthatyouplaywillbeplayedbythe

samenumberoftones.

Tone No. Fixed Note No.

00 C2 (kick)

01 F2 (snare)

02 F#3 (closed hi-hat)

03 A#3 (open hi-hat)

Using the arpeggiator while you play Creating a user arpeggio pattern

95

11. Settheparametersforeachstep.

UseVelocityetc.toaddaccentstotherhythmpattern.

TheGateandVelocitysettingsyouselectherewill

bevalidiftheGateandVel oc ityparameters

(ProgramP7:ARP/DT–ARPSetuppage)ofthe

programselectedinProgrammodearesettoStep.

IftheseparametershaveasettingotherthanStep,

theGateandVelocitythatwerespecifiedforeach

individualstepwillbeignored,andthenotesof

thearpeggiowillbesoundedaccordingtothe

settingsoftheProgramP7:ARP/DT–ARPSetup

page.Checkthesettingsoftheprogram.

WhenspecifyingGateandVelocity,pressthe

controlsurfaceARPbutton,andsetknob1(GATE)

andknob2(VELOCITY)tothecenterposition(12

o’clock).

Dual arpeggiator editing

Herewewilluseacombinationasanexampleinour

explanation.

Thesameprocedureapplieswheneditinganarpeggio

patterninSequencermode.

IfyouhaveenteredthismodefromtheCombination

mode,thearpeggiopatternselectedbythe

combinationwillbeaffectedbyyourediting.

1. InCombinationmode,selectacombinationthat

usesthearpeggiopatternyouwishtoedit.

Forthisexample,selectacombinationwhereboth

arpeggiatorsAandBareassigned.

2. PresstheARPbuttontoturnonthearpeggiator

(thebuttonwilllightup).

Evenifthearpeggiatorhadbeenturnedoffwhenyou

movedhere,youcanusetheARPbuttontoturniton.

However,ifArpeggiatorRunAorBarenotchecked,

andifArpeggiatorAssign,issettooff,thenthe

arpeggiatorwillnotfunction.

3. SelecttheGlobalP6:ArpeggioPattern–Setup

page.

4. IfyouaccessedthispagefromCombinationmode,

usethe“ArpeggioSelect”AandBtoselectthe

arpeggiatorthatyouwishtoedit.

IfthisisA,youreditingwillapplytotheparameters

anduserarpeggiopatternofarpeggiatorA.

IfthisisB,youreditingwillapplytotheparameters

anduserarpeggiopatternofarpeggiatorB.

5. SwitchbetweenarpeggiatorsAandB,andedit

theirrespectiveuserarpeggiopatterns.

Ifyouwishtostoponeofthearpeggiators,returnto

Combinationmode,andinCombinationP0:Play–

ArpeggioAortheArpeggioBpageanduncheckthe

ArpeggiatorRuncheckbox.

6. Tomodifythenameofauserarpeggiopattern,use

theUtility“RenameArpeggioPattern.”(See

page 221oftheParameterGuide)

7. Ifyouwishtosavetheediteduserarpeggio

patternininternalmemory,youmustwritethe

userarpeggiopattern.

Inthiscase,bothuserarpeggiopatternswillbewritten

simultaneously.Ifyouturnoffthepowerwithout

writing,theeditedcontentswillbelost(seepage 221of

theParameterGuide).

8. Ifyouwishtosavethestateofthecombinationat

thesametime,returntoCombinationmodeand

writethecombination.(Seepage 115)

Note: Wheneditingauserarpeggiopattern,pay

attentiontotheglobalMIDIchannel,thechannelof

eachtrack,andthearpeggiatorassignments,andmake

surethatthearpeggiatoryouarehearingisthepattern

thatyouwishtoedit.

Arpeggiator function

96

Regarding arpeggiator

synchronization

“Key Sync.” parameter

Thetimingofthearpeggiatornotesdependsonthe

stateofthearpeggiatorKeySync.checkbox.

Ifthisboxischecked,thearpeggiatorwillstart

runningatthefirstnote‐onthatoccursafteryou’ve

takenyourhandscompletelyoffthekeyboard.

Ifthisboxisunchecked,thearpeggiatorwillrunin

synchronizationwiththeinternal/externalMIDIclock.

Below,wewillexplainhowsynchronizationoccurs

whentheKeySync.checkboxisnotchecked

(SynchronizationwithSongStartandwithMIDI

realtimeStartmessagesareexcluded).

Synchronization between arpeggiators

A and B

InCombinationandSequencermodes,thetwo

arpeggiatorscanrunsimultaneously.Inthiscase,ifone

arpeggiatorisalreadyrunning,andyouthenrunthe

otherarpeggiator(with“KeySync.”unchecked),the

secondarpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe“(Tempo)”

basedonthefirstarpeggiator.

IfKeySync.ischecked,arpeggiatorsAandBwillrun

independently,eachattheirowntempo.

Synchronization with the drum track

Ifyouwantthearpeggiatortosynchronizetothedrum

trackpatternthat’scurrentlyplaying,unchecktheKey

Sync.setting.Inthiscase,thearpeggiatorwill

synchronizetothebeatofthedrumtrackpatternthat’s

currentlyplaying.

Ifyouwantthedrumtrackpatterntosynchronizeto

thearpeggiatorthat’scurrentlyrunning,turnonthe

“Sync”setting(theTriggerparameteroftheDrum

Trackpageofeachmode).

Synchronization between the arpeggiator

and sequencer in Sequencer mode

If song playback is stopped

•Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe“(Tempo)”

basedontheinternalMIDIclocktiming.

•IfanRPPRpatternisplayinginSequencermode,

thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothebeatbased

onthatpattern.

IfyouwanttheRPPRpatternplaybacktosynchronize

tothearpeggiatorthat’scurrentlyrunning,set“Sync”

toSEQ(SEQP10:Pattern/RPPR–RPPRSetuppage).

Patternplaybackwillsynchronizetothe“(Tempo)”

timingofthearpeggiator.

While playing back or recording a song

•Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothebeatbased

onthetimingofthesong.

Synchronization with Song Start

•Ifthearpeggiatoristurnedon(ARPbuttonison)

andisrunning,itwillresettothebeginningofits

arpeggiopatternwhenaSongStartisreceived.

(ThisisunaffectedbytheKeySync.setting.)

•InSequencermodewhenKeySync.isunchecked

andtheARPbuttonison,ifyoustartthe

arpeggiatorbypressingakeyduringthepre‐count

beforerecordingbegins,thearpeggiatorwillstart

itspatternassoonasrecordingbegins,andwillbe

recorded.

Synchronization with external sequencer

playback

If“(Tempo)”isEXT(i.e.,ifGlobalP1:MIDIMIDI

ClockisExternalMIDIorExternalUSB)inProgram,

Combination,orSequencermodes,thearpeggiator

willsynchronizetotheMIDItimingClockandStart

messagesreceivedfromaconnectedMIDIdevice.

Note: Synchronizationwilloccurinthesamewayif

MIDItimingClockisAutoandMIDIrealtimeclock

messagesarebeingreceivedfromaconnectedMIDI

device.

Synchronization with external MIDI timing clock

Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe“(Tempo)”

timingoftheexternalMIDItimingclock.

Synchronization with MIDI realtime Start messages

Ifthearpeggiatoristurnedonandrunning,an

incomingMIDIrealtimeStartmessagewillresetthe

arpeggiatortothebeginningofitspattern(Thisis

unaffectedbytheKeySync.setting).

97

Drum Track function

Performing with the Drum Track function

TheDrumTrackfunctionmakesiteasytoplaythe

KROME’shigh‐qualitydrumprogramsusingawide

varietyofDrumTrackpatterns.

ItprovidesaconvenientwayforyoutohearDrum

Trackpatternswhileyoutryoutvariousphrasesona

programorcombination,orworkouttheoutlineof

yoursong.Then,whenyou’vecomeupwithsome

ideas,youcanusetheAutoSongSetupfunctionto

immediatelystartrecordinginSequencermode.

Youcanusepresetdrumpatternsthatcoverawide

rangeofmusicalstyles,aswellasuserpatternsthat

youyourselfcreated.

YoucanwriteyourownpatternsintoU000–U999.User

patternsyou’vecreatedinSequencermodecanbe

convertedintouserDrumTrackpatterns.

TheDrumTrackpatternwillstartimmediatelywhen

youpresstheDRUMTRACKbutton,orwhenyou

playthekeyboardafterpressingtheON/OFFbutton.If

you’restartingthepatternbyplayingthekeyboard,

youhavetheoptionofstartingitbyusingaspecific

rangeofnotesorvelocities.

InProgrammode,thedrumtrackhasadedicated

mixerchannel(includingEQ)andeffectrouting,

allowingyoutocontrolthedrumtrackindependently

fromthesoundoftheprogramitself.InCombination

andSequencermodes,thedrumtrackishandledasa

conventionaltimbreortrack,allowingyoutoselect

programs,editEQsettings,andspecifytheeffect

routinginthesamewayasforconventionaltimbresor

tracks.

Using the Drum Track function

in Program mode

Turning the Drum Track function on/

off

1. InProgrammode,selectaprogram(see“Selecting

Programs”onpage 21).

2. PresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.

TheON/OFFbuttonwilllightuporblink,depending

onthesetting(TriggerMode)oftheprogram.

Iflit:TheDrumTrackpatternwillstartaccordingto

theSyncsetting.Whenyouturnitoff,thepatternwill

stop.(ThiswilloccuriftheTriggerModeparameteris

settoStartImmediately.)

Ifblinking:TheDrumTrackpatternwillbereadyto

start.Itwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardorwhen

aMIDInote‐onisreceived.(Thiswilloccurifthe

TriggerModeparameterissettoWaitKBDTrigger.)

Adjusting the performance tempo

•YoucanusetheTEMPOknoborthe

TAPbuttontoadjusttheperformance

tempo.

Thiswillchangethe“=”valuelocated

ontheupperrightsideofthedisplay.

Youcanadjustthetempowitharange

of40.00–300.00bpm.TheLEDlocated

abovetheTAPbuttonwillblinkatinter‐

valsofaquarternote().

Youcanalsoadjustthetempobychoos‐

ing“=”inthedisplay.Usenumerickeys0–9to

enterthetempo,andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

YoucanalsousetheVALUEcontrollertosetthe

tempo.TheLEDwillblinkatthetempoyouspecify.

Note: Thetemposettingisalsosavedwhenyouwritea

program.

Preset P001...P605 Preset Drum Track patterns

User U000...U999 User Drum Track patterns

Drum Track function

98

IftheGlobalP1:MIDI–MIDIBasicpageMIDI

ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,External

USB,orsettoAutoandMIDIClockmessagesare

beingreceived,thedisplaywillindicate“=”EXT,

andtheKROMEwillbesynchronizedtoan

externalMIDIdevice.Inthiscase,youwon’tbe

abletochangethetempobyusingtheKROME.

Selecting a Drum Track pattern and

Drum Track program

1. AccesstheProgP0:Play–Mainpage.

2. SelectaDrumTrackpattern.Use“PatternBank”

toselectthepresetortheuserbank,anduse

“PatternNo.”toselectthepatternnumber.

3. Use“DrumTrackProgram”toselecttheprogram

thatwillplaytheDrumTrackpattern.

Note: Youcanonlyselectprogramsofcategory

number15(Drums).Ifyouwanttouseanoriginal

programyoucreatedastheDrumTrackprogram,save

itwith“Category”setto15(seepage 30).

Note: Ifyou’veselectedanemptypattern,theDRUM

TRACKbuttonwillnotfunction.

TheseparameterscanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DT

page.

Setting the EQ, volume, mute, and

solo for the drum track pattern

IntheProgP0:Play–Mixer&DrumTrackpageyou

canusea3‐bandEQtoadjustthesoundofthedrum

trackprogram.Youcanalsoeditthevolume,mute,

andsolosettings.

Using the Drum Track function

in Combination mode

Selecting a combination and turning the

Drum Track function on/off

1. PresstheCOMBIbuttontoenterCombination

mode,andselectthedesiredcombination.For

details,pleasesee“SelectingCombinations”on

page 43.

2. PresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.

TheON/OFFbuttonwilllightuporblink,depending

onthesetting(TriggerMode)ofthecombination.

Iflit:TheDrumTrackpatternwillstartaccordingto

theSyncsetting.Whenyouturnitoff,thepatternwill

stop.(ThiswilloccuriftheTriggerModeparameteris

settoStartImmediately.)

Ifblinking:TheDrumTrackpatternwillbereadyto

start.Itwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardorwhen

aMIDInote‐onisreceived.(Thiswilloccurifthe

TriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrigger.)

Adjusting the performance tempo

YoucanusetheTEMPOknobortheTAPbuttonto

adjusttheperformancetempo.

Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum

Track program

UnlikeitsfunctionalityinProgrammode,theDrum

TrackfunctioninCombinationmodedoesnothaveits

owndedicatedtrack(timbre).Theprogramthatplays

theDrumTrackpatternwillusethetimbrethatyou

specify.

1. IntheCombiP0:Play–ProgramT01–08pageor

T09–16page,selectthetimbrethatyouwanttouse

forthedrumtrack,andthenselecttheDrumTrack

program.

Pattern

Bank/No.

Drum Track

Program

Drum Track Play/Mute, Solo On/O, Volume

Drum Track

EQ

Performing with the Drum Track function Using the Drum Track function in Combination mode

99

Inthefollowingillustration,we’veselectedtimbre5

forusebythedrumtrack.

2. SpecifytheMIDIchannelofthedrumtrack

timbre.

BeawarethatifanothertimbreusesthesameMIDI

channel,thattimbrewillalsobeplayed.

3. AccesstheCombiP7:ARP/DT–DrumTrackpage.

Specifythedrumtrack’sMIDIchannelOutput.Setthis

tomatchtheMIDIChannelofthetimbreyou

specifiedinstep2.

4. SelectaDrumTrackpattern.Use“Pattern(Pattern

Bank)”toselectthepresetoruserbank,anduse

“PatternNo.”toselectthepatternnumber.

Note: Ifyouselectanemptypattern,theDRUM

TRACKbuttonwillnotfunction.

5. PresstheDRUMTRACKbuttontoverifythatthe

patternplayscorrectly.

ThemethodoftriggeringwilldependontheTrigger

settings.IftheTriggerModeparameterissettoStart

Immediately,theDrumTrackpatternwillstartwhen

youpresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.Fordetailsonthe

Triggersettings,pleasesee“7–4b:Trigger ”onpage 56

oftheParameterGuide.

Drum Track function

100

Drum Track function settings

Drum Track function settings

in Program mode

Starting/stopping the drum track

1. AccesstheProgP7:ARP/DT–DrumTrackPattern

page.

2. “TriggerMode”specifieshowtheDrumTrack

patternwillbetriggered.

StartImmediately:WhenyoupresstheDRUM

TRACKbuttontoturniton,theLEDwilllightupand

theDrumTrackpatternwillstartaccordingtotheSync

setting.ItwillstopwhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACK

buttontoturnitoff.

WaitKBDTrigger:WhenyoupresstheDRUM

TRACKbuttontoturniton,theLEDwillblinkandthe

DrumTrackpatternwillwaittostart.Whenyouplay

thekeyboardorreceiveaMIDInote‐on,theDrum

TrackpatternwillstartaccordingtotheSyncsetting.

3. SpecifytheSyncsetting.

Off:TheDrumTrackpatternwillnotsynchronizeto

thearpeggiatorthat’scurrentlyrunning,butwillstart

immediately.

On:TheDrumTrackpatternwillsynchronizetothe

arpeggiatorthat’scurrentlyrunning.

4. If“TriggerMode”issettoWaitKBDTrigger,

specifythe“Latch”setting.“Latch”specifies

whethertheDrumTrackpatternwillcontinue

playingevenafteryoutakeyourhandoffthe

keyboard.

Off:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(theLEDwill

blink),thepatternwillstartwhenyouplaythe

keyboard(note‐on).Thepatternwillstopwhenyou

releasethekeyboard(note‐off).

On:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(theLEDwill

blink),thepatternwillstartwhenyouplaythe

keyboard(note‐on).Thepatternwillcontinuewhen

youreleasethekeyboard(note‐off).Thepatternwill

stopwhenyouturntheDRUMTRACKbuttonoff(the

LEDwillgodark).

5. If“TriggerMode”issettoWaitKBDTrigger,

specifytheKeyboardZoneandVelocityZone.

Thesesettingsspecifytherangeofkeysandvelocities

thatwilltriggertheDrumTrackpatternwhenyouplay

thekeyboard(orreceiveanote‐on).

Saving the on/off status

If“TriggerMode”issettoWaitKBDTrigger,thedrum

track’son/offstatuscanbesavedintheprogram.

If“TriggerMode”issettoStartImmediately,thedrum

track’son/offstatuswillalwaysbesavedas“off,”

regardlessofthestateoftheDRUMTRACKbutton.

EQ adjustments for the Drum Track

program

Youcanadjustathree‐bandEQfortheDrumTrack

program.

Ifyouturn“A u t o LoadProgramEQ”on(selected),the

three‐bandEQsettingsspecifiedfortheprogramwill

beautomaticallyloadedwhenyouswitchDrumTrack

programs.Normallyyouwillleavethisselected.

Youarefreetoadjustthethree‐bandEQsettingsthat

areloadedautomatically.Theseadjustmentsare

appliedrelativetotheoriginalsettingsoftheprogram.

Drum Track function settings Drum Track function settings in Combination mode

101

MIDI transmission and reception for

the drum track

InProgrammode,theDrumTrackfunctiontransmits

andreceivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.

Receive:Ifyou’recontrollingthetriggeringbyplaying

thekeyboard,thedrumtrackwillreceiveontheglobal

MIDIchannel.

Transmit:ThedrumtrackwilltransmitontheMIDI

channelspecifiedbyDrumTrackProgMIDICh

(default:channel10).(Notedataetc.oftheDrumTrack

programwillbetransmitted.)

Note: MIDItransmissionofthepatterndataisenabled

ifDrumTrackProgMIDIOutisselected.Thedefault

settingisoff(unselected).

TheDrumTrackprogramdoesnottransmitorreceive

programchanges.

Drum Track function settings

in Combination mode

UnlikeProgrammode,Combinationmodedoesnot

haveadedicatedtrackfortheDrumTrackfunction.

You’llneedtospecifyatimbre1–16astheoneforuse

bytheDrumTrackprogram.

Thensetthedrumtrack’soutputMIDIchannelOutput

tomatchthetimbre’sMIDIchannelMIDIChannelso

thattheDrumTrackprogramcanbeplayed.

Fordetails,pleasesee“SelectingaDrumTrackpattern

andDrumTrackprogram”onpage 98.

MIDI transmission and reception for

the drum track

InCombinationmode,theDrumTrackfunction

transmitsandreceivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.

Receive:Ifyou’recontrollingthetriggeringbyplaying

thekeyboard,thedrumtrackwillreceiveontheglobal

MIDIchannel.

Transmit:ThedrumtrackwilltransmitontheMIDI

channelspecifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsetting

ofeachcombination.

SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthetimbreyou’ve

specifiedforthedrumprogram.

Ifthetimbre’sStatusisEXTorEX2,thenotedataetc.

oftheDrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.

Drum Track function settings

in Sequencer mode

TheparametersfortheDrumTrackfunctionare

structuredinthesamewayasinCombinationmode.

AssigntheDrumTrackprogramtothedesiredtrack1–

16.

However,whileacombinationtriggerstheDrum

TrackpatternontheglobalMIDIchannel,asong

triggerstheDrumTrackpatternontheMIDIchannel

specifiedbytheDrumPatternInput.Normallyyou’ll

setthistoTch.WiththeTchsetting,theMIDIchannel

ofthetrackselectedbyTrackSelectwillautomatically

beusedasthetriggerchannel.

Fordetails,pleasesee“SelectingaDrumTrackpattern

andDrumTrackprogram”onpage 98.

InSequencermodeyoucanusetheDrumTrack

functionwhilerealtime‐recordingasongtrackor

pattern.

Thenote‐on/offdatatransmittedbytheDrumTrack

patterncanberecordedaseventsinatrackorpattern.

Youcan’tusenotedatafromtheinternal

sequencerasatriggertostartpatternsforthe

DrumTrackfunction.

Whenyou’veusedtheDrumTrackfunctionwitha

programorcombinationtocomeupwithanideafora

song,youcanthenusetheAutoSongSetupfunctionto

immediatelystartrealtime‐recording(seepage 59).

MIDI transmission and reception for

the drum track

InSequencermode,theDrumTrackfunctiontransmits

andreceivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.

Receive:ThedrumtrackwillreceiveontheMIDI

channelspecifiedbytheDrumPatternInputsettingof

eachsong.Normallyyou’llsetthistoTchandusethe

KROME’skeyboardtocontrolthetriggering.

Transmit:ThedrumtrackwilltransmitontheMIDI

channelspecifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsetting

ofeachsong.SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthe

MIDItrackwhereyou’veassignedthedrumprogram.

Ifthetrack’sStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2,notedataetc.

oftheDrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.

Drum Track function

102

Synchronizing the Drum Track

function

The Trigger “Sync” parameter

Thetriggertimingofadrumtrackwilldependonthe

settingofitsTriggerSyncparameter.

On(checked):Thetriggertimingwillbequantizedto

thenearestbeatrelativetothebasetempo.

Off(unchecked):IfTriggerModeissettoStart

Immediately,triggeringwilloccuratthemomentyou

presstheDRUMTRACKbutton.IfthisissettoWait

KBDTrigger,triggeringwilloccuratthemomentyou

playthekeyboard.

Synchronizing the drum track with the KAR-

MA function, Sequencer mode songs, pat-

terns, and RPPR performance

IfyouwanttheDrumTrackpatterntoplayorbe

recordedinsynchronizationwiththearpeggiatorthat’s

currentlyrunning,acurrently‐playingsong,pattern,

orRPPRperformance,turnTriggerSyncon.

TriggerSyncOff:IftheTriggerModesettingisStart

Immediately,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggered

themomentyoupresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.If

thisissettoWaitKBDTrigger,theDrumTrackpattern

willbetriggeredthemomentyouplaythekeyboard.It

willnotsynchronizetothearpeggiatorthat’scurrently

runningortothesong,pattern,orRPPRthat’s

currentlyactive.

TriggerSyncOn:Triggeringwillsynchronizetothe

songthat’scurrentlyplaying,patternorRPPR

performanceinunitsofameasure.Triggeringwill

synchronizetothearpeggiatorthat’scurrentlyrunning

(inSequencermodeifthesongorpatternisstopped)

inunitsofabeat.

Note: Ifyouwanttosynchronizearpeggiatortothe

DrumTrackfunctionthat’scurrentlyrunning,setthe

Syncparameter(Prog/Combi/SeqP7:ARP/DT‐

DrumTrkPattern).

Note: IfyouwanttosynchronizetheRPPRpattern

performancetotheDrumTrackfunctionthat’s

currentlyrunning,settheSyncparameter(SeqP10:

Pattern/RPPR–RPPRSetuppage)toBeatorMeasure.

Synchronization with song stop

Synchronization with a song in Sequencer

mode

•WhenyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP

()button,theDrumTrackfunctionwillstop

aswellasthesequencer.

•IfyouwanttheDrumTrackfunctiontostart

simultaneouslywiththestartofrecording,press

theDRUMTRACKbuttonduringthepre‐count

beforerecording(ifTriggerModeissettoStart

Immediately)orplaythekeyboard(ifTrigger

ModeisWaitKBDTrigger).TheDrumTrackswill

notbetriggeredimmediately,butwillbetriggered

insynchronizationwiththesequencerthemoment

recordingstarts.

Slave operation

ConnecttheKROME’sMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI

device’sMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKROME’sUSBB

connectortoyourcomputer’sUSBport.

SetMIDIClock(seepage 111)toExternalMIDIor

ExternalUSB.

Note: IftheKROMEissettoMIDIClock=Auto,itwill

alsosynchronizetotheexternalMIDIdeviceinthe

samewayifMIDItimingclockmessagesarebeing

receivedfromtheexternaldevice.

Synchronization to MIDI clock

Thearpeggiatorfunctionwillsynchronizetoatempo

basedontheexternalMIDIclocktiming.

Synchronization with MIDI realtime commands

InSequencermode,SongStart,Continue,andStop

messagesthattheKROMEreceiveswillcontrolsong

playbackandrecordingjustaswhenyouusethefront

panelSTART/STOP()button.TheKARMA

functionalsowillbecontrolledinthesamewayas

whenyouusethefrontpanelSTART/STOP()

button.(See“Synchronizationwithsongstop”)

Sync: O

Sync: Beat

Sync: Measure

Key 1 on

Song

Key 2 on Key 1 o

Sync settings

Patterns 1 and 2 are set to

Mode=Manual, and have

identical Sync settings

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Drum Track function settings Creating a Drum Track pattern

103

Master operation

IfyouwantanexternalMIDIdeviceorcomputerto

synchronizetotheKROME’sMIDItimingclockand

realtimecommands,connecttheKROME’sMIDIOUT

toyourexternalMIDIdevice’sMIDIIN,orconnectthe

KROME’sUSBporttoyourcomputer’sUSBport.

SetMIDIClocktoInternal.

Note: ThesameappliesifMIDIClock=AutoandMIDI

realtimeclockmessagesarebeingtransmitted(see

page 111).

Synchronization via MIDI clock

TheconnectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronize

totheMIDIclockoftheKROME.

Creating a Drum Track pattern

Onceyou’veconvertedthepatterninthisway,you’ll

beabletouseitwiththedrumtrackineachmode.

TheseconvertedDrumTrackpatternsareheldin

internalmemoryevenafteryouturnoffthepower.

Thismeansyoucanmanagethemtogetherwiththe

programsandcombinations.

Preparing a user pattern

You’llfirstneedtopreparetheuserpatternthatyou

wanttoconverttoaDrumTrackpattern.

Tocreateauserpattern,youcanrealtime‐recordit(see

page 65)intheSeqP10:Pattern/RPPR–PatternEdit

page,orstep‐recordit(seepage 167oftheParameter

Guide).

Alternatively,performancedatafromatrackcanbe

importedintoapattern,meaningthatperformance

datayou’vecreatedinatrackorSMFdatayou’ve

loadedinMediamodecanbeusedasauserpattern.To

dothis,executetheGetFromTrackmenucommandin

theSeqP10:Pattern/RPPR–PatternEditpage(see

page 187oftheParameterGuide).

Converting to a Drum Track pattern

1. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode.

2. AccesstheSeqP10:Patern/RPPR–PatternEdit

page.

3. Selecttheuserpatternthatyouwanttoconvertto

aDrumTrackpattern.

SetPatterntoUser,andusePatternSelecttoselectthe

desiredpattern.

4. ChoosethemenucommandConverttoDrumTrk

Patterntoaccessthedialogbox.

5. UsetheTo“DrumTrackPatternSelect”fieldto

specifytheuserDrumTrackpatternnumberthat

willholdtheconverteddata.Whenyouexecute

thecommand,thedatawillbeoverwrittenonto

thisnumber.

6. Ifyouselectthe“AllPatternsavailableinSong

***”option,allpatternsinthesongthatcontain

notedatawillbeconverted,startingwiththe

numberyouspecifiedinstep3.

7. Ifyouexecutethiscommandwith“NoteOnly”

selected,onlythenoteeventswillbeconverted.

8. PresstheOKbuttonortheENTERbuttonto

execute.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe

CancelbuttonortheEXITbutton.

9. Asdescribedin“UsingtheDrumTrackfunction

inProgrammode”onpage 97,settheDrumTrack

“PatternBank”toUser,andset“PatternNo.”to

theuserDrumTrackpatternyouconverted.Then

playtheDrumTrackpattern.

Ifthedrumpatternmemoryisinsufficient,orif

therearenotenoughpatternslots,theerror

message“NotenoughDrumTrackpattern

memory”or“NotenoughDrumTrackpattern

locationsavailable”willappear,andthecommand

cannotbeexecuted.

Tip: It’sagoodideatoconvertdrumpatternsthatyou

usefrequently.Use“LoadDrumTrackPattern”toload

them.

Internal memory (saved inside the KROME)

Song

Drum Track

Track/RPPR

Program

/Combination

Drum Track

Convert to

Drum Track Pattern

100

User

Pattern

Preset

Pattern

User

Drum Track

Pattern

Sequencer memory

(Not saved internally;

save on external USB

media.)

Drum Track function

104

105

Using Drum Kits

Drum Kit Overview

What’s a Drum Kit?

Adrumkitisacollectionofdrumsamples(drumset

soundssuchasbassdrum,snare,orcymbals,aswellas

awidevarietyofotherpercussionsounds),witheach

sampleassignedtoanoteofthekeyboard.

• Eachkeycanplayadifferentsound

•Oneachkey,youcanuseuptoeightDrumsamples,

withvelocitycrossfades

• Eachkeyhasseparatesettingsforthemost

importantsoundparameters,includingvolume,

filtercutoffandresonance,envelopeattackand

decay,pitch,driveandlowboost,andgainforeach

bandoftheProgramEQ.

Forinstance,youcouldcombinehighdriveand

lowcutofffrequencytocreatealo‐fieffectononlya

fewsounds,whiletherestofthesoundsremained

clearandpristine.

• EachnotecanberoutedtodifferentInsertEffects,

orhaveseparateFXSendamounts.Forinstance,

youcansendasnaresoundthroughadedicated

compressor.

YoucanuseDrumKitsonlyinProgramswhose

OscillatorModeissettoSingleorDoubleDrums.

Drum Kit memory structure

TheKROMEhasover161DrumKits,dividedinto

Internal,User,andGM(GeneralMIDI)groupsas

shownbelow.Youcaneditorwriteintoanyofthe

locationsexceptfortheGMbank,whichcannotbe

erased.

DrumKitcontents

The9DrumKitsintheGMbankarecompatiblewith

theGM2soundmap.TheotherDrumKitsmayuse

differentmappings,whereappropriate.

Using a drum kit in a program

(Oscillator Mode)

IntheProgramP1:BasicCtrls–ProgramBasicpage,set

theOscillatorModeparametertoDrumsorDouble

Drums.Thenfortheoscillator,selectthedrumkitthat

youwanttouse.

Before you start editing…

Selecting a drum program

DrumKitsareeditedinGlobalMode.Whileyou’rein

GlobalMode,you’llplaythekitthatyou’reeditingasif

youwereplayingitfromwithintheProgram,Combi,

orSongwhichwasselectedbeforeyouenteredGlobal

mode.

So,beforeyouenterGlobalmode,it’sbesttoselecta

Programwhichisalreadysetupfordrums,withthe

appropriateEGsettings,effects,andsoon.Justusethe

ProgramCategoryselectpopup,andchooseadrum

Programsuchas“StudioStandardKit.”

Eveniftheprogram’soscillatorissettoDouble

Drums,thispagewillshowonlythesingledrum

kitthatisselectedbyDrumKitSelect.

Matching the key of the keyboard

with the drum kit

Inorderforthenotemappingstomatchthekeyboard,

theOscillator’sOctavesettingneedstobe+0[8ʹ].All

DrumKitProgramsshouldhavethissettingalready.If

you’reunsure,youcancheckthisyourself:

1. GototheOSC1SetuptaboftheOSC/Pitchpage.

Withasettingotherthan+0[8ʹ],therelationship

betweenthekeysandtheDrumKitsoundmapwillbe

incorrect.

2. SettheGlobalP0:BasicSetup–Basicparameter

“KeyTranspose”to+00.

Make sure that Memory Protect is

disabled

Beforeyoustartediting,gototheGlobalP0:Basic

Setup–SystemPreferencespage,andlookinthe

MemoryProtectsection.MakesurethatDrumKitis

notchecked–ifso,youwon’tbeabletomakeanyedits.

Drum Kits may be used by more than

one Program

WhenyoueditaDrumKit,allProgramsthatusethat

DrumKitwillbeaffected.Toavoidchangingthe

factoryvoicing,youmaywishtocopyDrumKitsto

emptylocationsintheUSERbanksbeforeediting.

Bank No. Contents

INT 00...31 Preload Drum Kits

User 32...47 User Drum Kits

GM 0 48...56 GM2 Drum Kits

Using Drum Kits

106

Editing a Drum Kit

Basic Editing

1. SelecttheProgramthatyouwishtousewhile

editingtheDrumKit.

2. AccesstheP2:OSC/Pitch–OSC1Setuppageorthe

OSC2Setuppage(DoubleDrumsonly),andpress

theJumptoDrumKitEditbutton.

IfyouwanttoedittheOSC2drumkitofadouble

drumsprogram,presstheJumptoDrumKitEdit

buttonfromtheP2:OSC/Pitch–OSC2Setuppage.

You’lljumptotheGlobalmodeP5:DrumKit–Sample

Setuppage.

Note: IfyouenterGlobalmodebypressingthe

GLOBALbuttonorthemodebutton,andthenaccess

theP5:DrumKit–SampleSetuppage,theOSC1sound

settingswillbeused.

3. Inthetoplineofthedisplay,use“DrumKit

Select”toselectthedrumkitthatyouwanttoedit.

GMdrumkits48(GM)–56(GM)cannotbeselected

here.(ItisnotpossibletoeditorwriteaGMdrum

kit.)Ifyouwishtomodifythesettingsofoneofthe

drumkits48(GM)–56(GM),youcanuseCopy

DrumKittocopyitto00(INT)–47(USER),and

theneditthecopy.

4. UsetheKeyparametertoselectthenotethatyou

wishtoedit.

Toselectakey,youcanuseanyofthestandardVALUE

controllers(thedial,numerickeypadetc.).Asa

shortcut,youcanalsoholddowntheKeyandplaya

noteonthekeyboard.

ThisKeyselectionappliestoallfiveDrumKitediting

pages.

5. UsetheAssigncheckboxtospecifywhetherthe

keywillhaveitsownsettings,orusethesame

settingsasthenexthighernote.

IfAssignischecked,thekeywillhaveitsownsettings.

Thisisthedefault.

IfAssignisnotchecked,thekeywon’thaveitsown

settings.Instead,itwillusethesamesettingsasthe

nexthighernote–exceptthatthedrumsampleswillbe

playedatalowerpitch.Theamountofpitchchange

dependsonthePitchSlopeparameter,ontheProgP2:

OSC/Pitch–OSC1PitchorOSC2Pitchpage.

Usethissettingwhenyouwantonlytochangethe

pitch,suchaswithtomorcymbalsounds.

Velocity crossfade settings

Forthiskey,let’screateasimplevelocitycrossfade

betweentwostereodrumsamples.

1. Ontheleftsideofthepage,makesurethat

Drumsample1and2areturnedOn.

JustpresstheOn/Offbuttonstotogglethem,if

necessary.

2. Inthesameway,makesurethatDrumsamples3–8

areOff.

Whentheyareturnedoff,mostoftheirparameterswill

begrayedout.

3. SelectStereoastheBankforDrumsample1and

Drumsample2.

Drumsamplescomeinseveraltypes:Mono,Stereo,

VM.M,orVM.S.Monoaremonodrumsamples,and

Stereoarestereodrumsamples.Stereodrumsamples

usetwiceasmanyvoicesasmonodrumsamples.

VM.MandVM.Sarerespectivelymonoandstereo

versionsoflarge‐capacitydrumsamples.

Drumsamplesareorganizedintocategoriessuchas

bassdrumorsnare.

4. PresstheDrumsamplepopupforDrumsample1.

ThisbringsupalistofDrumsamples,organizedby

category.Usethetabsattheleftofthedisplayto

browsethroughthedifferentcategories.

ForalistoftheDrumsamplenames,pleaseseethe

VoiceNameList.

Drum Kit

Select

KEY Assign

Editing a Drum Kit

107

5. SelectaDrumsamplebytouchingitsnameinthe

list.

6. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection.

7. Switchtheslotto2,andmakesettingsfor

Drumsample2inthesameway.

Nowthatyou’veassignedDrumsamplesto

Drumsample1andDrumsample2,let’ssetupthe

velocityrangesandcrossfades.

8. AccesstheP5:DrumKit–VelocitySplitpage.

9. SetDrumsample2’sThresholdVelocityto1,and

itsCrossfadetoOff.

10. SetDrumsample1’sThresholdVelocityto80.

YoucanedittheThresholdVelocitysettingby

touchinganddraggingthegraphicontheright

(see“*EG,VelocitySplit”onpage 6).

Now,Drumsample2willsoundwhenyouplaysoftly,

atvelocitiesof79orless–andDrumsample1willsound

whenyouplayharder,withvelocitiesof80ormore.

ThemeterattheleftsideoftheVelocitySplitgraphic

indicatesthenote‐onvelocityvalue.Thisletsyou

verifythedrumsamplethatwillbesoundedbyagiven

velocity.

11. Next,setDrumsample1’sCrossfadeto20,andits

CurvetoLinear.

Noticethatthegraphicnowshowsthetworanges

taperingintooneanother.Between80and100,

Drumsample2willfadeout,andDrumsample1will

fadein,creatingagradualvelocitytransitioninsteadof

ahardsplit.

Fine-tuning the sound of each sample

1. Ifyoulike,adjusttheLevelsforthetwo

Drumsamples.

Thiscanbeveryusefulincreatingasmoothvelocity

splitorcrossfade.

2. Asnecessary,specifythetuning,EGparameters,

andfilter.

AccesstheP5:DrumKit–SampleParameterpage.

AdjustTune,Attack(AmpEGAttack),Decay(Amp

EGDecay),CutoffandResonanceforeach

drumsample.

3. Youcanalsoeditthedrive,boost,andEQforeach

drumsample.

AccesstheP5:DrumKit–Drive/EQpage.

AdjustDrive,LowBoost,and3BandEQGain[dB]

foreachdrumsample.

4. Repeat“BasicEditing,”onpage 106tosetupeach

keyoftheDrumKit.

5. Youcanalsocopysettingsfromonekeyto

another,usingtheCopyKeySetupmenu

command.

Using Exclusive Groups

1. AccesstheP5:DrumKit–Voice/Mixerpage.

2. UsetheExclusiveGroupstomakeonedrum

soundcutoffanotherdrumsound‐suchasclosed

andopenhi‐hats.

Forexample,let’ssaythatyou’veassignedanopenhi‐

hatandaclosedhi‐hattothesameexclusivegroup:

•Playtheopenhi‐hatsound.

•Whileit’sstillringing,playtheclosedhi‐hat.

•Th

eopenhi‐hatsoundwillbecutoff–simulating

theactionofaphysicalhi‐hat.

Using Drum Kits

108

Sustaining the sound even after the key is re-

leased (Hold)

UsetheHoldfunctionforinstrumentsthatshould

continuesustainingevenafterthekeyisreleased,such

asacrashcymbal.Thewaythisworkswilldependon

thesettingsoftheprogramanddrumkit.

SettheHoldfunctionasfollows.

1. AccesstheProgP1:Basic/Controllers–Note‐On/

Scalepage.

IfyoujumpedtotheGlobalP5:DrumKitpageby

pressingtheJumptoDrumkitEditbuttonfrom

Programmode,youcanreturntoProgrammodeby

pressingtheReturntoOSCbutton.

2. UnderKeyZone,makesurethattheHoldcheck‐

boxischecked.

Onceyou’veturnedonHoldfortheProgram,the

functioniscontrolledonanote‐by‐notebasis

accordingtosettingswithintheDrumKit.

3. AccesstheGlobalP5:DrumKit–Voice/Mixer

page.

4. Foreachkey,settheEnableNote‐OffReceive

parameterasdesired.

Ifthischeckboxisnotselected,noteswillbeheld,and

thesoundwillcontinueevenafterthekeyisreleased.

Ifitischecked,thekeywillnotbeheld.

IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbe

held‐regardlessoftheirEnableNote‐OffReceive

setting.

Controlling effects for each key

DrumKitshavetheirown,built‐inmixers.Foreach

key,youcancontroltheInsertEffectsbussing,Master

Effectssends,andpan.

Touseseparatebussettingsforeachkey:

1. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFX–Routingpage.

2. MakesurethattheUseDKitSettingcheck‐boxis

checked.

WhenUseDKitSettingison,theProgramwillusethe

BusSelectandEffectsSendsettingsforeachkeyofthe

DrumKit.

WhenUseDKitSettingisoff,theProgramwillignore

theDrumKit’sBusSelectandEffectsSendsettings.

3. AccesstheGlobalP5:DrumKit–Voice/Mixer

page.

4. UsetheBus(IFX/Output)Selectparametertosend

drumsoundsthroughtheirownInserteffects,or

totheL/Routputs.

Ifyoulike,youcansendeachnotetoitsownInsert

effect,ortotheindividualaudiooutputs,inadditionto

theL/Routputs.

Forexample,youmightsendallsnaresoundstoIFX1,

allkicksoundstoIFX2,andtheremainingsoundstoL/

R.

Tip: Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedrum

instrumentshavethesameBus(IFX/Output)Select

settingsaccordingtotheirtype,asfollows.

SnaresIFX1

KicksIFX2

OtherIFX3

5. UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)toset

thesendlevelstothemastereffects.

Controlling pan for each key

Touseseparatepansettingsforeachkey:

1. AccesstheProgP4:Amp/EQ–Amp1/Driver1or

Amp2/Drive2page.

2. UnderPan,makesurethattheUseDKitSetting

check‐boxischecked.

WhenUseDKitSettingison,theProgramwillusethe

pansettingsforeachkeyoftheDrumKit.

3. AccesstheGlobalP5:DrumKit–Voice/Mixer

page.

4. Use“Pan”tospecifythepanningforeachkey.

Saving Drum Kits

Onceyou’vespentsometimeediting,you’llwantto

saveyourwork.

ThecontentsofyoureditinginGlobalmodeare

preservedaslongasthepowerison,butwillbe

lostwhenyouturnoffthepower.Ifyouwantto

keepyouredits,youmustexecutetheWriteDrum

Kitsfunction.

Thiswillsavealldrumkits.

109

Adjusting Global KROME setings

How Global mode is structured

InGlobalmodeyoucanadjustoverallsettingsforthe

entireKROME.Theseconsistmainlyofthefollowing

settings.

•Mastertune

•Keytranspose

• Effectglobalbutton

•GlobalMIDIchannel

• Creatingscales

• Damperpedal,assignablefootswitch/pedal

• Categorynamesforprogramsandcombinations

• Creatinguserdrumkits

• Creatinguserarpeggiopatterns

Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachpage,pleasesee

“Basicoperations”onpage 9.

ThreetypesofdataarehandledinGlobalmode:

userdrumkitsettings(GlobalP5),userarpeggio

patterns(GlobalP6),andotherglobalsettings

(GlobalP0–4).Eachofthesehasarespective

memoryareatostoreitsdata.Thisdatacanalsobe

savedtovarioustypesofSDcardinMediamode.

Fordetails,pleasesee“WritingGlobalsettings,

UserDrumKitsandUserArpeggioPatterns”on

page 116,and“SavingtoSDcard(Media–Save)”

onpage 118.

TheComparefunctionthatletsyoureturntothe

statepriortoyourediting(orundoedits)isnot

availableinGlobalmode.

Global settings

Basic setup

Tuning and Transposing

Tuning to another instrument

Toadjustthetuninginfineincrements,inorderto

matchotherinstrumentsorrecordedmusic:

1. InGlobalmode,gotoP0:BasicSetup–Basicpage.

2. AdjusttheMasterTunetothedesiredpitch.

TheMasterTuneisadjustableoverarangeof±50cents

(onesemitone=100cents).WhenMasterTuneisat0,

middleAistunedto440Hz.

Transposing the keyboard

Youcanalsotransposethekeyboardinsemitones,for

quickkey‐changes(forinstance,ifthebanddecidesto

playasonginFratherthanE).Todoso:

1. InGlobalmode,gotoP0:BasicSetup–Basicpage.

2. AdjusttheKeyTransposeasdesired.

Youcanadjustthetranspositionoverarangeof±1

octave.

3. UsetheGlobalmodeP1:MIDI–MIDIBasicpage

ConvertPositionparametertospecifytheposition

atwhichthetransposeandvelocitycurvesettings

willbeapplied.

PreMIDIisthenormalsetting.Withthissetting,the

TransposesettingdescribedaboveandtheVelocity

CurvedescribedbelowwillbeappliedtotheKROME’s

keyboardperformancedata,andwillaffectboththe

MIDIOUTandtheinternalsoundgenerator.Thisis

alsorequiredinordertorecordtheoutputofthe

curvesintotheinternalsequencer.

PostMIDIappliesthetranspositionandcurvesto

incomingMIDI,foradjustingtheKROMEresponseto

anexternalMIDIcontroller.

Whensimplyplayingtheinternalsoundsfromthe

KROMEkeyboard,bothsettingsworkthesame.

Adjusting the keyboard response

VelocitycurveletyouadjustthewaytheKROME

respondstohowyouplayonthekeyboard.The

defaultsettingshouldworkformostplayers,butthere

aremanyotherchoicestoletyoucustomizethe

responsetomatchyourownstyle.

Tosetthevelocityandaftertouchcurves:

1. InGlobalmode,gotoP0:BasicSetup–Basicpage.

2. SettheVelocityCurvetosuityourplayingstyle.

VelocityCurve4isthedefault,andshouldworkfor

mostplayers.

Tuning and

transpose

settings

Velocity/

curve settings

Effect bypass

settings

Link the

arpeggiator

Stop the

arpeggiator

and drum

track

Adjusting Global KROME setings

110

Curve9isdesignedspecificallyforplayingpiano

soundsfromtheweightedNHkeyboardsinthe73‐

noteand88‐notemodels.

Fordetailsontheothercurves,seethegraphicbelow,

aswellasthe“VelocityCurve”sectiononpage 194of

theParameterGuide.

3. Specifythepositionwherethevelocitycurvewill

beapplied.Formoreabout“ConvertPosition,”

pleasesee“Transposingthekeyboard,”above.

Velocitycurves

Bypassing the effects

YoucanbypasstheKROME’sinserteffects,master

effects,andtotaleffects.Thesesettingswillbypassthe

effectsinallmodes.Ifyou’reusingeffectssuchas

reverborchorusprovidedbyanexternaleffect

processor,mixer,orDAW,youcanbypassthe

KROME’sowneffectssothattheywillnotbeused.

1. AccesstheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetup–Basic

page.

2. UsethevariousEffectGlobalSWbuttonstoselect

theeffectsthatyouwanttobypass.Theeffectwill

bebypassedifthecheckboxiscleared.

Clearingthe“IFX1‐5”box:Bypassestheinserteffects

Clearingthe“MFX1&2”box:Bypassesthemaster

effects

Clearingthe“TFX1&2”box:Bypassesthetotaleffects

“MFX1&2”and“TFX”canalsobecontrolledbythe

frontpanelMASTERFXbuttonandTOTALFXbutton.

Thisisconvenientwhenyouwanttotemporarilyturn

offtheseeffectsduringaperformance.

Note: Theseparameterswillalwaysbeturnedonwhen

theKROMEstartsup.

Arpeggiator recall settings (Linking

the arpeggiator with programs or

combinations)

Youcanspecifywhetherthearpeggiatorsettings

writtenintoeachprogramorcombinationwillalsobe

selectedwhenyouselectthatprogramorcombination,

orwhetherthearpeggiatorwillstayinitscurrentstate

withoutchangingsettings.

Withthefactorysettings,theformerwilloccur.You

canchoosethelatterbehaviorifyouwanttoplay

phrasesandpatternswithcertainarpeggiatorsettings

whileyouswitchonlythesoundbetweendifferent

programsorcombinations.

1. AccesstheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetup–Basic

page.

2. Inthe“LoadARPwhenchanging”area,ifthe

“Program”or“Combination”boxisselected,

switchingprogramsorcombinationsrespectively

willrecallthearpeggiatorsettingswritteninthat

programorcombination.

Disabling the arpeggiator and drum

track

1. AccesstheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetup–Basic

page.

2. Ifthe“AllARP/DTOff”boxisselected,all

arpeggiatoranddrumtrackfunctionalitywillbe

turnedoff.

EveniftheARPorDRUMTRACKbuttonsareon,the

arpeggiatoranddrumtrackwillnotfunction.

Recalling the last-selected mode and

page at power-on

1. AccesstheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetup–System

Preferencespage.

2. IfthePower‐OnModeissettoReset(factory

setting),KROMEwillautomaticallyselectthe

ProgrammodeP0:Play.

IfthePowerOnModeissettoMemorize,thelocation

(modeandpage)andtheprogramorcombination

numberthathadbeenselectedwhenyouturnedoff

thepowerwillberecalled.

Enabling a beep tone when the

display is pressed

1. AccesstheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetup–System

Preferencespage.

2. Ifthe“BeepEnable”checkboxisselected,abeep

tonewillsoundwhenyoupressanobjectinthe

display.Clearthecheckboxifyoudon’twanta

beeptosound.

Protecting the memory

1. AccesstheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetup–System

Preferencespage.

2. IfaMemoryProtectcheckboxisselected,the

correspondingwrite,dataload,orsongrecording

operationwillbedisabled,thusprotectingthe

contentsofmemory.

1

MAX

127

1

8

65

43

2

7

Soft

127

Strong

1

1

2

3

8

65

4

7

99

Velocity (MIDI In to sound engines)

Velocity (Keyboard to MIDI Out)

Convert Position = PostMIDIConvert Position = PreMIDI

Velocity

eect

Select the

mode that is

selected at

power-on

Beep setting

Memory

protect

settings

Global settings MIDI Settings

111

Other screen display settings (Edit

pad function and animation)

Youcankeeptheeditpad(seepage 4)orrealtime

controlpopup(seepage 6)fromappearing,and

disabletheanimationthatappearswhenapopupis

displayed.

1. AccesstheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetup–System

Preferencespage.

2. Ifthe“ValueEditPop‐up,”“RealtimeControls

Pop‐up,”and“Animation”checkboxarecleared,

therespectivefunctionwillbedisabled.

Note: IftheKROMEisprocessinglargeamountsof

musicaldatasuchasfromthedrumtrackorsequencer,

therealtimecontrolpopupsoranimationeffectsmight

bedisabledautomaticallyinsomecases.

MIDI Settings

Global MIDI Channel

TheGlobalMIDIChannelisthemostimportantMIDI‐

relatedsettingintheKROME.Itdeterminesthemain

MIDIchannelusedforbothProgramandCombination

modes,forinstance.TosettheGlobalMIDIChannel:

1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDI–MIDIBasicpage.

2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIChannel

asdesired.

MIDI Clock synchronization

TheKROMEcanuseitsowninternaltempo,or

synchronizetoexternalclocksfromeitherMIDIor

USB.

Thebestgeneral‐purposesettingisAuto.Thiscombine

thefunctionalityofInternalandExternalMIDI/USB,

sothatyoudon’thavetomanuallyswitchbetweenthe

two:

•Ifexternalclocksarebeingreceived,theycontrol

theKROMEtempo.

•Ifexternalclocksarenotbeingreceived,the

KROMEusesitsinternaltempoinstead.

Synchronizing to a USB-connected computer

IfyouwanttosynchronizetheKROME’stempotoa

computerconnectedviaUSB:

1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDI–MIDIBasicpage.

2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIClockto

Auto.

Pedal and other controller

settings

IntheGlobalmodeP2:Controllers–FootControllers

pageyoucanassignthefunctionsoftheassignable

buttonsandassignablepedals.(See“Connectinga

damperpedal,footswitch,orfootpedal”onpage 18.)

Global MIDI

channel

Local

Control

on/off

MIDI clock

settings

Global MIDI

filter settings

Assignable

button and

Assignable

Pedal settings

Adjusting Global KROME setings

112

Creating user scales

TheGlobalP3:Scalespageletsyoucreateyourown

originalscales.YoucancreatesixteenUserOctave

Scaleswhichallowyoutospecifythepitchofeachnote

inanoctave(whichwillthenbeappliedacrossall

octaves),andyoucancreateoneUserAllNoteScale

whichallowsyoutoindividuallyspecifythepitchfor

everyoneofthe128notes.

Byadjustingthepitchofeachkeyintherangeof±99

cents,youcanraiseorloweritbyapproximatelyone

semitonerelativetothenormalpitch.

Theuserscalesyoucreateherecanbeusedby

specifyingthescaleforaprogram,foreachtimbreofa

combination,orforeachtrackofasong.

Youcanchoosethesescalesfromthefollowingpages.

Hereishowtosetthescaletypeforeachtimbrein

Sequencermode.

1. Createauseroctavescaleorauserallnotesscale.

Selectakey,andusetheVALUEcontrollerstoadjust

thepitch.Therangeof±99raisesorlowersthepitch

approximatelyonesemitoneaboveorbelowthe

standardpitch.

Note: Youcanalsoselectthekeybyholdingdownthe

ENTERbuttonandplayinganoteonthekeyboard.

Alternatively,youcanturnonthekeylockbuttonand

thenplayanoteonthekeyboard.

Note: Youcancopyoneofthepresetscalesandeditit

tocreateanoriginalscale.Todoso,usethepagemenu

commandCopyScale.

2. AccesstheSequencermodeP3:TrackParameters–

OtherT01–08orT09–16page.

3. IfyouwanttheTracktousethescalesavedwith

itsindividualProgram,checkthetrack’s“Use

Program’sScale”checkbox.

Tracksthatarenotcheckedwillusethescalespecified

byScale“Type(Song’sScale).”

4. Set“Type(Song’sScale)”toselectthescaleforthe

currentlyselectedsong.

Setting Category Names

IntheGlobalP4:Categorypagesyoucanassignnames

tothecategoriesandsub‐categoriesofprogramsand

combinations.

EditingtheCategory/subcategorynamesisvery

simple:

1. PresstheT(Text)buttonnexttothenameyou’d

liketoedit.

Thetexteditingdialogwillappear.

2. Enterthenewname,andpressOK.

ToeditaSubCategoryname:

1. ChoosetheMainCategoryfromthepopupmenu.

2. EdittheSub‐Categorynamesasdescribedabove.

Mode Page

Program P1: Basic/Controllers– Note-On/Scale:

Scale

Combination P3: Timbre Parameters– Scale T01–08/

T09–16: Scale, Use Program’s Scale

Sequencer P3: Track Parameters– Scale T01–08/T09–

16: Scale, Use Program’s Scale

User Octave

Scales select

Key lock

button

Category

name

settings

113

Loading & saving data

Saving data

Saving data on the KROME

YoucansavetheKROME’svarioustypesofdatainthe

followingways.

•Writingtointernalmemory

•SavingtoanSDcard(commerciallyavailable)

•MIDIdatadump

Writing to internal memory

Thefollowingtypesofdatacanbewrittenintothe

internalmemory.

•Program

Programs000–127inbanksA–F

•Combination

Combinations000–127inbanksA–D

•Globalsettings

(GlobalP0:BasicSetup–P4:Category)

•Userdrumkits

00(INT)–47(USER)

•Userarpeggiopatterns

U0000(INT)–U1027(USER)

•UserDrumTrackpatterns

U000–U999

(Seepage 97)

•UsertemplatesongsU00–U15

Songsettingssuchasthesongnameandtempo,

tracksettings(seepage 106oftheParameter

Guide),arpeggiator,andeffectsettingscanbe

saved(written)tointernalmemory.However,the

musicaldataforsongtracksandpatternsarenot

savedtointernalmemory.Furthermore,settings

thatgovernhowthemusicaldataisplayedback

suchasMeter,Metronome,PLAY/MUTE,Track

PlayLoop(includingStart/Endmeasure),and

RPPRsettingswillnotbesavedeither.Usethe

SequencermodemenucommandSaveTemplate

Songtowritethisdata;fordetails,pleasesee

page 164oftheParameterGuide.

•Effectpresets

Foreacheffect,youcanwriteparametersettings

intointernalmemorybyusingthemenucommand

WriteFXPreset.

Themusicaldataandsetupdataofasongyou

createinSequencermodecannotbesavedinthe

KROME’sinternalmemory.You’llneedtosave

thisdatatoacommerciallyavailableSDcardorby

usingMIDIdatadump.

About preloaded data and preset data

“Preloadeddata”referstothedatathatisloadedinthe

KROMEwhenitisshippedfromthefactory.Youare

freetorewritethisdata,andwiththeexceptionofthe

demosongs,thedatawillbewrittentothelocationas

describedin“Writingtointernalmemory.”Thisdatais

storedintheKROME’ssystemarea.

Youcanreloadthefactorypreloaddataintointernal

memorybyusingtheGlobalmodemenucommand

LoadPreload/DemoData.

Presetdata,ontheotherhand,isdatathatcannotbe

overwrittenbytheWriteoperation.Thisincludesthe

followingdata.

•GMprogrambanksGM,g(1)–g(9),g(d)

•GMdrumkits48(GM)–56(GM)

•PresettemplatesongsP00–P15

•PresetpatternsP000–P605

Saving to SD card

ThefollowingdatacanbesavedtoanSDcard

(commerciallyavailable)insertedintheKROME’sSD

cardslot.

•.PCGfile:

Programs,Combinations,Drumkits,Global

settings,userDrumTrackpatterns,anduser

arpeggiopatterns(Thedatathatwascheckedinthe

checkboxesoftheSavedialogboxwillbesaved.)

•.SNGfile:

Songandcuelist.

•.EXLfile:

Systemexclusivedatafromanexternaldevicethat

wassavedontheKROME(ThisallowstheKROME

tobeusedasadatafiler.)

•.MIDfile:

SavesaSequencermodesonginStandardMIDI

File(SMF)format.

(Seetheillustrationonthefollowingpage.)

MIDI data dump

TheKROMEcantransmitthefollowingtypesofdata

asaMIDIdatadump;youcansavethisdataonan

externaldatafilerorotherdevice.

•Programs,combinations,drumkits,andglobal

settings

•Songandcuelist

•Userdrumkitpatterns

•Userarpeggiopattern

Fordetails,pleasesee“Dump:”onpage 218ofthe

ParameterGuide.

Loading & saving data

114

Supportedfiletypes

Undened DOS le

All user

arpeggio patterns

1 user

arpeggiopattern

bank INT, USER

.PCG le

DOS les

All programs 1 program

bank A...F

1 program

All combinations 1 combination

bank A...D

1 combination

1 drum kit

1 drum track

pattern

All track

All drum track

patterns

Global settings

All drum kits

User

1 drum kit

bank INT, USER

DOS directory

DOS les

.MID le

.EXL le

.SNG le

1 song

(S000-127)

1 user pattern

(U00–99)

Cue list

Saving data Writing to internal memory

115

Writing to internal memory

Writing a Program or Combination

About the Program and Combination edit

buffer

WhenyouselectaprograminProgP0:Playora

combinationinCombiP0:Play,theprogramor

combinationdataiscalledintotheKROME’sedit

buffer.

WhenyouthenusethevariousProgramor

Combinationpagestoedittheparameters,your

changeswillaffectthedataintheeditbuffer.

Ifyouwishtosavethismodifieddataintointernal

memory,youmustperformtheWriteoperation.

WhenyouperformtheWriteoperation,thedatainthe

editbufferiswrittentothespecifiedprogramor

combinationnumberofthespecifiedbank.

Ifyouselectanotherprogramorcombinationwithout

writingyouredits,thedataofthenewlyselected

programorcombinationwilloverwritetheediteddata

intheeditbuffer,andyourchangeswillbelost.

Note: WhenyoupresstheCOMPAREbuttonin

Programmode,orCombinationmode,thedatafrom

memory(i.e.,thecontentsthatwerewritteninto

memory)willbetemporarilycalledintotheeditbuffer.

Thisallowsyoutocomparethesettingsyouareediting

withtheoriginalun‐editedsettings.

Writing (saving) procedure

TheProgramandCombinationsettingsyou’vemade

inthevariouseditingpagescanbesavedtointernal

memory.Thisactionisreferredtoas“writinga

program”or“writingaCombination.”Ifyouwant

yourediteddatatobepreservedafterthepoweris

turnedoff,youmustperformaWriteoperation.

TherearetwowaystowriteaProgramor

Combination.

•UsetheWRITEbutton.

•UsetheWriteProgramorWriteCombination

menucommandsintheupperrightofthedisplay.

Beforeyoucanwritedataintomemory,youmust

turnoffthememoryprotectsettinginGlobal

mode.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Memoryprotect”on

page 117.

Acombinationdoesnotcontaintheactual

programdataforeachtimbre,butsimply

referencesthenumberoftheprogramusedby

eachtimbre.Ifyoueditaprogramthatisusedbya

combination,orexchangeitwithadifferent

programnumber,thesoundofthecombination

willalsochange,reflectingthealteredprogram.

1. Verifythattheprogramorcombinationyouwant

tosaveisselected.

2. PresstheWRITEbutton.

Alternatively,pressthepagemenubuttonintheupper

rightofthedisplay,andselectthemenucommand

“WriteProgram”or“WriteCombination.”

TheWriteProgramorWriteCombinationdialogbox

willappear.

ThisscreenshotisforProgrammode

3. Checktheprogram/combinationnamedisplayed

intheupperline(thewritingsource).

4. Ifyouwishtochangethenameoftheprogram/

combination,pressthetexteditbutton.

Thetextdialogboxwillappear.Enterthenameofthe

program/combination.Fordetails,pleasesee“Editing

names”onpage 117.

Afteryouhaveenteredthename,presstheOKbutton

toreturntotheWriteProgram/WriteCombination

dialogbox.

5. In“Category,”specifythecategoryoftheProgram/

Combination.

6. Selecta“SubCategory”aswell.

Forcombinations,thecategoryandsub‐categoryyou

specifyherecanbeselectedinthefollowingpages.

ProgP0:Play

“Category”

CombiP0:Play–ProgramT01–08,09–16

“Category”

SeqP0:Play/REC–ProgramT01–08,09–16

“Category”

ForPrograms,thecategory/sub‐categoryyouspecify

herecanbeselectedinthefollowingpages.

CombiP0:Play–ProgramT01–08,09–16

“Category”

7. Use“To”tospecifythebankandnumberofthe

writingdestinationprogram/combination.

UsetheVALUEcontrollersortheBANKbuttonsto

makeyourselection.

8. ToexecutetheWriteoperation,presstheWRITE

button.

Alternatively,presstheOKbuttonintheWritedialog

box.

Edit Buer

Write Select

Internal Memory

Edit

Program

A 0...127

Combination

A 0...127

When you write, the

program or combination

settings will be saved in

internal memory.

When you select a program

or combination, its data is

called from internal memory

into the edit buer.

Editing applies to the data in the edit

buer. Programs or combinations will

play according to the data in the edit

buer.

Loading & saving data

116

TocancelwithoutexecutingpresstheCancelbuttonor

EXITbutton.

About the Tone Adjust settings that are

saved

TherearethreetypesofToneAdjustparameters,as

listedbelow.Thewayinwhichsettingsarewrittenwill

dependonthetype.

•Absolute:ThistypeofToneAdjustparameter

controlsasingleprogramparameter.TheProgram

parameterandtheToneAdjustparameterreflect

eachotherexactly.Ifyoueditone,theother

parameterwillreflecttheidenticalchange.This

typeofToneAdjustparameter“absolutely”

controlstheprogramparameteritself.

•Relative:ThistypeofToneAdjustparameter

controlstwoormoreprogramparameters

simultaneously.Forexample,“Filter/AmpEG

AttackTime”controlsatotalofsixprogram

parameters.Thevalueofarelativeparameter

indicatestheamountofchangethatisappliedto

thevalueofeachprogramparameterit’saffecting.

Whenarelativeparameterisatzero(i.e.,whenits

sliderisinthecenterposition),theprogram

parametersitcontrolswillfunctionaccordingto

theiroriginalsettings.Raisingorloweringthevalue

ofarelativeparameterwillindirectlyraiseorlower

thevalueoftheseprogramparameters.

•Meta:ThistypeofToneAdjustparameteraffects

otherToneAdjustparameters.Itdoesnotaffect

programparametersdirectly.

Ifyou’veadjustedanabsoluteorarelativeToneAdjust

parameter,theresultofyouradjustmentwillbe

writtenasfollows.

Program mode:

•Thesettingsofrelative‐typeToneAdjust

parametersareautomaticallyapplieddirectlytothe

programparameterswhenyouwritetheprogram.

TheToneAdjustvalueswillberesettozero.

•Thesettingsofabsolute‐typeToneAdjust

parametersarewritten“asthemselves”(i.e.,asthe

newsettingsofthoseToneAdjustparameters).

Combination mode:

•Thesettingsofbothrelative‐typeandabsolute‐type

ToneAdjustparametersarewrittenandpreserved

astheToneAdjustsettingsforeachtimbre.

Fordetails,pleaseseepages7,75oftheParameter

Guide.

Writing Global settings, User Drum

Kits and User Arpeggio Patterns

Memory in Global mode

Whenthepoweristurnedon,theGlobalmodedatais

calledfrominternalmemoryintotheGlobalmode

memoryarea.Thenwhenyoumodifytheparameters

inGlobalmode,thedatainthememoryareawillbe

modified.Ifyouwishtosavethismodifieddatain

internalmemory,youmustWriteit.

Whenyouwritethisdata,thedatainthememoryarea

iswrittenintointernalmemory.

Ifyouturnoffthepowerwithoutwriting,themodified

datainthememoryareawillbelost.

Writing (saving) procedure

ThefollowingthreetypesofGlobalmodedatacanbe

savedbywritingitintotheKROME’smemory.

•Globalsettings(thesettingsinGlobalP0–P4)

•Drumkits(thesettingsinGlobalP5)

• Arpeggiopatterns(thesettingsinGlobalP6)

Changesyoumaketothisdatawillberememberedas

longasthepowerremainson,butwillbelostwhen

youturnoffthepower.Ifyouwanttokeepyour

changesevenafterturningthepoweroff,youmust

writethemintomemory.

Thefollowingareexceptions.

ParametersthatarenotsavedevenifyouWrite

• EffectGlobalSW

Parametersthataresavedevenifyoudon’tWrite

•AutoPower‐Off

1. Accessthepagethatcontainstheparametersor

settingsthatyouwanttosave.

ChooseoneoftheP0–P4pagesifyouwanttowrite

globalsettings,chooseP5ifyouwanttowritedrum

kits,orchooseP6ifyouwanttowritearpeggio

patterns.

2. PresstheWRITEbutton.

Alternatively,pressthepagemenubuttonintheupper

rightofthedisplay,andchoose“WriteGlobalSetting,”

“WriteDrumKits,”or“WriteArpeggioPatterns.”The

correspondingoneofthefollowingdialogboxeswill

appear.

WriteGlobalSettingdialogbox(P0–P4)

Memory Area

Write Power On

Internal Memory

Edit

Global Setting

P0...P4

Drum Kits

P5

Arpeggio Patterns

P6

Editing will aect the data that has

been called into the memory area.

When you Write, the

various Global mode

settings will be saved in

internal memory.

When the power is

turned on, the settings

are called into the

memory area.

Saving data Editing names

117

WriteDrumKitsdialogbox(P5)

WriteArpeggioPatternsdialogbox(P6)

3. ToexecutetheWritecommand,presstheWRITE

button.

Alternatively,presstheOKbuttonintheWritedialog

box.

Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheEXITbuttonor

theCancelbutton.

Memory protect

TopreventPrograms,Combinations,Songs,Drum

Kits,andUserArpeggioPatternsfrombeing

overwrittenaccidentally,theKROMEprovidesa

MemoryProtectsettingthatprohibitswritingto

memory.

Beforeyousaveediteddataorloaddatafrommedia,

usethefollowingproceduretoturnthememory

protectoff(unchecktheappropriatecheckbox).

Youmustalsoturnmemoryprotectoffbeforeloading

theabovedatafrommediaorviaaMIDIdatadump,

orbeforerecordinginSequencermode.

1. PresstheGLOBALbuttontoenterGlobalmode.

2. AccesstheGlobalP0:BasicSetup–System

Preferencespage.

3. Pressthe“MemoryProtect”checkboxforthetype

ofdatayouwishtowritetointernalmemory,so

thattheboxisunchecked.

Editing names

Youcanmodifythenameofaneditedprogram,

combination,song,drumkit,oruserarpeggiopatterns

etc.

Youcanalsomodifythecategorynamesforprograms

andcombinations.

Theserenamingprocedurescanbeperformedinthe

followingpages.

1. Inthepageslistedabove,orafterselectingamenu

commandinthesepages,pressthetexteditbutton

toaccessthetexteditdialogbox.

Item Page

Program Prog P0…9 menu command:

Write Program

Combination Combi P0…9 menu command:

Write Combination

Song Seq P0…5 menu command:

Rename Song

Track Seq P6: Track Name

Pattern Seq P10: Pattern Name

Cue list Seq P11: menu command: Rename

Cue List

Program category/

sub category Global P4: Program Category

Combination category/

sub category Global P4: Combination Category

Drum Kit Global P5 menu command:

Rename Drum Kit

Arpeggio Pattern Global P6 menu command:

Rename Arpeggio Pattern

File

Media Save: Save All…Save Exclusive,

Media Utility menu command:

Rename, Create Directory, Format

Seq P0–P11:

Save Songs and Cue Lists Data

Effect preset Prog, Combi, Seq P8, 9 menu

command: Write FX Preset

Character

buttons

Shift button

Switches

between

uppercase and

lowercase

characters.

Delete button

Deletes the

character to the

left of the cursor.

Cursor buttons

Move the cursor

to left or right.

Space button

Insert a space at

the cursor location.

Clear button

Delete all characters

of the text.

Cancel button, OK button

If you are satised with the text

that you input, press the OK

button. If you wish to discard

your input and exit the text edit

box, press the Cancel button.

Cursor

Character Set Selects

the type of character.

Text

Loading & saving data

118

Saving to SD card (Media–

Save)

Fordetailsonthedatathatcanbesavedonstorage

media.Fordetails,pleasesee“Savingdata”on

page 113.

ThemusicaldataofasongyoucreateinSequencer

modecannotbesavedintheKROME’sinternal

memory.Youmustsavethisdataona

commerciallyavailableSDcard,orsaveitusing

MIDIdatadump.Whenyou’vecomeupwith

settingsyoulike,it’sagoodideatosavethem,so

thatevenifyousubsequentlyeditthosesettings,

you’llalwaysbeabletoreloadtheprevious

settingsifdesired.

Types of SD card you can use

SD card specifications

SDmemorycardsupto2GBandSDHCmemorycards

upto32GBaresupported.

SDXCmemorycardsarenotsupported.

MS‐DOSformatFAT16orFAT32aresupported.

Mediaisnotincluded.Youwillneedtopurchaseit

separately.

Inserting/removing a card in the SD

card slot

Ifyou’veplacedanSDcardintheSDcardslot,youcan

useittosaveorloadvarioustypesofProgram,

Combination,andSongdata.

About the write protect setting of an SD card

SDcardshaveawriteprotectswitchthatpreventsthe

datafrombeingoverwrittenaccidentallyandlost.If

yousetthecard’sLock(writeprotect)switchtothe

“protected”setting,itwillbeimpossibletowriteor

erasedataonthecard,ortoformatit.Ifyouneedto

saveediteddataonthecard,movetheswitchbackto

itsoriginal“unprotected”setting.

Inserting a card

•InsertanSDcardintheSDcardslot.

Withthecardlabelfacingupward,inserttheconnector

endofthecardintotheSDcardslotandpressitin

untilyouhearaclick.

Makesurethatthecardisorientedcorrectlywhen

youinsertit.Forcingitinthewrongdirectionmay

damagetheslotorthecard,andthedatamaybe

lost.

Removing a card

NeverremoveanSDcardfromtheslotwhile

loading,saving,orformattingisinprogress.

•RemovethecardfromtheSDcardslot.

Pressthecardinward;youwillhearaclick,andthe

cardwillpopoutpart‐way,allowingyoutopullit

completelyout.

Refertotheowner’smanualincludedwithyour

card,andobservetheguidelinesforhandlingand

use.

Formatting media

SomeconsumerelectronicsproductsthatuseSDcards

utilizetheirownproprietaryformat.Beforeusingan

SDcardwiththeKROME,youmustformatitonthe

KROME(seepage 123).

How to save data

Asanexamplehere,we’llexecuteSaveAlltosavethe

.PCGand.SNGfiles.

“SaveAll”savesallinternalmemoryPrograms,

Combinations,Globalsettings,DrumKits,User

ArpeggioPatterns,andDrumTrackUserPatternsto

mediaasa.PCGfile.Italsosavessongsandcuelistsas

a.SNGfile.

Thismethodisavailableonlyifthecurrentdirectoryis

aDOSdirectory.

Ifyousavethisdatatolow‐capacitymedia,you

mayneedmorethanonemedia.

1. Preparethemediaonwhichyouwanttosavethe

data.

2. PresstheMEDIAbuttontoenterMediamode.

3. AccesstheMedia–Savepage.PresstheSavetab.

4. Ifthemediacontainsdirectories,selectthe

directoryinwhichyouwanttosavethedata.

PresstheOpenbuttontomovetoalowerlevel,or

presstheUpbuttontomovetoanupperlevel.

Note: Ifyouaresavingdataonhigh‐capacitymedia,

werecommendthatyoucreatedirectoriestoorganize

themediaintosections.

Tocreateanewdirectory,movetothelevelatwhich

youwanttocreatethedirectory,andexecutetheUtility

menucommandCreateDirectory.

5. Pressthemenubuttontoaccessthemenu,and

pressSaveAll.

Adialogboxwillappear.Thecontents,settings,and

operationsforthedialogboxwilldependonthetype

ofdatathatyouaresaving.

SD card slot

SD card

Saving data Using the KROME as a data filer

119

6. Pressthetexteditbuttonandinputafilenamefor

thefileyouwanttosave.(Seepage 117.)

7. PresseachSelectionbuttontoaccessthedialog

box,andusethecheckboxestouncheckanyitems

thatyoudonotneedtosave.

Inordertoaccuratelyreproducethedatayoucreated,

werecommendthatyoucheckalloftheboxes.

Whenyou’vefinishedmakingsettings,presstheOK

buttontoclosethedialogbox.

8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSaveoperation.

•Ifthedatafitsononevolumeofmedia

Thedatawillbesavedonthespecifiedmedia,and

youwillreturntotheSavepage.

•Ifthedatadoesnotfitononevolumeofmedia

The“Nospaceavailableonmedia”dialogboxwill

appear.

PresstheOKbuttonandthefilewillbedividedand

savedtomultiplevolumesofmedia.Ifyoudon’twant

todividethefile,presstheCancelbutton,andre‐save

ittolarger‐capacitymedia.

Fordetails,pleasesee“Ifthedatabeingsaveddoesnot

fitononevolumeofmedia”onpage 231ofthe

ParameterGuide.

9. WhensavingendsandyoureturntotheSave

page,thedisplaywillshowthefilethatwassaved.

Thevarioustypesofdataaresavedasthefollowing

files.

•.PCGfile

•.SNGfile

Cautions when saving

If an identically named file exists on the media

Ifafilewiththesamenamealreadyexistsonthe

media,youwillbeaskedwhetheryouwantto

overwrite.Ifyouwishtooverwrite,presstheOK

button.Ifyouwanttosavewithoutoverwriting,press

theCancelbuttonandrenamethefilebeforeyousave

it.Fordetails,pleasesee“Editingnames”onpage 117.

Please note when saving

•WhenusingSaveAll(PCG&SNG),andSave

PCGtosavecombinations,youshouldalso

remembertosavetheprogramsusedbyeach

timbre(orthedrumkits,anduserarpeggio

patternsusedbytheprograms)atthesametime.

Similarlywhensavingprograms,youshouldalso

remembertosavethedrumkits,userdrumtrack

patternsanduserarpeggiopatternsusedbythe

programs.

Time required when saving data

•Thelengthoftimerequiredwilldependonthe

amountofdatabeingsaved.

Using the KROME as a data

filer

TheKROMEcanreceiveMIDISystemExclusivedata

sentbyanexternaldevice,andsavethisdatatomedia.

(Thisissometimesreferredtoasthe“DataFiler”

function.)Fordetails,pleasesee“SaveExclusive”on

page 232oftheParameterGuide.

Loading & saving data

120

Loading data

Data that can be loaded

Loading from media

Youcanloadthefollowingdatafrommedia.

•.PCGfile:

Programs,Combinations,DrumKits,Global

settings,UserArpeggioPatterns,andUserDrum

Trackpatterns

•.SNGfile:

Songandcuelist.

•.MIDfile:

StandardMIDIfile(SMF)format

•.EXLfile:

MIDIexclusivedata

Loading the preloaded data and

demo songs to restore the factory

settings

Youcanloadthefactorysettingsanddemosongsback

intotheKROME’sinternalmemory.Fortheprocedure,

pleasesee“Loadingthepreloadeddata”onpage 125.

•Preloaddata:

Programs,Combinations,DrumKits,Global

settings,UserArpeggioPatterns

• Demosongdata

Loading data from SD card

(Media–Load)

Loading all Programs, Combinations,

Drum Kits and Arpeggio patterns

Herewe’llexplainhowtoloadalldatafroma.PCGfile

containingPrograms,Combinations,Drumkits,

Globalsettings,UserArpeggiopatterns,andDrum

Trackpatternsinasingleoperation.

WhenloadingPrograms,Combinations,Songs,or

DrumKits,youmustmakesurethattheGlobal

modememoryprotectsettingisunchecked.For

details,pleasesee“Memoryprotect”onpage 117.

Note: Pleaseseepage 117fordetailsontheSDcard

fromwhichyoucanloaddata.

1. Makesurethatthemediaisreadyforyoutoload

data.Fordetails,pleasesee“Inserting/removinga

cardintheSDcardslot”onpage 118.

2. AccesstheMedia–Loadpage.PresstheLoadtab.

3. Pressthe.PCGfilecontainingtheprogramand

combinationdatayouwanttoload,sothatthefile

ishighlighted.

•Iftherearedirectories,presstheOpenbuttonto

movetoalowerlevel,orpresstheUpbuttonto

movebacktothehigherlevel.

4. PresstheLoadbutton.Alternatively,choosethe

menucommand“LoadSelected.”

Adialogboxwillappear.

5. Ifyouwanttoloadsongdataatthesametime,

selectthe“Load********.SNGtoo”box.Whenyou

executetheloadoperation,the.SNGfilewillbe

loadedtogetherwiththe.PCGfile.

Use“Select.SNGAllocation”tospecifythedestination

towhichthesongdatawillbeloaded.

Loading data Loading data from SD card (Media–Load)

121

“A p p e n d ” willloadthesongintothesongnumberthat

followsthesong(s)currentlyexistingininternal

memory,withoutleavingavacantnumber.

“Clear”willeraseallsongsfrominternalmemory,and

loadthesongsintothenumbersfromwhichtheywere

saved.

6. PresstheOKbutton.Alldatafromthe.PCGfile

willbeloadedintotheKROME.

Neverremovethemediawhiledataisbeing

loaded.

Note: Youcanloadindividualbanksofprogramsor

combinations.Fordetails,pleaseseepage 228and

followingoftheParameterGuide.

Loading individual data from a .PCG

file

TheKROMEletsyouloadPrograms,Combinations,

Drumkits,userDrumKitpatterns,UserArpeggio

patternsindividuallyorbyindividualbanks.Thisisa

convenientwaytorearrangeCombinationsinthe

orderinwhichyouwillusethemduringalive

performance.

BeawarethatifyouchangetheorderofPrograms,

thesoundsplayedbyCombinationsmayalsobe

affected.

Asanexamplehere,wewillexplainhowa

combinationsavedinbankAcanbeloadedintoD000.

1. Movetothe“BankA”directory,andselectthe

Combinationthatyouwanttoload.(.PCGfile/

Combinations/BankA/)

Theprocedureisasfollows:

•Performsteps1–3under“LoadingallPrograms,

Combinations,DrumKitsandArpeggiopatterns”

onpage 120.Selectthe.PCGfilecontainingthedata

youwanttoload(itwillbehighlighted),andpress

theOpenbutton.

•Press“Combinations”tohighlightit,andpressthe

Openbutton.

•Press“BankA”tohighlightit,andpresstheOpen

button.

•PressthescrollbartofindtheCombinationyou

wanttoload,andhighlightit.

Alternatively,youcouldselectanyfile,sincethe

desiredfilecanbeselectedlaterfromthedialogbox.

Note: WhenyoupressthekeyboardoftheKROME,

youwillhearthecombinationyouhaveselected.

However,theinternalprogramswillbeusedasthe

programofeachtimbre.

2. PresstheLoadbutton.Alternatively,choosethe

menucommand“LoadSelected.”

Adialogboxwillappear.

3. Usethe“Combination”(upperline)toselectthe

load‐sourcecombination,anduse“(To)

Combination”(lowerline)tospecifythe

destinationcombination.Forthisexample,select

D000.

Youcanpressthepopupbuttonandselectfroma

menu,orusetheBANKbuttonsandnumerickeysto

makeaselection.

4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteloading;theloaded

combinationwillbeassignedtoD000.

Loading songs for use in Sequencer

mode (.SNG)

Asanexamplehere,wewillexplainhowtoloada

song.We’llassumethatthissongusesedited

programs,multisamplesyousampledandprograms

thatusedrumkitanduserarpeggiopatternsetc.In

suchcases,itisbesttoload“alldata.”

1. Performsteps1–3under“LoadingallPrograms,

Combinations,DrumKitsandArpeggiopatterns”

onpage 120.Selectthe.SNGfilecontainingthe

datayouwanttoload(itwillbehighlighted).

2. PresstheLoadbutton.Alternatively,choosethe

menucommandLoadSelected.

Adialogboxwillappear.

Note: Thecontentsandsettingsofthedialogboxwill

differdependingonthetypeoffilethatyouare

loading.

3. Checkthe“Load********.PCGtoo”checkbox.

Whenyouexecuteloading,the.PCGfilewillbeloaded

alongwiththe.SNGfile.

Use“Select.SNGAllocation”tospecifythedestination

towhichthesongdatawillbeloaded.

“Append”willloadthesongintothesongnumberthat

followsthesong(s)currentlyexistingininternal

memory,withoutleavingavacantnumber.

“Clear”willeraseallsongsfrominternalmemory,and

loadthesongsintothenumbersfromwhichtheywere

saved.

Loading & saving data

122

4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteloading.

Neverremovethemediawhiledataisbeing

loaded.

Loading KROME system update data

YoucanupdatetheKROME’ssystembydownloading

themostrecentversionofthesystemfilefromthe

Korgwebsite(http://www.korg.com)toyour

computer,andloadingitintotheKROME.Fordetails

ontheprocedure,pleaseseetheKorgwebsiteandto

“UpdateSystemSoftware”onpage 218ofthe

ParameterGuide.

UsetheGlobalmodemenucommandUpdateSystem

Softwaretoloadthesystemupdatedata.

Media utility Formatting media

123

Media utility

Formatting media

Newlypurchasedmediaormediathathasbeenused

byanotherdevicecannotbeused“asis;”youmust

formatthemediabeforeyoucanuseitwiththe

KROME.

Whenyouformatmedia,alldatathathadbeen

savedonthatmediawillbeerased.Besureto

double‐checkmediafordatabeforeyouformat.

Afterformatting,itisnotpossibletopressthe

COMPAREbuttontoreturntothepreviousstate.

1. Makesurethatthemediayouwanttoformatis

inserted.Fordetails,pleasesee“Inserting/

removingacardintheSDcardslot”onpage 118.

2. AccesstheMedia–Utilitypage.PresstheUtility

tab.

3. Pressthemenubuttontoaccessthemenu,and

press“Format”toopenthedialogbox.

4. In“VolumeLabel,”usethetexteditbuttonto

accessthetexteditdialogbox,andspecifythe

volumelabel.

Thepreviously‐specifiedvolumelabelwillbe

displayed.Ifnovolumelabelhadbeenspecifiedforthe

media,orifanon‐DOSmediawasinserted,thiswill

indicate“NEWVOLUME.”

5. Specifytheinitializationformat.

QuickFormat:Thiserasesthefileinformationonthe

SDcard,allowingthecardtobeformattedquickly.

Normallyyou’llusethismethodofformatting.

FullFormat:Allblocksonthemediawillbeerased.

Normally,thereisnoneedtoapplyaFullFormat;you

shouldsimplyexecuteQuickFormat.

6. PresstheOKbuttontoformat,orpresstheCancel

buttonifyoudecidetocancel.

WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,amessagewillaskyou

forconfirmation.PresstheOKbuttononceagainto

executetheFormatoperation.

YoumustusetheKROMEtoformatthemedia.

TheKROMEwillnotcorrectlyrecognizemedia

thathasbeenformattedbyanotherdevice.

Setting the current time

Specifythedateandtime;thisisusedtorecordthe

correctdateandtimewhenyousavedata.Youcanset

thedateandtimebyusingtheMediaUtilitypage’sSet

Date/Timemenucommand.

TheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcalendar

orclock,youmustusetheUtilitymenucommand

SetDate/Timetosetthedateandtimebefore

savingthefile.

1. PresstheMEDIAbuttontoenterMediamode.

2. AccesstheMedia–Utilitypage.PresstheUtility

tab.

3. Openthemenu,andselecttheSetDate/Time

command.

Thefollowingdialogboxwillappear.

4. UsetheVA L U E controllerstosetthecorrectyear,

month,day,hour,minute,andsecond.

5. PresstheOKbutton.

Loading & saving data

124

125

Appendices

Restoring the factory settings

Loading the preloaded data

TheoriginalpreloaddataisbackedupintheKROME,

soyoucanrestoreanyorallofthePrograms,

Combinations,DrumKits,UserArpeggioPatterns,

andGlobalsettingstotheiroriginalfactorysettings.

Note: Theoriginaldemosongscanbere‐loadedatany

time.Fordetails,pleasesee“A b o u t thedataloadedby

All(PreloadPCGandDemoSongs)”.

Userbanksanduserpatternsintowhichpreloaddata

hasnotbeenloadedwillremainunchanged.Ifyou

wanttoeraseuserbanksoruserpatterns,initializethe

KROMEandthenloadthepreloaddata.Formore

details,pleasesee“Initialization”onpage 125.

Neverturnoffthepowerwhilethedataisbeing

loaded.

Beforeyouloadthepreloaddata,gototheGlobal

modeP0:BasicSetup–SystemPreferencespage,

anduncheckthe“MemoryProtect”settingsforthe

datathatyouwanttoload.Ifyouexecutethis

procedurewiththesesettingschecked,thedata

willnotbeloaded.

Loadingthepreloadeddatawilloverwritethe

contentsoftheinternalmemory.Ifyouwantto

keeptheexistingdatathatisstoredininternal

memory,use“SaveAll(PCG&SNG)”or“Save

PCG”tosaveyourdatatoexternalmediabefore

youcontinue.

1. AccesstheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetup–Basic

page.

EnterGlobalmodebypressingtheGLOBALbutton

orbyusingthemodebutton.

IftheGlobalP0:BasicSetup–Basicpageisnot

shown,presstheEXITbutton.

2. Pressthemenubutton,andchoose“LoadPreload/

DemoData.”

Adialogboxwillappear.

3. Inthe“Kind”field,selectAll(PreloadPCGand

DemoSongs).

4. PresstheOKbuttontoloadthepreloaddata.If

youdecidenottoloadthepreloaddata,pressthe

Cancelbutton.

WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,adialogboxwillask

youforconfirmation.PresstheOKbuttontoexecute

loading.

Note: Whenthedialogboxisdisplayed,theENTER

buttonperformsthesamefunctionastheOKbutton.

About the data loaded by All (Preload PCG

and Demo Songs)

WhenyouexecuteAllPreloadPCG,thefollowingdata

willbeloaded:

• Program:BankA,B,C,D,E

• Combination:BankA,B,C

•DrumKit:00(INT)–31(INT)

•UserArpeggioPattern:U0000(INT)–U899(INT)

•GlobalSetting

IfyouexecuteAll(PreloadPCGandDemoSongs),the

demosongswillbeloadedaswellastheabovedata.

•D

emoSong:S000–003

OnlywhenexecutingAll(PreloadPCGandDemo

Song)

Note: Aswiththeotherusersongs,theDemoSong

datawillnotremaininSequencermodewhenyouturn

offthepower.You’llneedtoloaditagainifnecessary.

Initialization

IfyourKROMEshouldbecomeunstable,youcan

initializeit.

•Turnoffthepower,andthen,whileholdingdown

theEXITbuttonandPAGEbutton,turnthepower

on.

TheKROMEwillbeinitialized.Whilethedatais

beingloaded,thedisplaywillindicate“Nowwrit‐

ingintointernalmemory.”

TheresultingstatewillbethesameaswhenLoad

Preload/DemoDataAllisexecuted(seepage 125).

Appendices

126

Troubleshooting

Ifyouexperienceproblems,pleaseseetherelevant

itemandtaketheappropriatemeasures.

Power supply

Power does not turn on

IstheACadapterconnectedtoanoutlet?→p.15

Power turns off

CouldtheAutoPower‐Offfunctionbeenabled?→p.16

Display

The power is turned on, but nothing is shown

on the display. The KROME functions normal-

ly when you play the keyboard or perform

other procedures.

AccesstheGlobalmodemenu“DisplaySetup”(Global

P0:BasicSetup),anduse“Brightness”toadjustthe

contrastofthedisplay.→PG p.216

The power is turned on, but the display does

not work normally, or an error message is dis-

played. There is no sound when you play the

keyboard, and the KROME does not function

normally.

Thistypeofproblemmayoccurifadatawriting

operationtointernalmemorywasnotcompleted

correctly,forexample,ifthepoweroftheKROMEwas

turnedoffwhileaprogramorotherdatawasbeing

written.Ifthisoccurs,usethefollowingprocedureto

initializetheKROME’sinternalmemory.

1. Turnoffthepower.

2. InitializetheKROME.Whileholdingdownthe

EXITbuttonandthePAGEbuttonlocatedbeside

it,turnonthepoweroftheKROME.

TheKROMEwillbeinitialized,anddatawillbe

writtenintointernalmemory.Whilethedatais

beingwritten,thedisplaywillindicate“Nowwrit‐

ingintointernalmemory.”

Afterinitialization,alluserdatawillbeempty,and

youwillneedtore‐loadthepreloaddata.Execute

theGlobalmodemenucommandLoadPreload/

DemoDatatoloadthedata.→p.125

Operations in the display don’t work, the po-

sition has drifted, the response is poor

OntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,usetheTouch

PanelCalibrationmenucommandtoadjustthetouch

panelresponse.→PG p.217

Inordertoperformthecalibrationoptimally,usea

styluspentoaccuratelypressthecenterofthesymbol

(calibrationtarget)thatappearsinthecornerofthe

display.

Note: Ifyouareunabletoselectcommandsfromthe

menu,dothefollowing:

1. PresstheGLOBALbutton(lit).

2. PresstheEXITbuttonseveraltimes.

3. HolddowntheENTERbuttonandpress4onthe

numerickeypad.

TheTouchPanelCalibrationpagewillappear.Follow

theon‐screeninstructionstore‐calibratethetouch

panel.

Can’t switch modes or pages

Ifyou’redoinganyofthefollowing,youmaynotbe

abletochangemodesorswitchtoadifferentpage:

•Recordingorplayingbackasongorpattern.

Alternatively,couldtheKROMEbeinthepaused

PAUSE()orrecord‐readycondition?

CouldsomethingbepressingtheTouchViewdisplay?

Couldarealtimecontrolpopuporsimilarmessagebe

displayed?

• Disabling“Animation,”“ValueEditPop‐up,”

“REALTIMECONTROLSPop‐up”(GlobalP0:

BasicSetup–SystemPreferences)willimprovethe

responsetimeandperformance.

In Combination, or Sequencer modes, you

can’t edit the value of Timbre/Track parame-

ters such as MIDI Channel or Status

Someparameterscan’tbeeditedwhilenotesare

playing,eitherlocallyorfromMIDI.Ifthedamper

pedalishelddown,orifitscalibrationisincorrect,

notesmaybesustainingeveniftheyaren’taudible.

•Areyouusingadamperpedalwithapolaritythat

doesnotmatchtheDamperPolaritysetting(Global

P2:Controllers–FootControllers)?→p.18

•Insomecases,thisproblemcanbesolvedbe

executingthemenucommandHalfDamper

Calibration(GlobalP0:BasicSetup).→PG p.217

No beep sounds when you touch the display

ChecktheBeepEnablecheckbox(GlobalP0:Basic

Setup–SystemPreferences).→p.110

Audio output

No sound

Areconnectionsmadecorrectlytoyouramp,mixer,or

headphones?→p.17

Istheconnectedampormixerpowered‐on,andisits

volumeraised?

IsLocalControlturnedon?

•InGlobalP1:MIDI,checktheLocalControlOn

checkbox.→PG p.198

CouldtheVOLUMEknobbeturnedallthewaytothe

left?→p.1

IstheMasterVolumeassignedtoFootPedalAssign,

andisthatpedalvolumelowered?→p.19

Couldtheprogrambemuted?→p.27

Ifaspecifictimbredoesn’tsoundinCombination

mode,isitsPlay/MutebuttonsettoPlay?

Troubleshooting Programs and Combinations

127

Alternatively,areallSolobuttonsettingsturnedoff?

→p.46

Ifaspecifictrackdoesn’tsoundinSequencermode,is

itsPlay/Rec/MutebuttonsettoPlay?Alternatively,are

allSolobuttonsettingsturnedoff?→p.55

MakesurethattheStatusisINTorBTH.→p.50,p.57

AretheKeyZoneandVelocityZonesetsothatsound

willbeproducedwhenyouplay?→PG p.14,p.84,

p.129

IstheOscillator,DrumTrack,Timbre,orTracklevel

loweredinthecontrolsurfacemixer?→p.27,p.46,p.55

CouldtheleveloftheMasterVol um efollowingthe

totaleffecthavebeenlowered?→PG p.62,p.99,p.152

Couldthetotalpolyphonybeexceedingthemaximum

polyphonyof120voices?→p.32

Notes do not stop

InProgP1:Basic/Controllers–Note‐On/Scale,select

theProgramBasicpage,makesurethattheHoldcheck

boxisunchecked.→PG p.14

DidyouuseToneAdjusttoturnHoldon?→PG p.10

InGlobalP2:Controller,makesurethatDamper

PolarityorFootSwitchPolarityissetcorrectly.

→PG p.202

IftheDRUMTRACKorARPbuttonsareturnedon,

tryturningthemoff.

Notes are sounded in duplicate

IsLocalControlturnedOff?

•CleartheLocalControlOncheckbox(GlobalP1:

MIDI).→PG p.198

Noise or oscillation is heard

WhenusingtheMIDI/TempoSyncfunctiontocontrol

thedelaytimeofaneffect,noisemayoccurinthedelay

sound.Thisnoiseisduetodiscontinuitiesinthedelay

sound,andisnotamalfunction.

Someeffects,suchas019:StereoAnalogRecord,

generatenoiseintentionally.Itisalsopossibletocreate

oscillationusingafilterwithresonance.Thesearenot

malfunctions.

Notethatifyouusethefollowingeffectswiththe

routingdescribedbelow,afeedbackloopwillbe

created,possiblyproducingaloudnoise.Pleaseuse

caution.

Ifthesignalfromanoscillatorortimbre/trackoutput,

orthesignalafteraninserteffect,issenttotheFX

Controlbusandthatsignalisoutputdirectly,withthis

outputsenttotheFXControlbus,aloudnoisemaybe

output.(ItisalsopossiblethataDCcomponentwillbe

outputatthemaximumlevel,producingsilence.)

•Whenusingthe003:StereoLimiteror006:Stereo

Gate,andtheEnvelopeSourceoftheseeffectsisset

aseitherFXControl1orFXControl2,andTrigger

MonitorisOn.

•Whenusing174:Vocoder,withtheModulator

SourcesettoFXControl1orFXControl2,andthe

ModulatorHighMixsettootherthan0.

Can’t play chords

Couldtheprogram’sVoi ceAssignModebesetto

Mono?→p.33

Pitch is incorrect

•IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,aretheMaster

TuneandTransposesettingscorrect?→p.109

•IntheProgP2:OSC/Pitchpage,isthePitchSlope

setto+1.0?→PG p.20

•Inthecombinationorsong,aretheTransposeand

Detunesettingsofeachtimbre/trackset

appropriately?→PG p.82,p.127

•Inthetimbre/tracksettingsofeachprogram,

combination,orsong,couldyouhaveselecteda

non‐standardscaletypeotherthanEqual

Temperament?→PG p.15,p.83,p.128

Programs and Combinations

Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed

MakesurethattheOscillatorMode(ProgP1:Basic/

Controllers)parameterissettoDoubleorDouble

Drums.→p.32

Program does not sound

Couldtheoscillatororamplevelbelowered?

→PG p.5,p.6,p.35

Couldtheprogrambemuted?

•UsethePlay/MutebuttonintheProgP0:Play–

Mixer&DrumTrackpagetomute/unmutea

program,orintheCombiP0:Play–ProgramT01–

08andT09–16pagestomute/unmutea

combination.

A combination does not play correctly after

you load data

Inthedialogboxwhenyousavedthedata,didyou

checktheitemsthatyouwantedtosave?→PG p.231

Arethebank/numbersoftheprogramsusedbythe

combinationthesameaswhenthecombinationwas

created?

•Ifyouhaveswitchedprogrambanks,youcanuse

theGlobalmodeChangeallbankreferencesmenu

commandtochangetheprogrambankforeach

timbreofacombination.→PG p.216

Can’t write a Program

IstheMemoryProtectProgramorCombination

checkbox(GlobalP0)cleared?→p.110,andPG p.197

Appendices

128

Songs

Song does not play correctly after being loaded

Inthedialogboxwhenyousavedthedata,didyou

checkalloftheitemsthatyouwantedtosave?

→PG p.231

Aretheprogramsusedbythesongthesameaswhen

thesongwascreated?

•Ifyouhaveswitchedprogrambanks,youcanuse

theGlobalmodeChangeallbankreferencesmenu

commandtochangetheprogrambankforeach

trackofasong.→PG p.216

•Whensavingthesong,itisbesttouseSaveAll

(PCG&SNG)sothattheprogramsaresaved

togetherwiththesong.Thenwhenloading,load

boththe.PCGandthe.SEQdata.→PG p.231

Playback does not start when you press the

SEQUENCER START/STOP ( ) button in

Sequencer mode

IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor

Auto?→PG p.199

Can’t record in Sequencer mode

DidyouuseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrackthat

youwanttorecord?→p.60

IstheMemoryProtectSongcheckbox(GlobalP0)

unchecked?→p.110,andPG p.197

IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor

Auto?→PG p.199

A combination copied using “Copy From Com-

bi” doesn’t record via arpeggiator as it did

when you were playing it in Combination mode

IsMultiREC(SeqP0:Play/REC)checked?→p.60,and

PG p.118

ArethesettingsintheCopyfromCombinationdialog

boxcorrect?→PG p.166

•IntheCopyfromCombinationdialogbox,check

theAutoadjustArpsettingforMultiRECoption

beforeyouexecutethecopy.Thiswillcausethe

settingstobeadjustedautomatically.

Can’t record Tone Adjust data

ChangesyoumakeusingToneAdjustarerecordedas

systemexclusivedata.DidyouchecktheGlobalmode

MIDIFilterEnableExclusivecheckbox?→PG p.201

RPPR does not start

IstheSeqP0:Play/RECRPPRsettingchecked?→p.72

AreAssign,PatternSelect,andTracksetcorrectly?

→p.71

IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)parametersetto

InternalorAuto?→PG p.199

SMF you loaded in Media mode won’t play

correctly

ExecutethemenucommandGMInitializetorestore

thesettings.→PG p.165

SetBankMaptoGM(2)andloadthedataagain.

→PG p.196

Arpeggiator

The Arpeggiator does not start

IstheARPbuttonturnedon(lit)?→p.85

Ifthearpeggiatordoesnotstartforacombinationor

song,makesurethatArpeggiatorRunischecked,and

thatanarpeggiatorisselectedforAssign.→p.88,and

PG p.74,p.92,p.114

IfthearpeggiatordoesnotrunintheGlobalP6:

ArpeggioPatternpage,couldyouhavenavigated

therefromCombinationorSequencermodewith

settingsthatdonotstartthearpeggiator?

IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)parametersetto

Internal?→PG p.199

IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,isAllARP/DTOff

checked?→PG p.195

Drum Track function

The Drum Track does not start

IstheDRUMTRACKbuttonturnedon(lit)?→p.97

YoupressedtheDRUMTRACKbuttonbutthedrum

trackpatterndidnotstart.

•IstheDRUMTRACKbuttonblinking?Trigger

ModeissettoWaitKBDTrigger.Thedrumtrack

patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardor

receiveanote‐on.→PG p.56

•Didyouselectapatternthatdoesnotcontaindata?

•CouldP000:Offbeselectedasthepattern?

→PG p.55

IfthedrumtrackpatternfailstostartinCombination

mode,istheOutputsettingappropriate?

IfthedrumtrackpatternfailstostartinSequencer

mode,aretheInputandOutputsettingsappropriate?

→p.99,andPG p.146

IsMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor

Auto?→PG p.199

IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,isAllARP/DTOff

checked?→PG p.195

Drum Kits

The drumsample’s pitch does not change

YouhavelefttheAssigncheckboxunchecked,and

wanttoplaythedrumsampleattheadjacentrighta

semitonelower,butthepitchdoesnotchange.

•IfyouhaveselectedadrumprograminProgram

mode,andthenwanttoeditthedrumkitinGlobal

mode,gototheProgP2:OSC/Pitch–OSC1Pitch

pageandsetPitchSlopeto+1.0beforeyouenter

Globalmode.→PG p.20

Can’t edit the drum kit for Double Drums

OSC2

•AccesstheP2:OSC/Pitch–OSC2Setuppage,and

movetoGlobalmodebypressingtheJumpto

DrumKitEditbutton.

Troubleshooting Effects

129

Effects

Effects are not audible

Haveyouselectedeffectprogram000(NoEffect)?

•Selectaneffectotherthan000:NoEffectfor“IFX1–

5,”“MFX1,2”or“TFX.”

AretheEffectGlobalSWIFX1–5,MFX1&2,orTFX

(GlobalP0:BasicSetuppage)settingschecked?

→PG p.195

IfyouareinCombinationandSequencermode,and

mastereffectsarenotaudiblewhenyouraisethe

Send1orSend2ofthetimbre/track,doesReturn1or

Return2fromthemastereffectneedtoberaised?

→PG p.61,p.99,p.152

Alternatively,hasSend1orSend2foreachoscillator

oftheprogramusedbythetimbre/trackbeenlowered?

→PG p.96,p.148

Note: Theactualsendlevelisdeterminedby

multiplyingthesendsettingofeachoscillatorinthe

programwiththesendsettingofthetimbre/track.

Haveyouroutedtheoutputtoaninserteffect?

→PG p.57,p.58,p.96,p.98,p.148,p.149

MIDI

The KROME does not respond to incoming MIDI

data

AreallMIDIcablesorUSBcablesconnectedcorrectly?

→p.20

AretheKROME’sreceivesettings(suchastheglobal

MIDIchannelandthetimbre/track’sreceivechannel)

settomatchthechannelsofthetransmittingdevice?

→PG p.360

The KROME does not respond correctly to in-

coming MIDI data

AretheGlobalP1:MIDIsettingsMIDIFilterEnable

ProgramChange,EnableBankChange,Enable

ControlChange,EnableAfterTouch,andEnable

Exclusiveeachchecked?→PG p.200

DoestheKROMEsupportthetypesofmessagesthat

arebeingsenttoit?→PG p.360

Can’t recall programs of the desired bank

IstheBankMapsettingcorrect?→PG p.196

Damper pedal

Damper response is wrong

ExecutethemenucommandHalfDamperCalibration

(GlobalP0:BasicSetup)tocorrectlycalibratethehalf‐

damperpedalsensitivity.→PG p.217

Media

Can’t format the SD card

Doesthemediameettherequirementsforuseonthe

KROME?→p.118

Isthemediainsertedcorrectly?→p.118

Couldthemedia’sLock(writeprotect)switchbeon?

Can’t save/load data on the SD card

Isthemediainsertedcorrectly?→p.118

Hasthemediabeenformatted?→p.123

Couldthemedia’sLock(writeprotect)switchbeon?

The date of the data is wrong

Thefilesyousavedhavetheincorrectdate.

•TheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcalendar.

UsethemenucommandSetDate/Time(Media–

Utilitypage)tospecifythecurrenttimeanddate

beforeyousavethedata.→p.123

Connections with a computer

The KROME does not respond to MIDI data

sent from outside

IstheUSBcableconnectedcorrectly?→p.20

The computer does not detect the KROME

AretheUSBcablesconnectedcorrectly?

An error occurs when you disconnect from

the computer

NeverdisconnecttheKROMEfromthecomputer

whileyourhostapplicationisinuse.

While connected, you are asked to install

software or a device driver

Doestheoperatingsystemorversionofyourcomputer

supporttheKROME?

When using USB, sound processing is slow, or

the tempo is unstable

IstheKORGUSB‐MIDIdriverinstalledcorrectly?

•YoumustinstallthededicatedKorgdriverinorder

tousetheKROMEviaUSBMIDI.

Ifyourcomputer’soperatingsystemisWindows,

you’llneedtoinstallthedriverforeachUSBport

whereyouconnecttheKROME.

IfyouconnecttheKROMEtoadifferentUSBport

thantheoneyouusedwheninstallingtheKORG

USB‐MIDIDriverforWindows,you’llneedtorein‐

stalltheKORGUSBMIDIdriver.

Appendices

130

Error messages

Error and confirmation

messages

A

Are you sure ?

Meaning:Thismessageasksyoutoconfirmexecution.

ToexecutepresstheOKbutton.Tocancel,pressthe

Cancelbutton.

C

Can’t calibrate

Meaning:Calibrationcouldnotbeperformed

correctly.

•Tryagain.

Can’t copy/swap double size effect

Meaning:Whencopyingorswappinganinsertion

effectormastereffect,youattemptedtoplacea

double‐sizeeffectinIFX5andMFX2.

•Modifyyoursettingssothatadouble‐sizeeffectis

notmovedtoIFX5orMFX2,andexecuteagain.

Can’t open pattern Continue?

Meaning:Whenyoufinishedrecording,therewasnot

enoughmemorytoopenthepatternthatwasputinto

thetrack(Whenitmustbeopenedautomatically).If

youpresstheOKbutton,thepatterndatawillbe

deleted,andtherecordedoreditedcontentwillbe

saved.IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,therecorded

contentwillbediscarded.

Completed

Meaning:Theprocessingexecutedbythecommand

hasbeencompleted.

Completed. Please turn the power off, and then

on again

Meaning:ExecutionofUpdateSystemSoftwarehas

beencompletedsuccessfully.Turnthepowerswitch

off,andthenonagaintocompletetheupdate.

D

Destination and source are identical

Meaning:Whencopyingorbouncing,thesamesong,

trackorpatternwasselectedforboththesourceand

destination.Tosolvethisproblem:

• Selectadifferentsong,track,orpatternforthe

sourceanddestination.

Destination from-measure within the limits of

source

Meaning:WhenexecutingtheMoveMeasure

commandforalltracksorwithinthesametrack,the

specifieddestinationmeasureiswithinthesource

range.Tosolvethisproblem:

•Setadestinationmeasurethatisoutsideofthe

sourcerange.

Destination is empty

Meaning:Whenediting,thetrackorpatternthatwas

specifiedasthedestinationcontainsnomusicaldata.

Tosolvethisproblem:

• Selectatrackorpatternthatcontainsmusicaldata.

Destination measure is empty

Meaning:Themeasurethatwasspecifiedasthe

destinationcontainsnodata.

•Specifyadestinationmeasurethatcontainsdata.

Destination song is empty

Meaning:Thesongthatwasspecifiedasthecopy

destinationorbouncedestinationdoesnotexist.

•ExecutetheCreateNewSongcommandinthe

dialogboxthatappearswhenanewsongis

selectedbeforecopyingorbouncing.(Seepage 57)

Directory is not empty Cleanup directory

Are you sure?

Meaning:Whendeletingadirectory,filesor

directoriesexistwithinthatdirectory.

•PresstheOKbuttontodeleteallfilesand/or

directorieswithinthatdirectory.

E

Error in formatting media

Meaning:Anerroroccurredwhileperforminga

physicalformat(fullformat)orhigh‐levelformat

(quickformat)ofthemedia.Tosolvethisproblem:

•Useothermedia.

Error in reading from media

Meaning:Anerroroccurredwhilereadingdatafrom

media.Thiserrormayalsoappearwhendataisbeing

writtentomediabyaSaveorCopyoperation.Tosolve

thisproblem:

•Executethereadingprocedureonceagain.Ifthe

sameerroroccurs,itispossiblethatthedataonthe

mediahasbeendamaged.

Error in writing to media

Meaning:Averificationerroroccurredwhilewriting

datatoamedia.Tosolvethisproblem:

•Itispossiblethatthemediahasbeenphysically

damaged.Tryanothermedia.Avoidusingthe

mediathatproducedtheerror.

F

File already exists

Meaning:WhenexecutingaCreateDirectoryorFile

Renameprocedure,adirectoryorfileofthesame

namealreadyexistsonthemedia.

Meaning:WhenexecutingtheMediamodeUtility

Copycommandwithoutusingwildcards,thecopy

destinationcontainedafileofthesamenameasthe

copysource.

•Eitherdeletetheexistingdirectoryorfile,orspecify

adifferentname.

Error messages Error and confirmation messages

131

File unavailable

Meaning:Youattemptedtoloadoropenafilewhose

formatwasincorrect.

File/path not found

Meaning:WhenexecutingtheDeletecommandinthe

MediamodeUtilitypage,thespecifiedfiledidnot

exist.

Meaning:WhenexecutingtheCopycommandinthe

MediamodeUtilitypage,andyouusedawildcardto

specifythecopyfilename,thespecifiedfilewasnot

found.Alternatively,thelengthofthecopysourcepath

nameexceeded76characters.

Meaning:InMediamodewhenyouusedtheOpen

buttontoopenadirectory,thepathlengthincluding

theselecteddirectorynameexceeded76characters.

•Checkthefileordirectory.

Meaning:WhenyoupressedtheWRITEbuttontosave

yourdatainSequencermode,themediawasnotina

statethatallowedsaving,orthepreviously‐opened

directorywasnotalocationwhereSNGfilescouldbe

saved.

•Ifthesave‐destinationdirectoryissomethingother

thantheDOSdirectoryfromwhichyouopeneda

.PCGor.SNGfile,amessagesuchas“File/pathnot

found”willappear,andthedatacannotbesaved.

Inthiscase,movetoMediamode,selectan

appropriatesave‐destination,andthenexecute

SaveAllorSaveSEQ.

I

Illegal file description

Meaning:Thefilenamethatyouspecifiedwhensaving

afileorcreatingadirectorycontainedinvalid

characters.Tosolvethisproblem:

• Changethefilenameyouarespecifying.Filenames

notpermittedbyMS‐DOScannotbeusedasa

filename.

Illegal SMF data

Meaning:Youattemptedtoloadafilethatwasnota

StandardMIDIFile.

Illegal SMF division

Meaning:YouattemptedtoloadaStandardMIDIFile

thatwastimecode‐based.

Illegal SMF format

Meaning:YouattemptedtoloadaStandardMIDIFile

ofaformatotherthan0or1.

M

Master Track can’t be recorded alone

Meaning:Whenrealtime‐recordingasingletrack,you

attemptedtobeginrecordingwiththemastertrackas

thecurrenttrack.

•SelectaMIDItrackforrecording,insteadofthe

MasterTrack.

Measure number over limit

Meaning:Theattemptededitprocedurewouldcause

thetracklengthtoexceed999measures.

• Deleteunnecessarymeasures.

Measure size over limit

Meaning:WhenloadingaStandardMIDIFile,the

numberofeventsinameasureexceededthemaximum

(approximately65,535events).

Meaning:Theattemptededitprocedurewouldcause

themaximumnumberofeventsinameasure

(approximately65,535)tobeexceeded.

Tosolveeitheroftheseproblems:

•Useeventeditingetc.todeleteunwanteddata.

Media changed

Meaning:WhenexecutingtheCopycommandinthe

MediamodeUtilitypage,themediawasexchangedor

ejected,anditwasnotpossibletocopybetween

separatemediaonthesamedrive.

Media unavailable

Meaning:Youselectedamediasourcethatdoesnot

allowwriting.

Media write protected

Meaning:Theotherwriting‐destinationmediais

write‐protected.

•Turnoffwriteprotectontheothermedia,and

executethecommandonceagain.

Memory full

Meaning:Wheneditingasong,trackorpatternin

Sequencermode,thetotaldataofallsongshasusedup

allofthesequencedatamemory,andfurthereditingis

notpossible.Tosolvethisproblem:

• Deleteothersongdataetc.toregainfreememory.

Meaning:WhilerealtimerecordinginSequencer

mode,thereisnomorefreememorytoaccommodate

therecordeddata,sorecordinghasbeenforcibly

halted.Tosolvethisproblem:

• Deleteothersongdataetc.toregaintheamountof

freememory.

Memory overflow

Meaning:WhilereceivingexclusivedatainMedia

modeSaveExclusive,allremaininginternalmemory

wasusedup.Tosolvethisproblem:

•Ifyouarereceivingtwoormoresetsofexclusive

data,transmitthemseparatelytotheKROME.

Memory Protected

Meaning:Theinternalprogram,combination,song,

drumkit,userarpeggiopatternisprotected.

•InGlobalmode,turnoffwrite‐protect,andexecute

thewriteorloadprocedureonceagain.

MIDI data receiving error

Meaning:WhilereceivingMIDISystemExclusive

data,theformatofthereceiveddatawasinvalid,for

example,becausethesizeofthedatawasincorrect.

Appendices

132

N

No data

Meaning:WhenloadingaStandardMIDIFile,thefile

containednoevents.

No media

Meaning:WhenexecutingacommandinMediamode,

nomediawasinsertedinthedrive.Tosolvethis

problem:

•Insertmedia,andnavigatetoanappropriate

directorythattheKROMEwillrecognize.→p.118

No recording track specified

Meaning:Whenperformingrealtimemulti‐track

recording,youattemptedtobeginrecordingwithno

trackssettoREC.Tosolvethisproblem:

•SetthedesiredtracksforrecordingtoREC.

No space available on media

Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtosaveorcopyafile,

ortocreateadirectory,therewasnotenoughfree

spaceontheothermedia.Tosolvethisproblem:

•Eitherdeleteanexistingfile,orreplacethemedia

withanotherthatcontainssufficientfreespace.

Not enough Drum Track pattern locations

available

Meaning:Whenconvertingasong’suserpatterntoa

userdrumtrackpattern,youhaveexceededthe

numberofuserdrumtrackpatternsavailableforuse.

•Asnecessary,executetheMediamodeSavePCG

commandtosaveyouruserdrumtrackpatterns.In

Sequencermode,executethemenucommandErase

DrumTrackPatterntoincreasethenumberof

availabledrumtrackuserpatterns.Thentrythe

conversionprocedureagain.

Not enough Drum Track pattern memory

Meaning:Whenconvertingasong’suserpatterntoa

userdrumtrackpattern,therewasnotenoughfree

memory.

•Asnecessary,executetheMediamodeSavePCG

commandtosaveyouruserdrumtrackpatterns.In

Sequencermode,executethemenucommandErase

DrumTrackPatterntoeraseotheruserdrumtrack

patternsandincreasetheamountoffreememory.

Thentrytheconversionprocedureagain.

Not enough memory

Meaning:Whenstartingrealtimerecordingin

Sequencermode,theminimumamountoffree

memory(suchasmemoryfortheBAReventsuptothe

recordingstartlocation)couldnotbeallocated.To

solvethisproblem:

• Deleteothersongdataetc.toregainfreememory.

Not enough memory to load

Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtoloada.SNGfileora

standardMIDIfileinMediamode,therewas

insufficientfreememoryinthesequencememory.To

solvethisproblem:

• Deleteothersongdataetc.toregainfreememory.

Not enough memory to open pattern

Meaning:Therewasinsufficientsequencermemoryto

openthepattern,soeditingisnotpossible.

•Eitherdeleteunwanteddatasuchasasong,track,

orpattern,ordonotopenthepattern.

Not enough pattern locations available

Meaning:WhenexecutingLoadDrumTrackPattern,

theattemptedloadprocedurewouldexceedthe

remainingnumberofuserpatternsintheselected

song.

• Createanewsong,andreloadthedataintotheuser

patternsofthatsong.Youcanloadupto100user

patternsintoeachsong.Ifyouhavemoredrum

trackpatternsthanthistoload,youcandivide

thembetweentwoormoresongs.

Not enough song locations available

Meaning:Whenloadinga.SNGfilewithAppend

specified,youattemptedtoloadmoresongsthancan

beloaded.

•InSequencermode,executeDeleteSongto

increasethenumberofsongsthatcanbeused,and

thenloadthesongagain.

P

Pattern conflicts with events

Meaning:ItwasnotpossibletoexecutetheBounce

procedurebecauseoneofthetrackscontaineda

pattern,andthesamemeasureoftheothertrack

containedeventsorapattern.

•Openthepattern.

Pattern exists across destination to-end-of-

measure or source from-measure

Meaning:Whenmovingameasure,theeditprocedure

couldnotbeexecutedbecauseapatternhadbeenput

inthedestination‐endmeasure,orthesource‐start

measure,andhadnotbeenopened.

•Openthepattern.

Pattern exists in destination or source track

Open pattern?

Meaning:Apatternhasbeenplacedinthetrackthat

youspecifiedasadestinationorsourceforediting.If

youwishtoopenthepatternandexecute(theeventsof

thepatternwillbecopied),presstheOKbutton.Ifyou

wishtoexecutewithoutopeningthepattern,pressthe

Cancelbutton.

Pattern used in song Continue ?

Meaning:Whenediting,thespecifiedpatternhasbeen

placedinatrack.Ifyouwishtoexecute,presstheOK

button.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel

button.

Error messages Error and confirmation messages

133

R

Root directory is full

Meaning:Whenattemptingtocreateafileordirectory

attherootlevelofthemedia,youexceededthe

maximumnumberoffilesorfolderthatcouldbe

createdintherootdirectoryofthatmedia.

•Eitherdeleteanexistingfileordirectory,orOpena

directorytomovedownonelevelbeforecreatinga

fileordirectory.

S

Selected file/path is not correct

Meaning:Whenloadingadivided.PCGfile,you

attemptedtoloada.PCGfileofthesamenamethat

wasnotdividedorhaddifferingcontents.

•Loadthecorrect.PCGfile.

Source is empty

Meaning:Nodataexistsinthetrackorpatternthat

youspecifiedasthesource.

•Specifyatrackorpatternthatcontainsmusical

data.

Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouexecute

SwapInsertEffectifoneoftheeffectstobeswapped

(“Source1”or“Source2”)isadouble‐sizeeffect,andis

thereforeanunusableIFXnumber.

•IfyouwanttoexecutetheSwapprocedureona

double‐sizeeffect,specifyanIFXnumbertowhich

adouble‐sizeeffectisassigned.

T

The internal memory has been corrupted, likely

due to an interruption of power while the system

was writing/saving data. This has been repaired

and the affected Bank has been initialized. [OK]

Meaning:Amemorywriteproceduredidnotend

normally,perhapsbecausethepowerwasturnedoff

whileprocessingwasstillunderwayafteryouwrotea

programorotherdataintointernalmemory.

•TheKROMEwillautomaticallyinitializeitselfin

ordertorepairtheinternalmemory.Thismessage

willappearatthistime;pressOKtoclosethe

dialogbox.Insomecases,thepreloadbankdata

maybetemporarilyinitialized.Asnecessary,use

theGlobalmodeLoadPreload/DemoData

commandtoloadthepreloaddataintointernal

memory,orifyouhaveyourownbackupPCG,

loaditusingMediamode.

There is not readable data

Meaning:Eitherthefilesizeis0orthefiledoesnot

containdatathatcanbeaccessedbytheloadoropen

procedure.Alternatively,thedataisdamagedetc.,and

cannotbeloadedoraccessed.

This file is already loaded

Meaning:Whenloadingadivided.PCGfile,you

attemptedtoloadafilethathadalreadybeenloaded.

•Loadthe.PCGfilesthathavenotyetbeenloaded.

U

Unable to create directory

Meaning:Youattemptedtocreateadirectorythat

wouldexceedthemaximumpathnamelength(76

charactersforthefullpathname).

Unable to save file

Meaning:WhenexecutingtheMediamodeUtility

menucommandCopy,thecopydestinationpath

lengthexceeded76characters.

Meaning:WhensavingafileinMediamode,thesave

destinationpathexceeded76characters.

Meaning:WhenyouexecutedtheMediamodeUtility

menucommandCopy,thefilemanagementdata

exceededthesizeofthemanagementarea.

Y

You can’t undo this operation Are you sure?

Meaning:Onceyouentereventediting(evenifyou

leaveeventeditingwithoutactuallyeditinganevent),

itwillnolongerbepossibletoexecuteCompareto

listentothepreviousedit.Ifyouwishtoenterevent

editing,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,pressthe

Cancelbutton.

You can’t undo last operation Are you sure?

Meaning:Whenyouexitrecordingoreventeditingin

Sequencermode,thememoryareaforUndo(Compare

function)isnotallocated.Ifyouwishtokeepthedata

thatwasjustrecordedoredited,presstheOKbutton.

Ifyouwishtoreturntothepreviousdata(i.e.,todelete

thedatathatwasjustrecordedoredited),pressthe

Cancelbutton.

Meaning:WheneditinginSequencermode,memory

areaforUndo(Comparefunction)cannotbeallocated.

Ifyouwishtoexecutetheedit,presstheOKbutton(It

willnotbepossibletoundoyouredit).Ifyoudecide

nottoexecutetheedit,presstheCancelbutton.

•InordertoallocatememoryareaforUndo

(Comparefunction),deleteunneededdatasuchas

songs,tracks,orpatterns.Werecommendthatyou

datatomediabeforeyouexecutetheedit

procedure.

Appendices

134

Specifications

Operating temperature 0 – +40 °C

Keyboard

61-note Semi-Weighted Keyboard (velocity sensitive, no aftertouch)

Normally C2–C7 (adjustable in the range [C1...C6]–[C3...C8])

73-note Semi-Weighted Keyboard (velocity sensitive, no aftertouch)

Normally C1–C7 (adjustable in the range [C0...C6]–[C2...C8])

88-note

NH (Natural weighted hammer action) Keyboard (no aftertouch)

* The NH Keyboard delivers a playing feel similar to that of an acoustic piano, with low

notes being heavier and high notes being lighter.

System EDS-X (Enhanced Definition Synthesis-eXpanded)

Sound Engine

Maximum Polyphony

120 voices max, single mode

60 voices max, double mode

* The actual maximum polyphony will vary depending on oscillator settings such as

stereo multisamples and velocity crossfading.

Preset PCM

3.8 Gbytes (when calculated as 48kHz 16-bit linear data)

583 multisamples (including twelve stereo),

2,080 drumsamples (including 474 stereo)

Programs

Oscillator OSC1 (Single), OSC1+2 (Double): Stereo multisamples are supported

8 velocity zones per oscillator, with switching, crossfades and layers.

Filters Four types of filter routing (single, serial, parallel, 24 dB)

Two multi-mode filters per voice (low pass, high pass, band pass, band reject)

Driver Per-voice nonlinear driver and low boost.

EQ Three bands, with sweepable mid.

Modulation

For each voice, two envelope generators (Filter & Amp), two LFOs, two key tracking

generators (Filter & Amp), and two AMS mixers

In addition, pitch EG, common LFO, and two common key tracking generators

Combinations

16 Timbres Up to sixteen timbres, keyboard and velocity split/layer/crossfade, and modifications

to the program setting via the Tone Adjust function

Master Keyboard

functionality These allow you to control external MIDI devices

Drum Kits Stereo and mono drumsamples.

8-way velocity switches with crossfades and adjustable crossfade shapes (Linear, Power, Layer).

The number of

…

-Combinations

-Programs

-Drum Kits

User Combinations 512 Combinations/384 Preload

User Programs 768 Programs/640 Preload

User Drum Kits 48 Drum Kits/32 Preload

Preset Programs 256 GM2 Programs + 9 GM2 Drum Programs

Effects

5 Insert Effects In-line processing; stereo in - stereo out.

2 Master Effects Two effects sends; stereo in - stereo out.

1 Total Effect For overall processing on the main outputs, such as compression, limiting, and EQ;

stereo in - stereo out.

3-band Track EQ High, low, and sweepable mid band. Per Program in Program Mode, per Timbre in

Combination mode (16 total), and per Track in Sequencer mode (16 total).

Effects types 193 types (Usable for insert, master, or total effects. However, double-size effects

cannot be used as the total effect.)

Modulation Dynamic Modulation, two common LFOs

Effects Control Bus Stereo side-chaining for limiter, gates, vocoders, etc.

Effects Presets Up to 32 per Effect

Dual polyphonic arpeggiators

Program mode: one arpeggiator available. Combination and Sequencer modes: two arpeggiators available.

5 preset arpeggio patterns

1028 user arpeggio patterns (900 preload)

Drum Track

Preset patterns 605 patterns (Held in common with sequencer preset patterns.)

User patterns 1,000 patterns. Patterns created in Sequencer mode can be converted to drum track

user patterns.

Trigger Mode / Sync / Zone settings can be specified

Sequencer

16 MIDI Tracks & 1 Master Track

128 Songs

Resolution: 480 ppq (parts per quarter-note)

Tempo: 40.00–300.00 bpm (1/100 bpm resolution)

Up to 210,000 MIDI events

16 preset/16 user template songs

Cue List function 20 cue lists. Songs can be arranged consecutively or repeatedly in up to 99 steps. A cue

list can be converted back into a song.

Patterns/RPPR 605 Presets /100 User Patterns (per Song)

RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Recording): 1 set per Song.

Format Korg (KROME) format, SMF (formats 0 and 1) supported

Media Load, Save, Utility

Data Filer functionality (Save and Load MIDI System Exclusive Data)

Specifications Operating requirements

135

Operating requirements

KORG USB-MIDI Driver

Windows

Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP Home/Professional SP3,

Windows Vista SP2 (including 64-bit),

Windows 7 SP1 (including 64-bit)

Computer: USB port required (a USB host controller made by Intel is recommended)

Macintosh

Operating system: Mac OS X 10.5 or later.

Computer: Apple Macintosh computer with an Intel processor that has a USB port and satisfies the requirements for

running Mac OS X.

*Appearanceandspecificationsaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

Controllers

Joystick, SW1, 2

Realtime controls

SELECT buttons REALTIME CONTROLS (TONE, USER), ARP

4 knobs REALTIME CONTROL: Realtime modulation

Arpeggio control

Drum Track Buttons = DRUMTRACK

Arpeggiator Buttons = ARP

Effect On/Off Buttons = MASTER FX, TOTAL FX

User Interface

Display TouchView graphical user interface, 7 inch TFT, WVGA (800x480 dots), adjustable

brightness.

MODE Buttons = COMBI, PROG SEQ, GLOBAL, MEDIA

Value Controllers VALUE Dial, INC/DEC buttons, 10-key numeric keypad, (–) button, (.) button, ENTER

button, COMPARE button

BANK Buttons = A…F (used for Combination A, B, C, D)

SEQUENCER Buttons = PAUSE ( ), REW ( ), FF ( ), LOCATE ( ), REC ( ), START/STOP ( )

TEMPO TEMPO Knob, TAP button

Other WRITE button, PAGE button, EXIT button, VOLUME knob

Audio Outputs Analog

AUDIO OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

1/4" TS (Mono), unbalanced, Volume knob controls

Output Impedance 1.1k stereo; 550 mono (L/Mono only)

Maximum Level +16.0 dBu

Load Impedance 10 k or greater

Headphone output

1/8" TRS (Stereo), Volume knob

Output Impedance 33

Maximum Level 60+ 60 mW @33

Control Inputs DAMPER (Supports piano-style half-damper pedals as well as standard foot switches)

ASSIGNABLE SWITCH, ASSIGNABLE PEDAL

MIDI IN, OUT

USB 1 USB (TYPE B), MIDI interface

SD-Card slot Capacity recognized: SD memory cards up to 2 Gigabytes (GB). SDHC memory cards up to 32 Gigabytes (GB).

SDXC memory cards are not supported.

Power AC adapter power supply connector (DC 12V, ), Power On/Off switch

Dimensions

(W  D  H)

KROME-61 1,027 x 313 x 93 (mm)/40.43" x 12.32" x 3.66"

KROME-73 1,191 x 313 x 93 (mm)/46.89" x 12.32" x 3.66"

KROME-88 1,448 x 383 x 131 (mm)/57.01" x 15.08" x 5.16"

Weight

KROME-61 61-note 7.2 kg/15.87 lbs

KROME-73 73-note 8.2 kg/18.08 lbs

KROME-88 88-note 14.7 kg/32.41 lbs

Power Consumption

KROME-61

13WKROME-73

KROME-88

Accessories AC adapter, Quick Start guide

Accessory Disc (KROME Parameter Guide (PDF), Operation guide (PDF), Video manual etc.)

Options

XVP-10 Expression/Volume Pedal

EXP-2 Foot Controller

DS-1H Damper Pedal

PS-1, PS-3 Pedal Switch

MIDI Implementation Chart

ConsultyourlocalKorgdistributorformoreinformationonMIDIIMPLEMENTATION.

MIDI Implementation Chart

Date : 2011. 10. 04

Ver.: 1.00

KROME

*C

*E, *4

When cue list is selected, corresponds to cue list.

*1

When cue list is selected, corresponds to cue list 0-19.

*1

*1

*1

*P

Memorized

[Music Workstation]

Polyphonic aftertouch and Channel aftertouch

*A (receive)

transmitted only as sequence data

*A (receive)

All note numbers 0–127 can be transmitted

by the Arpeggiator or as sequence data

Bank Select (MSB, LSB)

*P

Joystick (+Y, –Y), Knob1-4

*C

Pedal, Portamento Time, Volume, IFX pan, Pan

*C

Expression, Eect Control 1, 2

*C

Damper, Portamento Sw., Sostenuto, Soft

*C

Sound (Realtime Control TONE 1–4: 74, 71, 79, 72)

*C

Switch 1, 2, Foot Switch, Controller

*C

Send 1, 2, Eect ON/OFF (IFXs, MFXs, TFX)

*C

Arpeggiator Controllers

*C, *2

Data Entry (MSB, LSB)

*C

Data Increment, Decrement

*C

RPN (LSB, MSB)

*C, *3

Realtime Control USER 1−4, Seq. Data *C (Seq when received)

All Sound O, Reset All Controllers

*C

0, 32

1, 2, 17, 19, 20, 21

4, 5, 7, 8, 10

11, 12, 13

64, 65, 66, 67

70–79

80–83

91–95

14, 22–25

6, 38

96, 97

100, 101

0–119

120, 121

Notes *P, *A, *C, *E:

Transmitted/received when Global P1: MIDI Filter (Program Change, Aftertouch, Control Change, Exclusive) is Enable, respectively.

*1: When Global P1: MIDI Clock is Internal, transmitted but not received. The opposite for External MIDI.

*2: Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P2: Controllers. The number shown here is the CC default assignment.

*3: RPN (LSB,MSB)=00,00: Pitch bend range, 01,00: Fine tune, 02,00: Coarse tune

*4:

In addition to Korg exclusive messages, Inquiry, GM System On, Master Volume, Master Balance, Master Fine Tune, and Master Coarse

Tune are supported.

System

Real Time

Clock

Command

Aux

Messages

Local On/O

All Notes O

Active Sense

Reset

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Default

Changed

Aftertouch

Pitch Bend

Polyphonic (Key)

Monophonic (Channel)

Program

Change Variable Range

System Exclusive

System

Common

Song Position

Song Select

Tune

Velocity Note On

Note O

Note

Number: True Voice

Mode Memorized

Messages

Altered

Control

Change

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO : Yes

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO : No

0 – 127

9n, V=1 – 127

0 – 127

1 – 16

1 – 16

0 – 127

0 – 127

9n, V=1 – 127

0 – 127

0 – 127

0 – 127 0 – 127

123 – 127

1 – 16

1 – 16

3

4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan

© 2012 KORG INC.

IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS

Thisproducthasbeenmanufacturedaccordingtostrictspecificationsandvoltagerequirements

thatareapplicableinthecountryinwhichitisintendedthatthisproductshouldbeused.Ifyou

havepurchasedthisproductviatheinternet,throughmailorder,and/orviaatelephonesale,

youmustverifythatthisproductisintendedtobeusedinthecountryinwhichyoureside.

WARNING:Useofthisproductinanycountryotherthanthatforwhichitisintendedcouldbe

dangerousandcouldinvalidatethemanufacturer’sordistributor’swarranty.

Pleasealsoretainyourreceiptasproofofpurchaseotherwiseyourproductmaybedisqualified

fromthemanufacturer’sordistributor’swarranty.